The URL can be used to link to this page

BCRUA-2024-009 - 6/26/20244/19/2024 PROJECT MANUAL as part of the Contract Documents including Addenda numbers to , inclusive) 1 3 June 6, 2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00001 – Titles and Certifications Issued for Bid Page - 1 - of 1 Titles and Certifications ENGINEER Walker Partners, LLC 6504 Bridge Point Parkway Suite 200 Austin, Texas 78730 Firm Registration Number: 8053 Freese and Nichols Inc. 10431 Morado Circle Suite 300 Austin, Texas 78759 Firm Registration Number: 2144 McKim & Creed, Inc. 8920 Business Park Drive Suite 150 Austin, Texas 78759 Firm Registration Number: 14777 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00002 – Table of Contents Issued for Bid Page - 1 - of 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00000 Title Page 00001 Titles and Certifications 00002 Table of Contents PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, & CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00100 Advertisement for Proposals (Revised by AD-01 and AD-03) 00200 Instructions to Proposers 00300 Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) 00300A Conflict of Interest Questionnaire 00300B Certificate of Interested Parties 00400 Statement of Proposers Experience 00500 Agreement 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Notice to Proceed 00610 Performance Bond 00620 Payment Bond 00630 Maintenance Bond 00700 General Conditions 00700A General Conditions - Exhibit A – Owner’s Insurance Requirements 00900 Addendum SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 21 00 Proposal Items - Scope of Work (Reissued by AD-02) 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 73 29 Demolition, Cutting and Patching 01 91 00 Facility Commissioning BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00002 – Table of Contents Issued for Bid Page - 2 - of 2 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 60 00 Grouting DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 26 Testing of Electrical Systems 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 29 13.01 Industrial Control Panels 26 43 13 Low-Voltage Surge Protective Devices DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 05 13 Topsoil 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 17 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 23 Fill 31 23 24 Flowable Fill DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 16 Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 91 19 Landscape Grading 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 06 Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Piping and Tubing 40 05 40 Process Piping Leakage Testing and Disinfection 40 05 51 Common Requirements for Process Valves 40 05 57 Actuators for Process Valves 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00002 – Table of Contents Issued for Bid Page 1 of 3 THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECTION: DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 21 00 Proposal Items - Scope of Work 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 61 03 Common Requirements for Equipment 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 73 29 Demolition, Cutting and Patching 01 91 00 Facility Commissioning DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 60 00 Grouting DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 05 13 Topsoil 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 17 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 23 Fill 31 23 24 Flowable Fill DIVISION 32 – CIVIL SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 16 Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 91 19 Landscape Grading 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 06 Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 40 Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 05 57 Actuators for Process Valves 4/19/2024 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00002 – Table of Contents Issued for Bid Page 2 of 3 THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECTION: DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 04/19/2024 Freese and Nichols, Inc Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-2144 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00002 – Table of Contents Issued for Bid Page 3 of 3 THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECTION: DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 26 Testing of Electrical Systems 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 29 13.01 Industrial Control Panels 26 43 13 Low-Voltage Surge Protective Devices DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System April 19, 2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00100 – Advertisement for Proposals Issued for Bid (Revised by AD-01 and AD-03) Page 1 of 2 ADVERTISEMENT FOR PROPOSALS (Revised by AD-01 and AD-03) The BRUSHY CREEK REGIONAL UTILITY AUTHORITY (OWNER) will receive COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS for the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 until 2:00 PM local time on May 30, 2024 June 6, 2024 (AD-03) at the City of Round Rock City Hall, 221 E. Main Street, Round Rock, Texas, 78664. The PROPOSALS shall be sealed and addressed to: Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority Attn: Sam Roberts, P.E. 221 E. Main Street Round Rock, TX 78664 The PROPOSALS will be publicly opened and read aloud at the City of Round Rock City Hall in Round Rock, Texas on May 30, 2024 June 6, 2024 (AD-03) at 2:00 PM local time. PROPOSALS received after this time will not be accepted. PROPOSALS are invited for the items and scope of work as follows: Electrical, instrumentation/controls, and minor civil/structural improvements located at four (4) different sites that regulate and maintain BCRUA raw water and finished water flows into the City of Leander water system. The construction includes installation of electrical and/or instrumentation/controls improvements at four (4) different sites, HMI programming, installation of one (1) electrical rack canopy and one (1) wall mounted electrical box awning. Instructions to Proposers, Proposal Forms, Specifications, and Contract Documents may be examined or obtained electronically beginning April 22, 2024 at www.civcastusa.com Project Name = “BCRUA DELIVERY POINTS IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2”) or for viewing only at the City of Round Rock City Hall, 221 E. Main St., Round Rock, Texas, 78664. Construction services for this project will be selected through competitive sealed proposals in accordance with Chapter 2269, of the Texas Government Code. The BCRUA will evaluate and rank the contractors based on the following selection criteria: 30% Contractor Relevant Experience and References, 60% Cost Proposal and 10% proposed schedule. The City shall select the contractor that offers the best value as determined by the selection criteria and ranking evaluation. The estimated total construction budget for this project is $1,000,000. Each PROPOSAL must be accompanied by Proposal Security made payable to OWNER in an amount of five percent (5%) of PROPOSER's total amount Proposal and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00100 – Advertisement for Proposals Issued for Bid (Revised by AD-01 and AD-03) Page 2 of 2 General contractors are invited to attend a voluntary pre-proposal conference for this project. The pre-proposal conference will be held on May 15, 2024, at 2:00 p.m. local time at the BCRUA Water Treatment Plant, 1906 Hur Industrial Blvd, Main Conference Room, Cedar Park, Texas, 78613. General contractors are invited to attend a voluntary pre-proposal conference for this project in person or by web-conferencing. The pre-proposal conference will be conducted in person on May 15, 2024 at 2:00 p.m. local time at the BCRUA Water Treatment Plant, 1906 Hur Industrial Blvd., Main Conference Room, Cedar Park, Texas, 78613. The meeting may be attended by web-conferencing or dial-in at the same time and available through the following Microsoft Teams address or dial in number: Web-Conferencing: https://teams.microsoft.com/l/meetup- join/19%3ameeting_MjIxZTViY2EtYWRhOC00NjczLTg1NDEtOTdhNmQyNGJiOWN h%40thread.v2/0?context=%7b%22Tid%22%3a%22bfe03f3b-f0a4-4d67-af3c- eb1ed30487da%22%2c%22Oid%22%3a%227333711d-1ba0-4bb7-9dfc- 6029c20e8d21%22%7d Meeting ID: 294 727 751 693 Passcode: PSMD6r Dial-in by phone: 1 830-212-4589,,286305184# United States, Medina Phone conference ID: 286 305 184# If general contractor is joining the pre-proposal conference by web-conferencing or dial- in by phone, the attendee will be required to clearly state their name, company affiliation, proposed role as prime contractor or sub-contractor, and contact information (AD-01). During the pendency of this RFP, Proposer shall not contact any City staff except those designated herein this RFP or subsequent addendums or correspondence. Any questions or concerns should be submitted via the Civcast website after the PRE-PROPOSAL meeting and at least five (5) business days prior to the Due Date (on or before May 23, 2024). Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 1 of 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS 1. Defined Terms Terms used in these Instructions to Proposers are defined in Section 00700 - General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Certain additional terms used in these Instructions to Proposers have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1.1. PROPOSER - one who submits a Proposal directly to OWNER as distinct from a sub-PROPOSER, who submits a Proposal to a PROPOSER. 1.2. Issuing Office - the office from which the Proposal Documents are to be issued and where the Proposal procedures are to be administered. 1.3. Successful PROPOSER - the PROPOSER to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 2. Copies of Proposal Documents 2.1. Complete sets of the Proposal Documents may be obtained in accordance with the Advertisement for PROPOSALS. 2.2. Complete sets of Proposal Documents must be used in preparing PROPOSALS; neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Proposal Documents or otherwise associated with the Proposal Documents. 2.3. OWNER and ENGINEER, in making copies of Proposal Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining PROPOSALS for the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. PROPOSER may not make copies of the Proposal Documents. Ownership of the Proposal Documents shall remain with the OWNER. 3. Qualifications of PROPOSERS To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each PROPOSER must submit with PROPOSAL, detailed written evidence such as previous experience, present commitments, any pending litigations related to construction contracts, and proof that the PROPOSER has the personnel, equipment, and material to execute the work required by the Contract Documents or any other such data as may be called for below. PROPOSER is to provide a list of projects completed within the last 5 years, which are comparable to this project. Each PROPOSAL must contain evidence of PROPOSER'S qualification to do business in the area where the Project is located. Contractor must BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 2 of 10 provide evidence of 5 years of successful experience of the named Project Manager or Superintendent. Contractor must ensure company employee (Project Manager or Superintendent) is available on-site during all construction activities. 4. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 4.1. It is the responsibility of each PROPOSER, before submitting a PROPOSAL: 4.1.1. To examine thoroughly the Contract Documents and other related data identified in the Proposal Documents (including "technical data" referred to below); 4.1.2. To visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy PROPOSER as to the general, local, and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.3. To consider federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.4. To study and carefully correlate PROPOSER's knowledge and observations with the Contract Documents and such other related data; and 4.1.5. To promptly notify ENGINEER and OWNER of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies which PROPOSER has discovered in or between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. 4.2. Reference is made to the General Conditions for identification of: 4.2.1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site which have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. PROPOSER may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports but not upon other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or otherwise relating to the subsurface conditions at the site, nor upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of Proposal or construction. OWNER AND ENGINEER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES THAT THE INFORMATION, DATA, INTERPRETATIONS, AND OPINIONS SHOWN, INDICATED, OR CONTAINED IN THE PLANS ARE ACCURATE, CORRECT, COMPLETE, OR FIT FOR THEIR INTENDED PURPOSES. 4.2.2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities), which BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 3 of 10 are at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. PROPOSER may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such drawings but not upon other data, interpretations, opinions, or information shown or indicated in such PLANS or otherwise relating to such structures, nor upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of Proposal or construction. OWNER AND ENGINEER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES THAT THE INFORMATION, DATA, INTERPRETATIONS, AND OPINIONS SHOWN, INDICATED, OR CONTAINED IN THE DRAWINGS ARE ACCURATE, CORRECT, COMPLETE, OR FIT FOR THEIR INTENDED PURPOSES. Copies of such reports and PLANS will be made available by OWNER to any PROPOSER on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which PROPOSER is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 of the General Conditions. PROPOSER is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn from any technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.3. Information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and OWNER and ENGINEER do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. OWNER AND ENGINEER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES THAT THE INFORMATION, DATA, INTERPRETATIONS, AND OPINIONS SHOWN, INDICATED, OR CONTAINED IN THE PLANS ARE ACCURATE, CORRECT, COMPLETE, OR FIT FOR THEIR INTENDED PURPOSES. 4.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective PROPOSERs with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing or unanticipated conditions appear in Paragraph 5.03 through 5.06 of the General Conditions. 4.5. Before submitting a PROPOSAL, each PROPOSER will be responsible to obtain such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise, which may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work, or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction to be employed by PROPOSER and safety precautions and programs incident thereto or which PROPOSER deems necessary to determine its BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 4 of 10 PROPOSAL for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 4.6. On request, OWNER will provide each PROPOSER access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as each PROPOSER deems necessary for submission of a PROPOSAL. PROPOSER must fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 4.7. Reference is made to the Contract Documents for the identification of the general nature of work to be performed at the site by OWNER (if applicable) or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work for which a PROPOSAL is to be submitted. On request, OWNER will provide to each PROPOSER for examination, access to, or copies of, Contract Documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such work. 4.8. The submission of a PROPOSAL will constitute an incontrovertible representation by PROPOSER that PROPOSER has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that, without exception, the PROPOSAL is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents, and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Contract Documents, the PROPOSER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that PROPOSER has discovered in the Contract Documents, and written resolutions thereof by ENGINEER are acceptable to PROPOSER, that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work, that the PROPOSER has no questions regarding the Work, that the PROPOSER has all information necessary to make a fully informed PROPOSAL, and that the PROPOSER has conducted all tests at the site it deems necessary. 4.9. The provisions of 4.1 through 4.8, inclusive of this Article, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material covered by Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions. 5. Availability of Lands for Work, etc. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 5 of 10 existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Proposal Documents are to be directed to ENGINEER. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed, transmitted by facsimile machine, or delivered to all parties recorded by ENGINEER as having received the Proposal Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of PROPOSALS may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications may not be relied upon and will not be binding upon OWNER or ENGINEER or legally effective. 6.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Proposal Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER. 7. Proposal Security 7.1. Each PROPOSAL must be accompanied by Proposal Security made payable to OWNER in an amount of five percent (5%) of PROPOSER's total amount Proposal and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. 7.2. The Proposal Security of Successful PROPOSER will be retained until such PROPOSER has executed the Agreement, furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Proposal Security will be returned. If the Successful PROPOSER fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within ten 10) days after the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award, and the Proposal Security of that PROPOSER will be forfeited. The Proposal Security of other PROPOSERs whom OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the thirty-sixth day after the PROPOSAL opening, whereupon Proposal Security furnished by such PROPOSERs will be returned. Proposal Security with PROPOSALS which are not competitive will be returned within fourteen (14) days after the PROPOSAL opening. 8. Contract Times The Contract Times are set forth in the Agreement. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 6 of 10 9. Liquidated Damages Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 10. Substitute and "Or-Equal" Items The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the PLANS or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the PLANS or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by ENGINEER is set forth in Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General Conditions. 11. Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others 11.1. If the General Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material and equipment) to be submitted to OWNER in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, apparent Successful PROPOSER, and any other PROPOSER so requested, shall submit with the Proposal a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, person, or organization if requested by OWNER. An OWNER or ENGINEER who, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, other person, or organization may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent Successful PROPOSER to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Proposal Price. If the apparent Successful PROPOSER declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest PROPOSER that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Proposal Security of any PROPOSER. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person, or organization listed and to whom OWNER or ENGINEER does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 7 of 10 11.2. The apparent Successful PROPOSER, prior to the Notice of Award, shall identify in writing to OWNER those portions of the Work that such PROPOSER proposes to subcontract and after the Notice of Award may only subcontract other portions of the Work with OWNER's written consent. 11.3. No CONTRACTOR shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person, or organization against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. 12. Proposal Form 12.1. The Proposal Form is included with the Proposal Documents; additional copies may be obtained from the Issuing Office(s) described in the Request for Proposal. 12.2. All blanks on the Proposal Form must be completed by printing or typing in black ink. 12.3. PROPOSALS by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary of the corporation. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. If Corporation does not have a seal, a copy of the Corporate Resolution shall be attached. 12.4. PROPOSALS by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 12.5. All names must be typed or printed in black ink below the signature. 12.6. The PROPOSAL shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda the numbers of which must be filled in on the Proposal Form). 12.7. The street and/or post office box address and telephone and/or fax number for communications regarding the PROPOSAL must be shown. 12.8. When applicable, evidence of authority to conduct business as an out-of- state corporation in the state where the Work is to be performed shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 3 above. State contractor license number, if any, must also be shown. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 8 of 10 13. Submission of PROPOSALS Each PROPOSAL shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Request for Proposal and shall be marked with the Project title and name and address of PROPOSER and accompanied by the Proposal Security and other required documents. 14. Modification and Withdrawal of PROPOSALS 14.1. PROPOSALS may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a PROPOSAL must be executed) and delivered to the place where PROPOSALS are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of PROPOSALS. 14.2. If, within twenty-four (24) hours after PROPOSALS are opened, any PROPOSER files a duly signed, written notice with OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its PROPOSAL, that PROPOSER may withdraw its PROPOSAL and the Proposal Security will be returned. Thereafter, that PROPOSER will be disqualified from further Proposal on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. 15. Opening of PROPOSALS PROPOSALS will be opened and read aloud publicly (unless obviously non-responsive) at the place where PROPOSALS are to be submitted. An abstract of the amounts of the base PROPOSALS and major alternates (if any) will be made available to PROPOSERs after the opening of PROPOSALS. 16. PROPOSALS to Remain Subject to Acceptance All PROPOSALS will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the PROPOSAL opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any PROPOSAL and return the Proposal Security prior to that date. 17. Award of Contract 17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all PROPOSALS, including without limitation the right to reject any or all nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced, or conditional PROPOSALS and to reject the PROPOSAL of any PROPOSER if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that PROPOSER, whether because the PROPOSAL is not responsive or the PROPOSER is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. OWNER also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 9 of 10 or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful PROPOSER. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the price that is most advantageous to the OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 17.2. In evaluating PROPOSALS, OWNER will consider the qualifications of PROPOSERs, whether or not, the PROPOSALS comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Proposal Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the General Conditions. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data, and guarantees of major Items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any PROPOSAL and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of PROPOSERs, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. The OWNER may rank the PROPOSERS and award the Contract on the basis of any combination of base Proposal items and additive alternative Proposal items consistent with the OWNER's available budget for the project. If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded, in accordance with Paragraph 1.3, to the highest ranked PROPOSER whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be the best value to the OWNER. 17.6. If the contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give Successful PROPOSER a Notice of Award within sixty (60) days after the day of the PROPOSAL opening. 18. Contract Security Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and payment Bonds. When the Successful PROPOSER delivers the executed Agreement to ENGINEER, the required Bonds must be delivered in accordance with Paragraph 2.01 of the General Conditions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00200 – Instructions to Proposers Issued for Bid Page 10 of 10 19. Signing of Agreement When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful PROPOSER, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within ten (10) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to ENGINEER with the required Bonds. 20. Pre-Proposal Conference A Pre-Proposal conference will be held for this project. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective PROPOSERs of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions that arise during the Proposal process. Oral statements and other interpretations or clarifications not contained in an Addenda may not be relied upon and will not be binding on OWNER or ENGINEER or legally effective. 21. Taxes 21.1. CONTRACTOR shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes except as exempted. 21.2. Sales tax. CONTRACTOR shall obtain the necessary documentation so that any sales tax exemptions due to the nature of the Work performed by CONTRACTOR or Subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement shall be applied to this Agreement, and these cost savings due to the Project's exempted status shall be passed on to OWNER. CONTRACTOR and each of its Subcontractors or sub-Subcontractors must obtain a Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Permit for all materials required to be purchased in connection with the Project. 22. Retainage Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300 – Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Page 1 of 17 PROPOSAL FORM (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) 1.0 General Conditions 1.1 This Request for Proposal (“RFP”) shall be available for viewing and download on the CivCast website www.civcastusa.com) or for viewing only at the City of Round Rock City Hall, 221 E. Main St., Round Rock, Texas 78664, from 8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, and available to interested individuals and entities (“Proposers”) from the Date Issued until the Due Date and Time. 1.1.1 Proposers are expected to examine all documents that make up this RFP. Proposers shall promptly notify the OWNER of any omission, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error that they may discover upon examination of the RFP. The OWNER assumes no responsibility for errors or misrepresentations that result from the use of incomplete proposals. 1.2 All responses to this RFP (“Proposals”) shall be submitted on the attached response forms of this RFP. Proposals must be received by the OWNER at or before 2:00 PM local time on June 6, 2024. Each Proposal must be properly identified with the subject title and date and time due. Proposals shall be submitted in written, hard-copy format, and delivered in a sealed envelope via mail, courier service, or hand delivery to: Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority Attn: Sam Roberts, P.E., General Manager 221 E. Main Street Round Rock, Texas 78664 FAXED OR E-MAILED PROPOSALS AND/OR LATE SUBMISSIONS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 1.3 All Proposals shall be addressed as shown below: Request for Proposal on: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Due Date and Time: June 6, 2024 at 2:00 PM local time. READ THIS RFP FULLY AND CAREFULLY. PROPOSALS SHALL BE COMPLETE UPON SUBMISSION, INCLUDING ALL FORMS AND ATTACHMENTS REQUIRED HEREIN. FAILURE TO STRICTLY COMPLY WITH THESE STATED TERMS OF SUBMISSION MAY RESULT IN REJECTION OF THE PROPOSAL. 1.4 During the pendency of this RFP, Proposer shall not contact any OWNER staff except those designated herein this RFP or subsequent addendums or correspondence. Any questions or concerns should be submitted via the Civcast website after the PRE-PROPOSAL meeting and at least five (5) business days prior to the Due Date (on or before May 23, 2024). 1.5 PRE-PROPOSAL Conference: A voluntary Pre-Proposal Conference will be conducted in person on May 15, 2024 at 2:00 p.m. local time at the BCRUA Water Treatment Plant, 1906 Hur Industrial Blvd., Main Conference Room, Cedar Park, Texas, 78613. The meeting may be attended by web-conferencing or dial-in at the same time and available through the following Microsoft Teams address or dial-in number: Web-Conferencing: https://teams.microsoft.com/l/meetup- join/19%3ameeting_MjIxZTViY2EtYWRhOC00NjczLTg1NDEtOTdhNmQyNGJiOWNh%40thread.v2/0?context=% 7b%22Tid%22%3a%22bfe03f3b-f0a4-4d67-af3c-eb1ed30487da%22%2c%22Oid%22%3a%227333711d-1ba0- 4bb7-9dfc-6029c20e8d21%22%7d Meeting ID: 294 727 751 693 Passcode: PSMD6r Dial-in by phone: 1 830-212-4589,,286305184# United States, Medina Phone conference ID: 286 305 184# BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300 – Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Page 2 of 17 If general contractor is joining the pre-proposal conference by web-conferencing or dial-in by phone, the attendee will be required to clearly state their name, company affiliation, proposed role as prime contractor or sub-contractor, and contact information. All interested parties planning to submit a Proposal are encouraged to attend this conference. 1.6 Receipt of an addendum to a Proposal must be acknowledged by signing and returning the addendum with the Proposal. Addenda information will be posted on the CivCast website as specified in Section 1.1. 1.7 All information required of the proposer, unless otherwise specified, must be completed on the forms provided by the OWNER. Failure to manually sign the Proposer Qualifications (Section 00400) will disqualify Proposer. Persons signing the Proposal shall have the authority to sign the Proposal on Proposer’s behalf and shall be an officer or person authorized to bind the entity they represent to this proposal. 1.8 Proposer shall submit a Proposal that is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda. Proposed deviations from the terms, conditions, specifications, or performance requirements of this RFP shall be listed on the Deviation Form (Article 6.0 of this RFP) upon submission of your Proposal. Proposed deviations shall include a description of the deviation, benefits to the Owner, and the proposed change in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. Listing of deviations is an integral and required part of your Proposal. Any deviations not listed on the Deviation Form (Article 6.0 of this RFP) upon submission of your Proposal will not become part of the contract awarded by the Owner pursuant to this RFP. Acceptance of proposed deviations is at the sole discretion of the Owner and will not be considered if the intent of the change is not clearly understood or is not deemed to be in the Owner’s best interest. 1.9 Proposals will be opened at 2:00 PM local time on June 6, 2024. Proposals cannot be altered or amended after the deadline. 1.10 The OWNER, in its sole discretion, may negotiate changes to any submitted Proposal, including price, after submitted Proposals have been opened, in accordance with the Texas Government Code 2269. 1.11 The OWNER reserves the right to accept and/or reject any and all submitted Proposals or any part thereof, waive immaterial errors, and award the contract in the best interest of the OWNER. 1.12 The OWNER shall be the sole interpreter of the terms, conditions, specifications, and performance requirements of this RFP. 1.13 The Owner will award the contract to the Proposer offering the best value, and not necessarily to the Proposer offering the lowest price. 1.14 If it is determined that any benefit to secure favorable treatment was offered, elicited, or provided by Proposer or Proposer’s employee, affiliate, representative, partner, subcontractor, or agent, to any officer or employee of the OWNER, Proposer will be disqualified from consideration and/or the awarded contract will be terminated. 1.15 All goods, raw materials, and products provided pursuant to the awarded contract must be new and not used, shop worn, or reconditioned. 1.16 All work must be in compliance with and conform to any and all applicable state or local laws, ordinances, regulations, codes, rules, policies, and interpretations thereof. 1.17 Once a Proposal has been selected, items or processes may be substituted only by furnishing an equal or superior quality and/or grade product or process than originally specified at no additional cost to the OWNER. Any such substitution shall be pre-approved by the OWNER, and the acceptance of any such substitution shall be in the OWNER’s sole discretion. 1.18 Any contract awarded pursuant to this RFP is not assignable. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300 – Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Page 3 of 17 1.19 The OWNER is tax exempt under Tax code, Subtitle E. SALES, EXCISE, AND USE TAXES, CHAPTER 151, section 151.309. 1.20 Invoices for partial payment must be approved in advance by the Project Manager. 1.21 Undisputed payments will be submitted to Proposer with in thirty (30) days from receipt of original invoice. 1.22 Any contract awarded pursuant to this RFP shall be governed by the Uniform Commercial Code. Wherever the Uniform Commercial Code” is used, it shall be construed as meaning the Uniform Commercial Code as adopted in the State of Texas effective and in force on the date of any such agreement between the OWNER and Proposer. 1.23 Any proposal and its contents is subject to the Texas Public Information Act. Proposers who include information in a Proposal that is legally protected as a trade secret or confidential information must clearly indicate the specific protected information by highlighting that information and marking it “Trade Secret” or “Confidential” at the appropriate place. The OWNER will not be responsible for any public disclosure of the trade secret or confidential information. An awarded Proposal in its entirety is not confidential. If a request is made under the Texas Public Information Act to inspect information designated as trade secret or confidential in a Proposal, Proposer shall, upon notification by the OWNER, immediately furnish sufficient written reasoning as to why the information should be protected from disclosure in a timely manner to the Texas Attorney General for final determination at the address below: Office of the Attorney General Open Records Division P.O. Box 12548 Austin, TX 78711 Fax (512) 494-8017 1.24 The obligations of the parties under a contract awarded through this RFP are primarily performable in Williamson County, Texas. Exclusive venue shall be Williamson County, Texas, and any contract awarded under this RFP shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas. 1.25 The OWNER may, at its option, offset any amounts due and payable under a contract awarded under this RFP against any debt (including taxes) lawfully due to the OWNER from the successful Proposer, regardless of whether the amount due arises pursuant to the terms of the contract or otherwise, and regardless of whether or not the debt due to the OWNER has been reduced to judgment by a court. 1.26 No member of the Cedar Park, Round Rock, and Leander City Council or any OWNER employee shall have any financial interests in the profits of any contract, service or other work performed by the Proposer(s) or personally profit directly or indirectly from any contract, purchase, sale or service between the OWNER and any person or company. 1.27 The awarded contract is subject to the appropriation of funds by the OWNER’s Board in the OWNER’s budget adopted for any fiscal year for the specific purpose of making payments pursuant to the awarded contract or that fiscal year. The obligation of the OWNER pursuant to the awarded contract in any fiscal year for which the awarded contract is in effect shall constitute a current expense of the OWNER for that fiscal year only, and shall not constitute an indebtedness of the OWNER of any monies other than those lawfully appropriated in any fiscal year. In the event of non-appropriation of funds in any fiscal year to make payments pursuant to the awarded contract, the awarded contract may be terminated. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300 – Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Page 4 of 17 2.0 Special Conditions 2.1 Scope of Work. 2.1.1 Proposer shall provide contractor services for construction of the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Project as per the plans and specifications, as provided with this RFP. 2.1.2 The estimated budget for BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Project is $1,000,000. 2.1.3 The successful Proposer shall be and remain an independent contractor throughout the term of any contract awarded pursuant to this RFP. 2.2 Proposal Selection Criteria: Award of the Contract resulting from this solicitation shall be under the selection process described herein. A committee appointed by Owner will evaluate Proposals submitted in response to this solicitation. The three (3) divisions of selection criteria (“Divisions”) are as follows A. Contractor Relevant Experience and References 30% B. Cost Proposal 60% C. Proposed Schedule 10% Total: 100% Complete and submit the Proposal form along with all required documents identified in this Section. Proposers must provide the information requested using the forms attached to this Section. Information in these forms must be provided completely and in detail. The information in these forms will be used to make direct comparisons with the qualification requirements. Failure to include the information completely and clearly may result in a determination that the Proposer is not qualified for this project. Certain forms allow for information that cannot be totally incorporated in the forms to be included as an attachment to the form. Attachments must be clearly referenced by attachment number in the form, and the attached material must include the attachment number on every sheet of the attachment. The attachment must include only the information that responds to the question or item number to which the attached information applies. Following an analysis and evaluation of the Proposals, ranking of the Proposers will be made based upon the selection criteria. Subjective judgment on the part of the Owner is implicit in the criteria selection process. The selection process permits placing technical considerations above total price. Therefore, the Owner reserves the right to award to other than the entity with the lowest proposed price. Once the Proposers have been ranked, the Owner will begin contract negotiations with the first ranked Proposer. If the Owner is unable to come to terms with the first ranked Proposer, discussions will be terminated and the Owner will proceed to the next ranked Proposer and repeat the process until a contract agreement is reached or all Proposals are rejected. Once a contract agreement is reached with a Proposer, approval from the Owner Board is required to authorize the General Manager to execute the construction contract. After opening and ranking, an award may be made on the basis of the initially submitted proposal, without discussion, clarification or modification, or the Owner may discuss with the selected Proposer, offers for cost adjustment and other elements of the Proposal. Any Proposal may be considered unacceptable if the committee determines it fails to provide adequate technical or pricing information in the Proposals as specified in these Instructions to Proposers. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300 – Proposal Form (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-01, AD-02, and AD-03) Page 5 of 17 Selection Criteria A. Contractor Relevant Experience and References – 30% 1. Provide a team organizational chart. 2. Experience as a general contractor with specific experience in facilities construction projects of the same or similar type, size, nature and class as the Project being proposed. Consideration will be given to the number of years of experience, which a Proposer has. 3. Representative projects (dollar value and/or scope/size) must be submitted as references to include the project name, architect or engineer, and cost of the project. Provide valid contact information for the project owner and the architect or engineer. Consideration will only be given to projects which are occupied or substantially complete. 4. References provided in Item 5.0 of this document. References may be checked from customers other than those listed. B. Cost Proposal – 60% 1. The Owner will consider the total contract cost as part of its evaluation. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination unless otherwise specifically provided in the Proposal Documents. 2. The Proposer submitting the lowest proposed amount shall receive the highest number of points in the category, and the Proposer submitting the highest proposed amount shall receive the lowest number of points awarded in this category. Delivery schedule can affect this ranking. C. Proposed Schedule – 10% 1. Time is of essence to the Owner. Amount of time for construction, proposed by each Proposer, will influence the number of points awarded in this category. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 3.0 Proposal Form THIS PROPOSAL IS SUBMITTED TO: Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority Attention:Sam Roberts, P.E.,General Manager 221 E. Main Street Round Rock,Texas 78664 3.1 The undersigned PROPOSER proposes and agrees, if this PROPOSAL is accepted,to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Price and within the Times indicated in this FORM and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. PROPOSER accepts the terms of the form of Agreement and the Contract Documents. 3.2 PROPOSER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL and Instructions to Proposers including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Proposal Security.This Proposal will remain subject to acceptance for sixty(60)days after the day of opening. 3.3 In submitting this PROPOSAL, PROPOSER represents and warrants,as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: (a) PROPOSER has examined and carefully studied the Proposal Documents and Addenda, including the Question and Answers provided on the CivCast website for the project. PROPOSER hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:(List Addenda by Addendum Number and Date). Addendum No.: ot DatedA414 207,q Addendum No.: Dated: / ZoZ Addendum No.: Dated:/AZ% O (b) Proposer has visited the site,has conducted all testing at the site Proposer deems necessary,has become familiar with,has taken into consideration in formulating its Proposal,and accepts the general,local and site conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance,and furnishing of the Work. (c) Proposer is familiar with, has taken into consideration in formulating its proposal and accepts all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance, and furnishing of the Work. (d) PROPOSER has carefully studied all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at, or contiguous to, the site and all drawings of physical conditions in, or relating to, existing surface or subsurface structures at, or contiguous to, the site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified as provided in Paragraph 5.03 of the General Conditions. PROPOSER accepts the determination set forth in Paragraph 5.03 of the General Conditions of the extent of the "technical data"contained in such reports and drawings upon which PROPOSER is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 of the General Conditions. PROPOSER understands, acknowledges, and agrees that such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for PROPOSER's purposes. PROPOSER understands, acknowledges, and agrees that OWNER and ARCHITECT are not responsible for and make no warranties regarding the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the PROPOSAL Documents with respect to surface and subsurface conditions and Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site. PROPOSER has obtained and carefully studied and is responsible for obtaining and studying any and all such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurfacea d Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work,or which relate to any aspect Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 6 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by PROPOSER and safety precautions and programs incident thereto as may be necessary.PROPOSER does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations,tests, studies or data are necessary for the determination of this PROPOSAL for performance and furnishing of the Work in accordance with the times,price,and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (e) PROPOSER is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the site that relates to Work for which this PROPOSAL is submitted as indicated in the Contract Documents. (f) PROPOSER has correlated the information known to PROPOSER, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents,and all additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests,studies,and data with the Contract Documents. (g) PROPOSER has given ARCHITECT written notice of all conflicts,errors,ambiguities,or discrepancies that PROPOSER has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution thereof by ARCHITECT is acceptable to PROPOSER;PROPOSER has no questions regarding the Work; PROPOSER has all information necessary to make a fully informed PROPOSAL;and the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work for which this PROPOSAL is submitted. (h) This PROPOSAL is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm,or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association,organization or corporation; PROPOSER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other PROPOSER to submit a false or sham PROPOSAL; PROPOSER has not solicited or induced any person,firm,or corporation to refrain from PROPOSAL;and PROPOSER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other PROPOSER or over OWNER. 3.4 PROPOSER is duly qualified to carry on business in the State of Texas; possesses or has the ability to possess all licenses, permits,and certificates of authority necessary to commence and to complete the Work in accordance with the PROPOSAL Documents;is fully qualified and has experience in performing work of the same type as the Work covered by the PROPOSAL Documents;and will provide all necessary labor,superintendence, machinery,equipment,tools,materials, services, and other means of construction to complete all work upon which PROPOSER proposes and complete said work within the time stated and for maintaining same as required for the following prices: Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 7 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 3.5 PROPOSAL PRICING/SCHEDULE BASE PROPOSAL: Item No. Quantity Unit Item Description Unit Price Amount Bonds, Insurance, 1 1 LS Mobilization, and N/A $25,000.00 Demobilization 2 444 LF Silt Fence Erosion Control $8.87 $3,938.28 3 4,300 SF Revegetate Disturbed Areas $1.06 $4,558.00 BCRUA-City of Leander Raw 4 1 LS Water Delivery Point- Control Valve and Meter N/A $46,443.00 Vault Improvements BCRUA-City of Leander Raw 5 1 LS Water Delivery Point- Demolition of Radio Tower N/A $2,747.00 and Existing Control Panels. BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point- 6 1 LS BCRUA Control System, Power Supply, and N/A $64,113.00 Communications Equipment Improvements. BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point- Fall- 7 1 LS of-Potential Testing of N/A $3,496.00 Electrical Grounding System. BCRUA-City of Leander Raw 8 1 LS Water Delivery Point— Grounding System N/A $6,866.00 Improvements BCRUA-City of Leander 9 1 LS Solenoid Valve- Modifications in Existing N/A $19,454.00 Solenoid Valve Vault. Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 8 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Item No. Quantity Unit Item Description Unit Price Amount BCRUA-City of Leander 10 1 LS Solenoid Valve- New Wall Mounted Control Panel N/A $95,553.00 Improvements. BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve- New Wall 11 1 LS Mounted Shade Awning N/A $12,894.00 over new Control Panel, Complete and In Place. BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve- 12 1 LS Modification of PLC Programming at Adjacent N/A $2,136.00 Leander WWTP to Remove Solenoid Valve Controls. BCRUA-City of Leander 13 1 LS Solenoid Valve—Fall-of- N/A $3,496.00 Potential Testing BCRUA-City of Leander 14 1 LS Solenoid Valve—Grounding N/A $6,866.00 System Improvements BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point- 15 1 LS New Canopy over Existing Electrical/Control Panel N/A $29,552.00 Rack, Complete and In Place. BCRUA-City of Leander 16 1 LS Travisso Delivery Point- Existing Motorized Actuator N/A $3,745.00 Improvements BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point- 17 1 LS BCRUA Travisso Control N/A $59,386.00 Cabinet Improvements and Programming. Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 9 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Item No. Quantity Unit Item Description Unit Price Amount BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point- 18 1 LS BCRUA EST Control Panel N/A $44,044.00 Improvements and Programming BCRUA-City of Leander 19 1 LS Travisso Delivery Point— N/A $3,496.00 Fall-of-Potential Testing BCRUA-City of Leander 20 1 LS Travisso Delivery Point— Grounding System N/A $6,866.00 Improvements BCRUA-City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point- Control Panel Components, 21 1 LS Power Supply, N/A $47,405.00 Communications, and Programming Improvements. BCRUA-City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point- Fall- 22 1 LS of-Potential Testing of N/A $3,496.00 Electrical Grounding System. BCRUA-City of Leander 23 1 LS Bagdad Delivery Point— Grounding System N/A $6,866.00 Improvements BCRUA Ignition HMI 24 1 LS Reprogramming, Graphics Updates, and Alarm N/A $45,504.00 Updates. Leander Ignition HMI 25 1 LS Reprogramming, Graphics Updates, and Alarm N/'°` $64,080.00 Updates. TOTAL BASE PROPOSAL AMOUNT $612,000.28 Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 10 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) TOTAL CALENDAR DAYS FOR SUBSTANTIAL CONSTRUCTION (not to exceed 270 calendar days). Contractor proposes a contract duration of V Calendar days. ATTEST: Very truly yours (SEAL, if PROPOSER is Corporation) (Signature) (Typed or Printed Name) Title: Vice President PROPOSER: Control Panels USA, Inc. (Name of Company) Address: 16310 Bratton Lane Suite 100 Austin, Texas 78728 Telephone No.: (512) 863-3224 Facsimile No.: N/A Surety Company: Frankenmuth Insurance Co. Address: 1 Mutual Avenue Frankenmuth, MI 48787 Telephone No.: (704)421-7002 Facsimile No.: N/A Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 11 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 4.0 Proposer Profile Company Name or D/B/A: Control Panels USA,Inc. Telephone Numbers: Phone: (512) 863-3224 Fax: N/A Corporate Contact for this Proposal: Name: Brian Wetherholt Address: 16310 Bratton Lane, Suite 100 City,State,Zip: Austin,TX 78728 Phone: (512) 863-3224 Fax: N/A E-mail: bwetherholt@controlpanelsusa.net Website: www.controlpanelsusa.net If local contact is the same as corporate contact,check here Local Contact for this Proposal Name: Address: City,State,Zip: Phone: Fax: E-mail: Other company names used with dates,from/to: N/A Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 12 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 5.0 References Proposer shall submit a list of at least three (3) references for which Proposer has provided like products or services. References will include contact name and telephone number. Proposals submitted without three references may be disqualified from consideration.Cedar Park/Austin area references are preferred. Owner: City of Round Rock, Texas Contact name: Miranda Whiteard Phone number: (512) 763-6097 Owner: City of Leander, Texas Contact name: Kenley Crowder Phone number: (512)259-2640 Owner: City of Georgetown, Texas Contact name: Justin Breithaupt Phone number: (512) 931-7677 Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 13 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 6.0 Deviation or Compliance Form DEVIATIONS: In the event the undersigned Proposer intends to deviate from the general terms, conditions, special conditions or specifications contrary to those listed in the"Terms and Conditions"and other information attached hereto, all such deviations must be LISTED ON THIS PAGE, with complete and detailed conditions and information also being attached (attach additional pages as necessary). NO DEVIATIONS: In the absence of any deviation entry on this page, Proposer assures the OWNER of Proposer's compliance with the Terms,Conditions,Specifications,and information contained in this RFP. All Proposers MUST COMPLETE this page. RETURN with Proposal or Proposal will be considered NON RESPONSIVE. Our Proposal is submitted according to: Deviations listed above OR No Deviations Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 14 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 7.0 Non-Collusion Acknowledgment The undersigned Proposer affirms that they are duly authorized to execute this Proposal,that this company,corporation, firm,partnership or individual has not prepared this Proposal in collusion with any other Proposer,and that the contents of this Proposal as to prices, terms and conditions thereof have not been communicated by the undersigned Proposer, nor by Proposer's employee, affiliate, representative, partner, subcontractor,or agent,to any other individual or entity engaged in this type of business prior to the official opening of this RFP. Company Name: Control Panels //USA, Inc.. Signature of Company Officer: j��— !�l/ GL✓ 4— Company Officer Printed Name: Title Vice President 8.0 Suspension or Debarment Certificate Non-Federal entities are prohibited from contracting with or making subcontract awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement for goods or services equal to or in excess of $100,000.00. Contractors receiving individual awards for $100,000.00 or more and all subcontract recipients must certify that the organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred. By submitting this offer and signing this certificate, Proposer certifies that no suspension or disbarment is in place,which would preclude receiving a federally funded contract underthe Federal OMB,A-102,Common Rule. Vendor Name Control Panels USA, Inc. D to 6/6/2024 Signature of Company Officer: Company Officer printed name: �C`�c-yl, L)e-4 f e.,- 6 L� E-mail Address bwetherholt@controlpanelsusa.net Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 15 of 17 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00300—Proposal Form(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) 9.0 Conflicts of Interest The Texas Ethics Commission adopted the attached Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (Form CIQ) pursuant to Texas Local Government Code Chapter 176,as amended. For questions about these forms, please see the Texas Ethics Commission at: https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/forms/CIQ.pd Proposer shall answer each question in the attached Form CIQ in relation to the following individuals and submit a completed form with its Proposal: Local Government Officer Title Anne Duffy Board Member Matthew Baker Board Member Jason Anderson Board Member Na'Cole Thompson Board Member Rene Flores Board Member Mel Kirkland Board Member Sam Roberts General Manager Steve Sheets Attorney Kenneth Wheeler Oversight Committee Michael Thane Oversight Committee Dan Grimsbo Oversight Committee 10.0 Disclosure of Interested Parties Prior to entering into a contract that is over one million dollars in value,the Proposer must submit a "Certificate of Interested Parties"Form, in accordance with Texas Government Code Section 2252.908, as amended.Within 30 days of receipt of the form,the OWNER must submit a copy to the Texas Ethics Commission.The Certificate of Interested Parties form is attached. Issued for Bid(Reissued by AD-01,AD-02,and AD-03) Page 16 of 17 Form Request for Taxpayer Give Form to the (Rev October 20113) Identification Number and Certificationrequester.ba not Department of the Treasury send to the IRS. Internal Ravenua Service llp-Go to www.irs.gov/FormW9 for instructions and the latest Information. 1 Name(as shown on your Income tax return).Name Is required on this Ilne;do not leave this Ilne blank. Control Panels USA Inc. 2 Business name/disregarded antlly name,If different from above Q) 3 Check appropriate box for federal tax classification of the person whose name is enterers on line 1.Check only one of the 4 Exemptions(codes apply only to following seven boxes. certain antities,not individuals,see CIL Instructions on page 3); o ❑ individual/solo proprietor or ❑ C Corporation 0 S Corporation ❑ Partnership ❑Trust/estate d single member LLC Exempt payee code(If any) ❑ Limited liability company.Enter the tax classification(C=C corporation,S=S corporation,P-Partnershlp) _.._.. ._.,n i Nate.Check the appropriate box in the line above for the tax classification of the single member owner. Do not check Exemption from FATCA reporting LLC If the LLC is classified as a single-member LLC that Is disregarded from the owner unless the owner of tho LLC is cede(if any) another LLC that Is not disregarded from the owner for U.S federal tax purposes.Otherwise,a singla-member LLC that _- ,� Is disregarded from the owner should check the appropriate box for the tax classification of its owner. ❑ Other(see Instructions)10, VV*,1 s to Mavl n w wwsa m®u.sJ 5 Address(number,street,and apt.or suite no.)See Instructions. Requester's name and address(optlonai) 16310 Bratton Lane,Suite 100 0 City,state,and ZIP code Austin,TX 70720 7 Lis4 account numbers)here(optlonafj ` 7' ��yer 9d�ntiH��ti�n Number{TINj Enter your TIN In the appropriate box.The TtN provided must match the name given on line 1 4o avoid Soofel s®ouri4y number backup withholding.For individuals,this is gen®rally your social security number(SSN).However,far a - - rasid®nt alien,sole proprietor,ar disregarded entity,see the instructions for Part I,later. For other entities,it is your employer Identification number(EIN}.If you do not have a number,see Naw to get a TfN,tater. or Note:If the account is In more than one name,see the instructions for line 1.Also see What Name and Employer Identificatlen number Number To(give the Requester for guidelines on whose number to enter. 7 4 2 9 3 3 1 0 0 ` - �erti�Gati®n Under penalties of perjury,I certify that; 1.The number shown on this form is my correct taxpayer Identification number(or I arts waiting for a number to be Issued to me);and 2.1 am not subject to backup withholding because:(a)I am exempt from backup withholding,or(b)I have not been notified by the Intemat Revenue Service(IRS)that I am subject to backup withholding as a result of a fallure to report all interest or dividends,or(c)the IRS has notified me that I am no longer subject to backup withholding;and 3.1 am a U.S.citizen or other U.S.person(defined below);and 4.The FATCA coda(s)entered on this form(if any)indicating that I am exempt from FATCA reporting Is correct, Certification Instructions.You must cross out Item 2 above If you have been notified by the IRS that you are currently subject to backup withholding because you have failed to report all interest and dividends on your tax retum,For real estate transactions,item 2 does not apply.For mortgage interest paid, acquisition or abandonment of secured property,cancellation of debt,contributions to an individual retirement arrangement(IRA),and generally,payments other than interest and dividends,you are not required to sign the certification,but you must provide your correct TIN.See the instructions for Part 11,later. �I�n Signature of i�t're U.S,peraon General Instructions o Form 1099-DIV(dividends,including those from stocks or mutual funds) Section references are to the Internal Revenue Code unless otherwise ®Form 1099-MISC(various types of income,prizes,awards,or gross noted, proceeds) Future developments.For the latest information about developments a Form 1099-g(stock or mutual fund sales and certain other related to Form W-9 and its instructions,such as legislation enacted transactions by brokers) after they were published,go to www.irs.gov/F6rmW9. e Form 1099-5(proceeds from real estate transactions) Purpose of Form ®Form 1099•K(merchant card and third party network transactions) An individual or entity(Form W-9 requester)who is required to file an ®Form 1098(home mortgage interest), 1098-E(student loan interest), information return with the IRS must obtain your correct taxpayer 1098-T(tuition) identification number(TIN)which may be your social security number ®Form 1099-C(canceled debt) (SSN),individual taxpayer identification number(ITIN),adoption Form 1099 A(acquisition or abandonment of secured property) taxpayer identification number(ATIN),or employer identification number (EIN),to report on an information return the amount paid 11-you,or other Use Form W-9 only if you are a U.S.person(includirf g a resident amount reportable on an information retum.Examples of linformation alien),to provide your correct TiN. returns include, but are not limited to,the following. If you do not return Form W-9 to the requester with a 77N,you might ®Form 1099-INT(interest earned or paid) be subject to backup withholding,See What is backup withholding, later. Cat.No,10231X Form ®9(Rev.10-2019) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIO For vendor doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. OFFICE USE ONLY This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code, by a vendor who Date Received has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1), Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code.An offense under this section is a misdemeanor. 1J Name of vend/or who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. /v 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire.(The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) 31 Name of local government officer about whom the information is being disclosed. Name of Officer 4j Describe each employment or other business relationship with the local government officer,or a family member of the officer,as described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A). Also describe any family relationship with the local government officer. Complete subparts A and B for each employment or business relationship described. Attach additional pages to this Form CIO as necessary. A. Is the local government officer or a family member of the officer receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor? Yes F-1 No B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income,other than investment income,from or at the direction of the local government officer or a family member of the officer AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? F1 Yes F-1 No 5J Describe each employment or business relationship that the vendor named in Section 1 maintains with a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director,or holds an ownership interest of one percent or more. 6 ❑ Check this box if the vendor has given the local government officer or a family member of the officer one or more gifts as described in Section 176.003(a)(2)(B), excluding gifts described in Section 176.003(a-1). 7 -.3= z'6L'f Signature of vendor doing business with the governmental entity Date Form provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Revised 1/1/2021 Revised 1/1/2021FormprovidedbyTexasEthicsCommissionwww.ethics.state.tx.us CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE For vendor doing business with local governmental entity A complete copy of Chapter 176 of the Local Government Code may be found at http://www.statutes.legis.state.tx.us/ Docs/LG/htm/LG.176.htm. For easy reference, below are some of the sections cited on this form. Local Government Code § 176.001(1-a): "Business relationship" means a connection between two or more parties based on commercial activity of one of the parties. The term does not include a connection based on: A) a transaction that is subject to rate or fee regulation by a federal, state, or local governmental entity or an agency of a federal, state, or local governmental entity; B) a transaction conducted at a price and subject to terms available to the public; or C) a purchase or lease of goods or services from a person that is chartered by a state or federal agency and that is subject to regular examination by, and reporting to, that agency. Local Government Code § 176.003(a)(2)(A) and (B): a)A local government officer shall file a conflicts disclosure statement with respect to a vendor if: 2) the vendor: A) has an employment or other business relationship with the local government officer or a family member of the officer that results in the officer or family member receiving taxable income, other than investment income, that exceeds $2,500 during the 12-month period preceding the date that the officer becomes aware that i) a contract between the local governmental entity and vendor has been executed; or ii) the local governmental entity is considering entering into a contract with the vendor; B) has given to the local government officer or a family member of the officer one or more gifts that have an aggregate value of more than $100 in the 12-month period preceding the date the officer becomes aware that: i) a contract between the local governmental entity and vendor has been executed; or ii) the local governmental entity is considering entering into a contract with the vendor. Local Government Code § 176.006(a) and (a-1) a)A vendor shall file a completed conflict of interest questionnaire if the vendor has a business relationship with a local governmental entity and: 1) has an employment or other business relationship with a local government officer of that local governmental entity, or a family member of the officer, described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A); 2) has given a local government officer of that local governmental entity, or a family member of the officer, one or more gifts with the aggregate value specified by Section 176.003(a)(2)(B), excluding any gift described by Section 176.003(a-1); or 3) has a family relationship with a local government officer of that local governmental entity. a-1) The completed conflict of interest questionnaire must be filed with the appropriate records administrator not later than the seventh business day after the later of: 1) the date that the vendor: A) begins discussions or negotiations to enter into a contract with the local governmental entity; or B) submits to the local governmental entity an application, response to a request for proposals or bids, correspondence, or another writing related to a potential contract with the local governmental entity; or 2) the date the vendor becomes aware: A) of an employment or other business relationship with a local government officer, or a family member of the officer, described by Subsection (a); B) that the vendor has given one or more gifts described by Subsection (a); or C) of a family relationship with a local government officer. No Text THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BID BOND Frankenmuth Insurance Company One Mutual Avenue, Frankenmuth, MI 48787 CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place of business) Control Panels USA Inc. Frankenmuth Insurance Company 16310 Bratton Lane, Bldg 1,#100 1 Mutual Avenue Austin,TX 78728 Frankenmuth, MI 48787 OWNER: (Name, legal status and ad(lress) Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority 221 East Main Street Round Rock,TX 78664 BOND AMOUNT: Five Percent of Amount Bid 5% PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project nuntber, if any) Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 (3-00816) The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally,as provided herein. 'The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents,or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either(1)enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid,and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance oi'such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material 111mished in the prosecution thereof, or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time f'or acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents,and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty(60)days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been funiished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted hercfrom and provisions conibrming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so luniished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. The Company executing this bond vouches that this document conforms to American Institute of Architects Document A310,2010 edition 1 Signed and scaled this 30th day of May 2024 Control Panels USA Inc. L (Principal) (Seal) Wi ness) (Tide) Frankenmuth Insurance CompanyINSOR^"C(� �oanres '0 (Surety) U (Seal) is6s ICHIGNN Courtney J. Goulding,Attorney-in-Fact Nneas) Ric Pleasant, Jr. (Title) The Company executing this bond vouches that this document conforms to American Institute of Architects Document A310,2010 edition 2 FRANKENMUTII INSURANCE COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,that Frankenmuth Insurance Company(the"Company"),a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the Stair, of Michigan, having its principal affiro at I Mutual Avenue, Frankeutnuth, Michigan 48787, does hereby nominate,constitute and appoint: Courtney J. Goulding Their true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity il'more than one is named above, to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, contracts and undertakings of suretyship, with the exception of Financial Guaranty Insurance,provided, however,Ilial the penal sum of any one such instrument shall not exceed the sum of: Fifty Million and 00/100 Dollars($50,000,000) Surety Bond#: Bid Bond Principal: Control Panels USA Inc. Obligee: Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority This Power of Attorney is granted pursuant to the following Resolution duly adopted at a meeting of the Board of Directors of Frankenmuth Insurance Company: "RESOLVED, that the President, Senior Vice President or Vice President and each of them under their respective designations, hereby is authorized to execute powers of attorney, and such authority can be executed by use of facsimile signature, which may be attested or acknowledged by any officer of the Company, qualifying the attorney(s) named in the given power of attorney, to execute on behalf of,and acknowledge as the act and deed of Frankenmuth Insurance Company nn all bonds,contracts and undertakings of suretyship,and to affix the corporate seal the rew." IN WITN.rS'S" 4'HEREOF,the Company has caused these presents to be signed and attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate ' seal wl'ciuttoctf L'ib-cl this 15th day of December,2022. ` ................`'1F �® '• ��+ Frankenmuth Insurance Company ` @ .16 ` - 0� 5: '� c 'r'• y Frederick A.Edmond,Jr., •'•.. '�' �' '��.' President and Chief Executive Officer � N) C01�11I��',01L��NAW ) ss: Sworn to before me,a Notary Public in the State of Michigan,by Frederick A.Edmond,Jr.,to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in,and who executed the preceding instrument,deposed and said(lie Corporate Seat and his signature as Officer were affixed and subscribed to said instrument by the authority of[lie Company. �%>>t't<<, IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have set my hand,and affixed my Official Seal this 15th day of December,2022•` �C, ,3 ' � 'lo �y 7 K-�-6�G.t11 (Seal) Z W 3 Susan L. Fresorger,Notary P blic Saginaw County, State of Michigan My Commission Expires:April 3,2028 I,the undersigned,Executive Vice President of Frankenmuth Insurance Company,do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true,correct and complete copy of the original Power Of Attorney;that said Power of Attorney has not been revoked or rescinded and is in full force and effect as of this date. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the Seal of the Company.this 30th day of May 2024 1' 124- Andrew Andrew H. Knudsen,Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Secretary ALL CORRESPONDENCE RELATED TO BOND VALIDATION AND/OR A CLAIM?SHOULDBE DIRECTED TO VP SURE,TY, 701 U.S.ROUTE ONE,SUITL'I, YARMOUTH,ME 04096 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO ALL TEXAS POLICYHOLDERS IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para someter una queja: You may call Frankenmuth Insurance Usted puede Ilamar al numero de telefono gratis Company toll-free telephone number for de Frankenmuth Insurance Company information or to make a complaint at: para informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-704-421-7002 1-704-421-7002 You may also write to Frankenmuth Insurance Listed tambien puede escribir a Frankenmuth Company at: Insurance Company: Frankenmuth Insurance Company One Mutual Frankenmuth Insurance Company One Avenue Mutual Avenue Frankenmuth, M1 48787 Frankenmuth, MI 48787 Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de You may contact the Texas Department of Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion Insurance to obtain information on companies, acerca de companias, coberturas, derechos o coverages, rights or complaints at: quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de You may write the Texas Department of Texas: Insurance: P.O. Box 149091 P.O. Box 149091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax: (512)490-1007 Web: http://www.tdi.texas.gov Web: http://www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Si PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a Should you have a dispute concerning your un reclamo, debe comunicarse con el premium or about a claim you should contact Frankenmuth Insurance Company the Frankenmuth Insurance Company primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may entonces comunicarse con el departamento contact the Texas Department of Insurance. (TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: UNA ESTE"ISO A SU POLIZA: Este aviso es This notice is for information only and does not solo para proposito de informacion y no se become a part or condition of the attached convierte en parte o condicion del documento document. adjunto. 00 ML0042 44 04 16 Page 1 of 1 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience STATEMENT OF PROPOSERS EXPERIENCE 1. By signing and submitting this proposal, Proposer acknowledges that they have inspected the specifications,are capable and willing to perform and/or provide the required services and/or products,and shall complete this project within the amount of time and dollar amount specified. The undersigned certifies that the prices contained in this Proposal have been carefully checked and submitted as correct and final. All unit prices include the cost of delivery. The undersigned is authorized to bind themselves or the entity they represent to a contract. An individual proprietorship A partnership _1 A corporation chartered under the laws of the State of Texas acting by its officers pu uant to its by-laws or a resolution of its Board of Directors Signature: Printed Name:ML�F' 1o%:-i - 's-1 y2T Title: Y(2Si + C Date: 6/6/2024 2. Years in business under present business name: 23 I I 3. Years of experience in construction work of the type called for in this contract as: A General Contractor 16 yrs. A Subcontractor 23 yrs. � 4. What similar projects has your organization completed? List most recent FIRST. Issued for Bid Page 1 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience PROJECT NO. 1: Name of Project: City of Waco SCADA Upgrade Contract Location: Waco, Texas OWNER'S Name and Address: City of Waco OWNER's Contact Person (Print): Patricia Luther/ IT Services Manager Phone/Fax No.:(254)652-8001/ Initial Contract Price: <$1M Final Contract Price: >$2M Contract Start Date: 2007 (Date of Notice To Proceed) Contract Time: Ongoing ( ) Calendar Days ( ) Working Days Contract Substantial Completion Date: Ongoing Actual Substantial Completion Date: Ongoing If contract time extensions were added to the contract as a result of Bidder's responsibilities, provide a short explanation of each. This is an ongoing project/service agreement. Project Description and why it is comparable to this Contract: Upgraded city wide SCADA to Wonderware, upgraded 63 lift stations, 12 pump stations and 6 elevated storage tanks w/Allen-Bradley PLC's over 900MHz spread spectrum communications, tying them all into the SCADA System. This has been a sizeable ongoing contract for the better part of 16 years. The contract is renewed anually, and has been ever since CP USA began working with the City of Waco. CP USA has designed the entire system making a major overhaul of an old antiquated system. Towers have been installed, repeater sites established, control panels replaced and/or upgraded. CP USA has completed all programmig of the PLC's and SCADA software and performed all testing. This prolect has been included as a reference project as a General Contractor to show comparable scope and complexity to the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Project. Issued for Bid Page 2 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience PROJECT NO. 2: Name of Project: City of Victoria Regional WWTP SCADA Improvements Location: City of Victoria, Texas OWNER's Name and Address: _City of Victoria OWNER's Contact Person (Print): Roland Rodriguez Phone/Fax No.: (361)485-3399/ Initial Contract Price: $494,000.00 Final Contract Price: $507,540.00 Contract Start Date: 6/3/2018 (Date of Notice To Proceed) Contract Time: 360 (4 Calendar Days ( ) Working Days Contract Substantial Completion Date: 5/30/2019 Actual Substantial Completion Date: 5/10/2019 If contract time extensions were added to the contract as a result of Bidder's responsibilities, provide a short explanation of each. N/A Project Description and why it is comparable to this Contract: Plant-wide SCADA System upgrade. Upgrade included renovation of 2 main SCADA/PLC control panels and installation of Ethernet and fiber optic communications network while maintaining continuous access and control of all process equipment, SCADA/PLC control panel upgrades consisted of the demolition of existing panel interior equipment and installation of new Modicon M340 PLC's and wiring. This project was completed on schedule and within the original budget. This project involved a high level of coordination with plant staff, City of Victoria project managers, and engineering companies to ensure the plant stayed running during the various stages of demo, installation, cutover, testing and commissioning. This project has been included as a reference project as a General Contractor to show comparable scope, price and complexity to the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Project. Issued for Bid Page 3 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience PROJECT NO. 3: Name of Project: City of Austin Ullrich WTP SCADA Asset Replacement Location: Austin, Texas OWNER's Name and Address: City of Austin, Texas OWNER's Contact Person (Print): Robyn Smith Phone/Fax No.:(512)974-2624/ Initial Contract Price:aLL6.0000,00 Final Contract Price:$1,524,775.00 Contract Start Date: 7/2/2018 (Date of Notice To Proceed) Contract Time: 730 (>q Calendar Days ( ) Working Days Contract Substantial Completion Date: 7/2/2020 Actual Substantial Completion Date: 7/18/2020 If contract time extensions were added to the contract as a result of Bidder's responsibilities, provide a short explanation of each. 16 days added due to Owner requested change orders. Project Description and why it is comparable to this Contract: Plant-wide SCADA System upgrade. Upgrade included renovation of approximately 22 various SCADA/PLC control panels and installation of Ethernet and fiber optic cohimunications network while maintaining continuous access and control of all process equipment. SCADA/PLC Panel upgrades consisted of the demolition of existing panel interior equipment and installation of new Modicon M580 PLC's and wiring. This project involved a high level of coordination with plant staff, City of Austin project managers, and engineering companies to ensure the plant staved running during the various stages of demo, installation, cutover, testing and commissioning. This project has been included as a reference project as a General Contractor to show comparable scope and complexity to the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Project. Issued for Bid Page 4 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience 5. What current projects does your organization have under way as of this date? Contract Amount Name of Project & Date to be Owner's Name & Architect/Engineer's Type of Work Completed & Phone Number Name & Phone Number Percentage Complete North Austin Reservoh Summer 2024 Austin Water-James King Harutunian Engineering $678,500.00 & Pump Station Imp. ~75% complete (512)657-4053 Randy Preslar Project (512)454-2788 Davis & Handcox WTF Summer 2024 Austin Water Harutunian Engineering $434,900.00 Polymer Feed System —85% complete (512) 972-0101 Anne Harutunian (512)454-2788 Ullrich TP Low erv. Fall 2024 Austin Water Harutunian Engineering $448,600.00 Pump Station Elect. —65% complete Robyn Haasch Randy Preslar Feed Renewal (512) 974-2624 (512)454-2788 Waterstone Sewer March 2024 Lennar-Ally Benoit Bowman Consulting Group $175,000.00 Pump Station nearing 100% (512)506-4010 (757)229-1776 Lawhon Tract Lift July 2024 Emma Lawhon Family BGE, Inc. $137,000.00 Station —75% Land Partners (512) 879-0400 (512) 357-8514 6. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? _Yes X No. If"Yes", state where and why. I I i I i Issued for Bid Page 5 of 9 I BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience 7. Are you at present in litigation or lawsuits involving construction work of any type? —Yes X No. If"Yes", explain: 8. Explain in detail the manner in which you have inspected the work proposed in this contract: Thoroughly reviewed the plans, specifications and addendums. Consulted with CP USA Project Manager Devon O'Hara and CP USA Programmer Christian Mohr who have both been working on Phase 1 of this same project for further insight into existing conditions and lessons learned towards improving Phase 2 moving forward if CP USA is awarded the project. 9. Explain in detail your plan or layout for performing the work proposed in this contract: If awarded the project CP USA will assign a prosect manager to begin development of a schedule I of values, preliminary project plan/schedule and begin development of control panel/instrumentation submittals. Required subcontractors will be onboarded. Martin Salyer, P.E., President& CEO of CP USA, will oversee the entire project alongside CP USA's protect manager for the duration of the proje( 10. If this contract is awarded to you,your company's administrative manager for the work will be Nelda Tallman and your resident construction superintendent will be Kelly Price Issued for Bid Page 6 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience 11. What experience in this type of work does the individual designated as superintendent above possess? Please list 5 similar projects completed in the last 2 years. Kelly Price has over 40 years of instrumentation and control experience working in various industries including water, wastewater and heavy industrial across the U.S. and world. Kelly holds a State of Texas TDLR Journeyman license#295287, and CP USA holds an Electrical Contractor license TDLR#33486. Similar projects that Kelly has worked on include: 1) City of Bryan, TX- PLC Replacement; 2) City of Waco, TX- Mt. Carmel Filter Panels; 3) City of Austin, ,TX- Ullrich WTP RIO Panel Upgrades 4) City of Georgetown TX-Berry Creek Highlands Ph. 1 Lift Station; 5) Samsung, Taylor, TX-Samsung Panel Installation. 12. What portions of the work do you intend to sublet,and what percentage of the entire PROPOSAL amount will be performed by subcontractors? Electrical scope of work including any conduit and wire, estimated 25% or less of proposal. Revegetation and silt fence erosion control of disturbed areas, estimated 1% or proposal. 13. What equipment do you own that is available for the proposed work? Quantity Description,Size, Condition Yealrs in Service Present Location Capacity, Etc. 1 40' Boom Lift Used Good 1+ Austin, TX Confined Space Used Good 1+ 1 Entry Equipment Austin, TX Issued for Bid Page 7 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience 14. Have you received firm offers for all major items of material and/or equipment within the price used in preparing your proposal? X Yes _No If not,state what items/materials do not have firm costs. The signatory of this questionnaire guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements herein made and all answers herein expressed. �/ Dated this 1—day of ��/t 4 By: Title: si' d CE() STATE OF %�C A S COUNTY OF T<A VI S Subscribed and sworn to before me thislvTµday of n►6 Notary Public e /._ � 11�w.1✓ My commission expires: ✓`/7120,Z� NELDATALLMAN My Notary ID#2702622 Expires May 7,2028 Issued for Bid Page 8 of 9 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00400—Statement of Proposers Experience SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT Listed below are the names of the subcontractors,and to what extent they will be used, if awarded this contract. I am fully aware that before this PROPOSAL will be taken under consideration of possible contract awarding or before any contract will be prepared,the subcontractor(s) listed below must be approved in writing by the owner. No other subcontractor(s) may be substituted after approval of this list, without obtaining prior written consent by the OWNER before they can be used on this project. Should the OWNER find any of the proposed subcontractors to be objectionable,the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER shall arrive at a mutually agreeable substitute prior to commencing work. The subletting of any portion of the work shall not release the CONTRACTOR(S)from his obligations regarding that portion of the work and shall be considered their total responsibility. Name of Subcontractor What Extent Used/Percentage of Entire Project Sun Tech Electric —15% BMP Specialist 1% I Issued for Bid Page 9 of 9 Cvn2irn�IPiinNs UIS/A ince (4 ��$� 16318 Bf lana Building 1,Ste 160 JOnustln.T_7BM Phone 512463_=2 www.convoioeneisusa.nel Custom Control Panel Design&Fabrication Services Martin Salyer President Design ServicesrProject Management/Ofiice Brian Wetherholt Brian Iguchi William Burdick Jennifer Mireles David Morgan Robert GalindoHannah Donahue Vice President vice President Seagan Yi-O'Kelly Nelda Tallman Director ofProject Dallas Branch CAD Manager Production 0 erationsAdministrative Business Development Management Manager/Project Manager Integration Manager Director Field Services Supervisor Operations Manager Financial Controller Brad Sawyer Isaac Bondoc Nick Kincheloe Kira Francis Tony Aguilar Jason Bearden Birmingham,AL Mike Hamlin 1 Future Richard O'Brien Reidel Alonso Nestor Benitez Taylor Bibles-Simon Regional Manager William Hammel Project Manager Talha Shazad Patrick Callaghan,Jr. Zied Ghozzia Thomas Currer Steve Haney Gage Slater Christian Mohr Carlos Gutierrez Vanessa Martell Brian Havran Drafting and Design Monica Mattei Thomas Lerma Weldon Hosch John McKenzie Chris Morris Jose Peralta Tany Rivera Programmer Russell Reed Kelly Price Anna Taylor Mmatin aMana r Colin O'HaraIguchiAndrew Sorensen Radek Vrana Andrew Torres Estimating Manager Devon O'Har Sofia Rodriguez 1 Future Sawyer Veretto Field Services Administrative Brandon Friemel Roberto Salinas Fiber Optics Programmers Operations John McClanahan Brandon VanLoozen Tay Beasley Glen Vaughn Keith Cunningham Kevin Skrhak Cliff Komele Stephen Howell Project Managers Eddie Fendt Jack Hobbs Jonathan Vasquez Field Services 1T Fiber Optics Safety&Training Coordinator Estimating Future Sales/Marketing Dandy Sayapheth Mayra Lopez Isaac Hernandez Kevin Chartier Josh Martin Shilo James Jeff Johnson Gabriel Chavez San Antonio Office Shop Manager Shop Manager Shop Manager Shop Manager Shop Manager Shop Manager Team One Team Two Team Four Team Five Team Six 2nd Shift Quality Custodian Jason Triggs Sales/Marketing Milton Bustos Michael Arce Karla Avila Marcus Carillo Terry Case Diego Barrios Michelle Chapa Roy Carillo Ethen Allen Kieth Daugherty Wyatt Engberg Cruz Diaz de Leon Amirsy Herrera Enid Becirovic Samuel Eckert Sekone Timoteo Jacob Harvey Erika Jacinto Luis Jaimes Rachel Butler Jason Harvey Steve Haba Testis Arely Mendoza Yami Martell Lucinda Martinez Josphe Charter Derrick Kinder Ghaleb Khafaji g Jason Moerbe Teresa Nava Isaiah Mireles Rob Cunningham Dyanara Martell Sharon Mburu Ross Salyer Rosa Perla Jonathan Moerbe Omar Duran Michael Ohlinger Bradley Pontow Benny Thomas Patricia Pineda Angela Rivera Damon Maxwell Don Raby Iman Sabood 1 Future Roxana Pineda Lan Vinh Troy Polinsky 2 Future 3-5 Future Maria Vences Binxia Wang 1 Future Shop Team Six 2nd Shift Shop Team One 2 Future Barry Worley Shop Team Five Shop Team Two 1 Future Shop Team Four MARTIN W. SALYER, P.F PRESIDENT WORK SUMMAR`:: As President and CEO, Martin leads a team of approximately 90+employees that build over 2,000 panels a year with installations around the world. go Ilk Martin has 30+ years of experience in engineering, design, construction { management, and project management in the petrochemical, semiconductor, food & beverage, water/wastewater, electric utility, as well as other industries. Martin has unique experience and capabilities in process controls, instrumentation,industrial motor controls,and panel design/fabrication. t SAMPLE OF PROJECT EXPERIENCE: • Custom Designs of hundreds of panels per year. • Provides Custom Design and Development of Control Systems for OEM applications. 419 % Industry Expert for Blower Controls. Designed, programmed, and implemented state of the art OEM solutions for Blower Controls that I XI i:Iill r'N : 30+years provide a high level of protection,simplicity and efficiency on a plant wide level with 1000+of installations across the country and world. '> 1( A I1()i!: Bachelor of Science in Numerous Design Build Control System Projects for Food & Beverage Electrical Engineering,Texas Tech Industries, serving clients such as Coca Cola Enterprise, Nestle Bottled University Water,Frito Lay,Medallion Foods,etc. Dollar value of projects ranging from$20K to$500K for the controls only portion. PROFESSIONAL REGISTRATION: As head controls engineer, he has provided controls and • Engineering License in the Instrumentation on numerous new fresh water and waste water State of Texas. treatment plants. Projects include providing PLC systems, fiber License#86371 networks, redundant systems, motor controls, entire SCADA systems Engineering License in the including all programming and screen development with a wide range State of Michigan. of PLC hardware and SCADA software. Projects ranging from$500K to License#50297 $3M for instrumentation and controls portion. Engineering License in the Design of entire electrical and control system for 4.3 million gallon per State of Ohio. day industrial waste treatment facility. Drawings created included License#68448 P&ID's, electrical single lines, 480VAC motor control center layouts, wiring schematics,plan views,instrument loop diagrams,control panel layouts, riser diagrams, conduit & wire schedules, and instrument detail drawings. Martin put together a complete bid package along with specifications. Martin was also part of the Engineering management team that was used during construction. Design of Fisher Provox DCS system to control Air Handling Units for clean rooms in semiconductor facility. • Revamped control wiring on 50,000 HP ethylene compressors UNIQUE CAPABILITIES: A Leading Large Teams to successfully complete Installation of Controls projects Development of Riser Diagrams,Control Panel Layout Drawings,Wiring Schematics, Conduit & Wire Schedules, Instrument Loop Diagrams, �� Motor Schematics, Plan View Drawings, P&ID's,etc. • Development of Bill of Materials and Equipment Specifications y gip' • Provide 480 VAC Power Distribution Design �. ,•,P • Write Detailed Project Specification,Control Narratives,etc. • Create Operation&Maintenance Manuals • Provide PLC 1/0 Layouts and Specifications • PLC Programming—Allen Bradley,Siemens,PLC Direct, Mdicon • HMI Programming (Wonderware, RSView, Lookout, Panelview, AVG, etc. CHRISTIAN MOHR PROGRAMMER Christian works with the design team, the customer, and the end user to create a a controls scenario for each application. This may include any or all of the following: hardware selection, PLC programming, HMI programming, and SCADA programming. As a programmer, Christian will also work with the Field Installers " during the startup phase to check out the field wiring and devices before commissioning and to startup and debug the installed controls system. Christian has 20+years of experience in PLC and HMI programming in both factory automation and process automation. He has experience with many different types of PLC and Operator Interface manufacturers, and SCADA systems. His experience .. with PLC and HMI programming covers many different industries such as Product Manufacturing, Product Distribution, Material Handling, Equipment Test Systems,Water/Waste Water Treatment,and Food&Beverage. EXPERIENCE:20+years SAMPLE OF PROJECT EXPERIENCE: • OEM panel design, programming, startup, and support for high speed EDUCATION:Associate of Applied commercial printing machinery manufacturer. Science in Automation Engineering ® Hardware design, installation, and startup of semiconductor Technology and Associate of Applied manufacturing test equipment with 1/0 counts exceeding 5,000 digital Science in Computer Science. and analog points. Installation, startup, and support of 360 degree high speed scanning IJNIQUF CAPABIL.ITIFc,:Experienced with Factory equipment for Fed Ex, UPS,and the US Postal service. Automation,Process Automation, Installation, startup, and support of industrial scanning equipment for Control System design,Control manufacturing,material handling,and distribution. Panel design, Radio Systems, • Design, programming, installation, startup, and support of conveyor Distributed I/O Networks control systems for manufacturing,material handling,and distribution. Experienced with hardware and Process control programming, startup, and support of blower controls programming software for many and aeration systems for Waste Water Treatment facilities. different manufacturers PLC and SCADA programming for Water/Waste Water Treatment o Allen-Bradley facilities, including; Lift Stations, Pump Stations, Well Pumps, Booster 00 Pumps, ESTs&GSTs, Flow Pacing for Chemical Feed systems,Chemical ■ Studio Studio55RSLogix000 Leak Monitoring,Filtration,Valve Control. ■ RSLogix 500 Programming, startup, and support of systems utilizing Allen Bradley's ■ PlantPAx PlantPAx Distributed Control System,Logix Batch&Sequence Manager, ■ FactoryTalk View PlantPAx Graphical Objects and Global Objects for FactoryTalk SE and Machine Edition and ME,and PlantPAx Add-On Instructions for Logix PLCs. Site Edition o Modicon ■ Unity XL ■ Vijeo Designer ■ EcoStruxure Control Expert o GE/Square D o Omron o Ti/Automation Direct o Red Lion o EZ Automation o Maple Systems o Sick o National Instruments o Wonderware o Inductive Automation ■ Ignition SCADA KELLY PRICE FIELD TECHNICIAN/FOREMAN WORK SUMMARY: Kelly holds State of Texas TDLR Journeyman license #295287 and has over 30 years of experience in the Electrical,Instrumentation&Controls field.He has in-depth knowledge of Process Controls & Instrumentation, as well as, calibration, installation, repair, and retrofitting of Pneumatic and Electronic Instrumentation equipment.Kelly is familiar with a variety of Programmable controllers,Pump Control systems,and RTU's.Kelly has a vast knowledge of various electrical controls and can read, understand, and troubleshoot complicated electrical diagrams. He is also able to quickly troubleshoot inoperative process control systems as well as instrumentation, with repairs made with minimum downtime. Kelly has an excellent work ethic and can get on and off jobs in a timely Y manner while ensuring all client expectations are exceeded. SAMPLE OF PROJECT EXPERIENCE: • Built as well as installed panels and instrumentation in a variety of different controls systems including Oil and Gas, Waste Water Treatment Plants, Water Treatment Plants, Well pump stations, Lift stations, Distribution Facilities, Bottling Factories, Lift Stations, High Service Pump Station, Irrigation Systems, Food Processing Systems, Aeration Blowers including Multistage and Turbo's, Chemical Feed Control Systems, and various custom control processes. EXPERIENCE: 30+years Experience in the calibration and installation of both pneumatic and electronic PID controls, transducers, transmitters, pH controls, gas UNIQUE CAPABILITES: analyzers,as well as flow, level,and pressure transmitters. . Ability to troubleshoot situations Experience with Endress+Hauser, Siemens, Flowmatics, Foxboro, and provide a solution in a timely, Rosemont, Hach,Rotork,Auma, Hydrorangers,multiple Generators,Blue& White chemical pumps, Precision Digital,Strap-on flow systems, Ultra Sonic precise manner. level,and flow systems,as well as many others. a Knowledge in reading and Experience with a variety of motor controllers, starters, VFD's, DC motor understanding control logic,as controllers,etc. well as the ability to redesign • Panel Fabrication complex systems on the fly. Extensive experience with Startup and Commissioning,taking the lead role Experienced in all types ofinstallations of panels, instrument in Functional Demonstration Testing, providing all required startup and tubing,structural such as documentation such as Parameter Lists, Calibration Reports, 1/0 Checkout stilling wells,sun shields and Sheets, Functional Testing checklists,etc. many custom installs. Performs calibrations on a wide variety of instrumentation and familiar with multiple calibration devices and software. Ability to represent the company as an on-site project manager witl the confidence, knowledge, expertise needed to ensure a successful project. ©®USA Control Panels USA Inc. July 13,2023 Kenley Crowder Public Works Assistant Director Utilities 607 Municipal Drive Leander TX,78641 Phone:512-259-2640 Ext.2773 Email: kerowder@leandertx.gov Subject: City of Leander Water and Wastewater Utilities SCADA Sole Source Statement Mr.Crowder, Control Panels USA is currently supporting and maintaining the city-wide Water and Wastewater Distribution SCADA System for the City of Leander,Texas and has done so for the past 10 years. During this time period, Control Panels USA has worked closely with the City of Leander to upgrade this system. Improvements have included upgrading Programmable Logic Control Units,Remote Telemetry Units,Top End SCADA software and standards and functionality,and also the communications architecture of the entire system. Additionally,CP USA has been responsible for selecting key components to ensure operation,including PLC equipment,radio components and antenna selection/installation. The City of Leander SCADA system is a complex and reliable conglomeration of GE MDS unlicensed spread spectrum radios and multiple PLC communication protocols. Historically,the City has opened the SCADA and automation controls opportunity to other integrators but in most instances the City has required Control Panels USA to come back under an additional Contract/Project to correct the previous improvements or upgrades.All these factors necessitate that special consideration be given prior to allowing another contractor to work on or modify the existing system. Since 2012,CP USA has been a provider on maintaining and implementing the City's Master Pian. Our firm has been the administrator of both the SCADA hardware and software that has been customized to suit the vision of the City's future growth of the next 5 to 10 years minimum. During this time CP USA has developed best practices and standards for the City of Leander for design, implementation,and programming for each RTU site. 'Phis intimate knowledge is required for successful maintenance and expansion of the SCADA system. Over the years,Control Panels USA and the City have continuously improved select hardware and software programming standards that optimize the current radio and ethernet infrastructure. Some of these improvement methods have derived after periodic site inspections,and subsequent site report analysis documentation and reviews with City personnel.These ongoing improvements and process understanding allows Control Panels USA to provide the required annunciation and control of the City-wide water and wastewater utilities.Additionally,Control Panels USA takes pride in providing SCADA and automation services with the City of Leander's financial interests at heart. 16310 Bratton Lane Suite 1001 Austin,Texas 78728 'Phone, (512)863-3224 ' Fax (512)868.5446 ' www.controlpanelsusanet Please feel free to contact me ifyou have any further questions or concerns. Kind R� ..rds, David W. Morgary Vice President dmoragn(a controlranelsusa.net 16310 Bratton Lane Suite 100'Austin,Texas 78728 'Phone: (512)863.3224 ' Fax: (512)868.5446 ' www.conttolpanalsusa net THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 60500—Agreement AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR This Agreement Between Owner and Contractor("Agreement") is made and entered into as of the_2 day of SL& Z by and between Owner(hereinafter defined) and Contractor (hereinafter defined)for the construction of the Project(hereinafter defined): "OWNER": Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority 221 E. Main Street Round Rock, Texas 78664 "CONTRACTOR": Control Panels USA, Inc. 16310 Bratton Lane Building 1 Suite 100 Austin,Texas 78728 (512) 863-3224 "PROJECT": BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 The "ARCHITECT/ENGINEER"for the Project is Walker Partners, LLC 6504 Bridge Point Parkway, Suite 200 Austin,Texas 78730 512-382-0021 Page 1 of 7 Issued for Bid BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00500—Agreement 1.0 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing or causing to be performed all Work including labor and materials, necessary to build, construct, erect and equip the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents and, at its own cost and expense, to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the Contract Documents and for the Contract Price defined in Section 3.0 of this Agreement . The Contract Documents for this Project include this Agreement and the following documents: • Modifications • General Conditions (Section 00700) • Specifications bearing the title BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 dated 4/19/2024 • Drawings bearing the title BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 dated 4/19/2024 • Addenda (Section 00900) • Performance Bond (Section 00610) • Payment Bond (Section 00620) • Maintenance Bond (Section 00630) • Proposal Form (Section 00300) • Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (Section 00300-A) • Statement of Proposers Experience (Section 00400) • Notice of Award (Section 00510) • Notice to Proceed (Section 00520) • Contractor's Certificate of Insurance • All other documents referenced in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for the Project In addition to the provisions set forth in other Contract Documents, including but not limited to Section 3.03 of the General Conditions, in the event that a conflict between any of the provisions within the Contract Documents exist, OWNER shall determine which provision controls. If CONTRACTOR identifies the conflict, CONTRACTOR shall notify Owner's representative of the conflict, in writing. The Contract Documents are forms adopted by Owner and are not subject to negotiation, modification or change unless Owner, in its sole discretion, agrees to do so. Page 2 of 7 Issued for Bid BCRUA Delivery Paints Improvements Phase 2 Section 00500—Agreement 2.0 CONTRACT TIME AND COMPLETION § 2.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be stated in a Notice to Proceed issued by the OWNER. § 2.2 Contract Time §2.2.1 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. §2.2.2 Time is of the essence in all phases of the Work. Additionally, time limits and periods of time stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. It is specifically understood and agreed to by and between OWNER and CONTRACTOR that time is of the essence in the substantial and final completion of the Work, and that failure to substantially complete or finally complete the Work within the designated period, or as it may be extended, shall be construed as a breach of this Agreement. § 2.3 Substantial Completion The CONTRACTOR shall achieve Substantial Completion, as that term is defined in the Contract Documents,of the entire Work not later than 270 calendar days from the date of commencement, subject to any adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. § 2.4 Liquidated Damages The CONTRACTOR acknowledges and recognizes that the OWNER is entitled to full and beneficial occupancy and use of the completed Work following expiration of the Contract Time. The CONTRACTOR further acknowledges and agrees that, if the CONTRACTOR fails to achieve Substantial Completion of any portion of the Work within the Contract time,the OWNER will sustain actual damages as a result of such failure. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the exact amount of such damages will be difficult, if not impossible, to ascertain. Therefore, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that, if the CONTRACTOR should fail, or refuse to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work by the date of Substantial Completion,subject to extensions of the Contract Time granted by the OWNER,then the CONTRACTOR agrees to pay the OWNER the sum of Seven Hundred and fifty Dollars ($750) for each day in which such Work is not Substantially Complete,not as penalty, but as a reasonable estimation of the damages ("Liquidated Damages")that would be suffered by OWNER as a result of delay for each and every calendar day that the CONTRACTOR shall have failed to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work as Page 3 of 7 Issued for Bid BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 40500—Agreement required herein, The Liquidated Damages shall be in lieu of any and all other damages which may be incurred by OWNER as a result of the failure of CONTRACTOR to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time. § 2.5 Final Completion § 2.5.1 Timely Final Completion is an essential condition of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR agrees to achieve Final Completion of the Work within 30 days of the designated or extended date of Substantial Completion. §2.5.2 Final Completion means actual completion of the Work, including any extras or Change Orders reasonably required or contemplated under the Contract Documents other than warranty work that may be required pursuant to the Contract Documents. 3.0 CONTRACT PRICE § 3.1 The OWNER shall pay the CONTRACTOR the Contract Price in current funds for the CONTRACTOR's proper and complete performance of the Work and all of CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contract Price shall be Six Hundred Twelve Thousand Dollars and Twenty-Eight Cents ($612,000.28), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2 The Contract Price is based upon the following alternates,if any,which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the OWNER: No Alternates. § 3.3 Unit prices, if any: Refer to 00300 Proposal Form for Unit Prices. Page A of 7 Issued for Bid BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00500—Agreement 4.0 PAYMENT § 4.1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Subject to any applicable provisions set forth in other Contract Documents, each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values ("Schedule Of Values") submitted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Contract Documents, The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work. The Schedule of Values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER and OWNER may require. The Schedule of Values, as approved by the ENGINEER or OWNER, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment. As the Work progresses the Schedule of Values may be revised as the OWNER and ENGINEER, in their sole discretion, may deem appropriate to reflect the sequencing of the Work and the values to be assigned to each portion of the Work included in the Schedule of Values. § 4.1.1 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. Subject to the provisions of the General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare its Application for Payment for a progress payment as of the last day of each calendar month and submit it, with the required number of copies, to the Engineer for review. The total value of work completed to date shall be based on the actual or estimated quantities of Work completed and, if applicable, on the unit prices contained in the Agreement (or approved schedule of values relating to lump sum bids)and adjusted by approved Change Orders. The value of materials properly stored on the site shall be based upon the estimated quantities of such materials and the invoice prices. Copies of all invoices shall be available for inspection by the ENGINEER. § 4.1.2 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Contract Price properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of Five percent (5.00%). Pending final determination of cost to the OWNER of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included; .2 Add that portion of the Contract Price properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the OWNER, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of Five percent (5.00%); .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the OWNER; and Page 5 of 7 Issued for Bid BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00500—Agreement .4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the ENGINEER has withheld or nullified an Application for Payment. § 4.1.3 If the total Contract Price at the time of execution of this Agreement is less than $400,000.00,the OWNER may elect to withhold retainage of ten percent(10%)from each progress payment in lieu of the retainage amounts set forth in Section 4.1.2. § 4.1.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all materials and Work upon which payments have been made until final acceptance of such Work and materials by the Owner. Such payments shall not constitute a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all terms of the Contract Documents and the delivery of all improvements embraced in Contract Documents complete and satisfactory to the Owner in all respects. §4.1.5 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: Reduction or limitation of retainage shall be at the OWNER's sole discretion. §4.1.6 Except with the OWNER's prior approval, the CONTRACTOR shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 4.2 FINAL PAYMENT §4.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Price, shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR when: .1 the CONTRACTOR has fully performed its obligations under the Contract Documents, except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct Work as provided in the General Conditions, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond Final Payment; and .2 a letter of Final Acceptance has been issued by the ENGINEER and accepted by the OWNER. .3 CONTRACTOR has satisfied all of the conditions to receipt of Final Payment as set forth in the General Conditions. §4.2.2 The OWNER's final payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be made no later than 30 days after the Work has been completed and accepted by the OWNER, in writing, following the issuance of the ENGINEER's final Certificate for Payment: Page 6 of 7 Issued for B d 07/22/2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00510—Notice of Award NOTICE OF AWARD Dated- June 28, 2024 TO: Control Panels USA, Inc. ADDRESS: 16310 Bratton Lane Building 1 Suite 100 Austin, Texas 78728 PROJECT: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 OWNER'S CONTRACT NO: N/A CONTRACT FOR: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 You are notified that your Proposal dated June 6, 2024 for the above contract has been considered. You are apparent Successful Bidder and have been awarded a contract for building and site improvements including the following: See attached Proposal. The Contract Price of your contract is: $ 612,000.28. 1 original of the proposed Contract Documents (except drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. 1 electronic file (pdf) of the conformed construction drawings will be delivered or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 10 calendar days of the date of this Notice of Award. 1. You must deliver to the Owner a fully executed version of the Agreement including all Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your original signature. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the RFP, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions. 3. You must deliver to the Owner Certificates of Insurance with the executed Contract. Within Five days of the Contract executionyou must deliver a Issued for Bid Page 1 of 2 General Manager 07/22/2024 General Manager 07/22/2024 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00520—Notice to Proceed CONCURRENCE OF NOTICE TO PROCEED (CONTRACTOR) By: (AUTHOI1 NATURE) (DATE) Issued For Bid Page 2 of 2 -- Document A312 TM - 2010 Performance Bond Bond No.SUR2006324 CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name,legal status and address) (Nance, legal status and principal place Control Panels USA Inc. of business) 16310 Bratton Lane,Bldg. 1,#100 Frankenmuth Insurance Company This document has important legal Austin,TX 78728 I Mutual Avenue consequences.Consultation with OWNER: Frankenmuth, MI 48787 an attorney is encouraged with respect to Its completion or (Name: Iega!status and address) modification. Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority Any singular reference to 221 East Main Street Contractor,Surety,Owner or Round Rock,TX 78664 other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: July 8th, 2024 AIA Document A312-2010 combines two separate bonds,a Amount: Six Hundred Twelve Thousand&28/100***(5612,000.28)Dollars Performance Bond and a Payment Bond,Into one form. This is not a single combined Description: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Performance and Payment Bond. (Name and location) BOND Date: July 15th,2024 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: Six Hundred Twelve Thousand&28..'100*** ($612,000,28)Dollars Modifications to this Bond: IN None O See Section 16 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Co ate eal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Control Panels USA Inc. Frankenmuth Insurance Company Signature: " Signature Name '&t s Aj (e�e"r l�y}a�T Name Courtney J.Gou '1g and Title, V ieilz -'CFTrp"r- and Title: Attorney-in-Fact (Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond.) (FOR INFOR11ATION ONLY e Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: (Architect, Engineer or other party.) USI Insurance Services 7600-C N, Capital of Texas Hwy#200 Walker Partners,LLC Austin,TX 78731 6504 Bridge Point Parkway,Suite 200 (512)451-7555 Austin,TX 78730 (512)382-0021 Inst. AIA Document A312--2010.The American Institute of Architects, 0e11so 1 1 S 1 The Contractor and Surety,jointly and severally,bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference. §2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract,the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond,except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3. §3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after .1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner,Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance.If the Owner does not request a conference,the Surety may,within five(5)business days after receipt of the Owner's notice, request such a conference.If the Surety timely requests a conference,the Owner shall attend.Unless the Owner agrees otherwise,any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten (10)business days of the Surety's receipt of the Owner's notice.If the Owner,the Contractor and the Surety agree,the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right,if any,subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; .2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default,terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and .3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. §4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations,or release the Surety from its obligations,except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. §5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: §5.1 Arrange for the Contractor,with the consent of the Owner,to perform and complete the Construction Contract; §5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself,through its agents or independent contractors; §5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract,arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence,to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract,and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default;or §5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete,arrange for completion,or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation,determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and,as soon as practicable after the amount is determined,make payment to the Owner;or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner,citing the reasons for denial. §6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness,the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond,and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.if the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4,and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability,in whole or in part,without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. Init. AIA Document A312" —2010.The American Institute o1 Architects. 2 §7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1,5.2 or 5.3,then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract,and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract.Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price,the Surety is obligated,without duplication,for .1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract, .2 additional legal,design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default,and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5;and .3 liquidated damages,or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract,actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 18 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1,5.3 or 5.4,the Surety's liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. §9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract,and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations.No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns. §10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,purchase orders and other obligations. ' §11 Any proceeding,legal or equitable,under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond,whichever occurs first.If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law,the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. §12 Notice to the Surety,the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. §13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted hercfrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein.When so furnished,the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. §14 Definitions §14.1 Balance of the Contract Price.The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made,including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled,reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. §14.2 Construction Contract.The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. §14.3 Contractor Default.Failure of the Contractor,which has not been remedied or waived,to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. §14.4 Owner Default.Failure of the Owner,which has not been remedied or waived,to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. §14.5 Contract Documents.All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. §15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor,the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. Init. AIA Document A312^ —2010.The Amerkan Institute of Architects. 3 1 §16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address Address CAUTION:You should sign an original AIA Contract Document,on which this text appears in RED,An original assures that changes will not be obscured. Init. AIA Document A31211—2010.The American Institute of Architects. 4 t V-AIA Document A312 TM - 2010 Bond No 51_�R2006324 Payment Bond CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place Control Panels USA Inc. of business) 16310 Bratton Lane,Bldg. 1,#100 Frankenmuth Insurance Company This document has important legal Austin,TX 78728 1 Mutual Avenue consequences.Consultation with OWNER: Frankenmuth,MI 48787 an attorney is encouraged with (Name, legal status and address) respect to Its completion ormodification. Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority Any singular reference to 221 East Main Street Contractor,Surety,Owner or Round Rock,TX 78664 other party shall be considered CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT plural where applicable. Date: July 8th,2024 AIA Document A312-2010 combines two separate bonds,a Amount: Six Hundred Twelve Thousand&28(100*** ($612,000.28)Dollars Performance Bond and a Payment Bond,into one form. Description: This Is not a single combined (Name and location) BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Performance and Payment Bond. BOND Date: July I Sth,2024 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: Six Hundred Twelve Thousand&28/100***($612,00028)Dollars Modifications to this Bond. 99 None ❑ See Section 18 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Cor Seal) Company_ (Corporate Seal) Control Panels USA Inc. Frankenmuth Insurance Company Signature: Signature: Name 69LA&y Name Courtney J.Gou;gnv and Title: vie a ?�Cex�Og cru r- and Title: Attorney-in-Fact (A,w additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond.) (FOR XFORAIA TION ONLY--Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: USi Insurance Services (Architect, Engineer or other party.) 7600-C N. Capital of Texas Hwy 9200 Walker Partners, LLC Austin,TX 78731 6504 Bridge Point Parkway, Suite 200 (5 12)451-7555 Austin,TX 78730 (512)382-0021 Inst. AIA Document A3121"—2010.The American Institute of Architects, Ocilla S 1 §1 The Contractor and Surety,jointly and severally,bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor,materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference,subject to the following terms. §2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants,and defends,indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims,demands,liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. §3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety(at the address described in Section 13) of claims,demands,liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner's property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims,demands,liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. §4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense defend,indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim,demand,lien or suit. §5 The Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following: §5.1 Claimants,who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor,stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were,or equipment was,furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed,within ninety(90)days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim;and .2 have sent a Claim to the Surety(at the address described in Section 13). §5.2 Claimants,who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor,have sent a Claim to the Surety(at the address described in Section 13). §6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor,that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1. §7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2,whichever is applicable,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: §7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant,with a copy to the Owner,within sixty(60)days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that arc undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed;and §7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. §7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim,except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If,however,the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2,the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. §8 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond,plus the amount of reasonable attorney's fees provided under Section 7.3,and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. §9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims,if any,under any construction performance bond.By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond,subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. Init. AIA Document A312^ —2010,The American lnsbtute of Archilecta. 6 i §10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner,Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract.The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond,and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to,or give notice on behalf of,Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. §11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,purchase orders and other obligations. §12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date(1)on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2,or(2)an which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract,whichever of(1)or(2)first occurs.If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law,the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. §13 Notice and Claims to the Surety,the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.Actual receipt of notice or Claims,however accomplished,shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. 114 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein.When so furnished,the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. §15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. §16 Definitions §16.1 Claim.A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: .1 the name of the Claimant; .2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done,or materials or equipment furnished; .3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor,materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .4 a brief description of the labor,materials or equipment furnished; .5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor,materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; .7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant;and .8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor,materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. §16.2 Claimant.An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor,materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract.The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic's lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located.The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms"labor,materials or equipment"that part of water,gas,power,light,heat,oil, gasoline,telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract,architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors,and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,materials or equipment were furnished. §16.3 Construction Contract.The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. Intt. AIA Document A31210—2010.The American Institute of Archltects. 7 §16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner,which has not been remedied or waived,to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. §16.5 Contract Documents.All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. §17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor,the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. §18 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of addedparties, other than those appearing on the coverpage.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company. (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address Address CAUTION:You should sign an original AIA Contract Document,on which this text appears in RED.An original assures that changes will not be obscured. Init. AIA Document A31211—2010.The American Institute of Architects. 8 t FRANKENMUTH INSURANCE COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Frankenmuth Insurance Company(the"Company"), a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Michigan, having its principal office at I Mutual Avenue, Frankenmuth, Michigan 48787, does hereby nominate,constitute and appoint Courtney J. Goulding, Cynthia Giesen, Keenan Lehmann, Bryant Ahmed, Scott D. Chapman Their true and lawful attomey(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, contracts and undertakings of suretyship, with the exception of Financial Guaranty Insurance,provided,however,that the penal sum of any one such instrument shall not exceed the sum of: Eighty Million and 00/100 Dollars(580,000,000) This Power of Attorney is granted pursuant to the following Resolution duly adopted at a meeting of the Board of Directors of Frankenmuth Insurance Company: "RESOLVED, that the President, Senior Vice President or Vice President and each of them under their respective designations, hereby is authorized to execute powers of attorney,and such authority can be executed by use of facsimile signature, which may be attested or acknowledged by any officer of the Company, qualifying the atiorney(s)named in the given power of attorney,to execute on behalf of,and acknowledge as the act and deed of Frankenmuth Insurance Company on all bonds,contracts and undertakings of suretyship, and to affix the corporate seal thereto." IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Company has caused these presents to be signed and attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hcre.4xtd'9Vt?4is—1 -7 day of fV p V e e^—V o r,aP 23. v Frankenmuth I urance Company Andrew H.Knudsen President,Chief Operating Officer and Secretary STAT&QF MR!" ) COUNTVbi; INAW ) ss: Sworn to before me,a NotaryPublic in the State of Michigan,by Andrew H.Knudsen,to me personally known to be the individual and off iccrdescribed in, and who executed the preceding instrument,deposed and said the Corporate Seal and his signature as Officer were affixed and subscribe}to said instrument by the authority of the Company. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,1 have set my hand,and affixed my Official Seal this day of ^ ��// • . ai (Seal) / f tie` Susan L.Fresorger,Notary PuWc Saginaw County,State of Michigan My Commission Expires: April 3,202$ � FSO 1, the undersigned,Chief Executive Officer of Frankenmuth Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the fi}rc'fgping is a trtf reect and complete copy of the original Power of Attorney;that said Power of Attorney has not been revoked or rescinded and is itl� li force and effect as of this date. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the Seal of the Com any,this�ay of—U. Frederick A. Edmond,Jr, Chief Executive Officer ALL CORRESPONDENCE RELATED TO BOND VALIDATION,IND/OR A CLAIMSHOULD BE DIRECTED TO VP SURETY, 701 U.S. ROUTE ONE,SUITE 1, YARMOUTH,ME 04096 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO ALL TEXAS POLICYHOLDERS IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para someter una queja: You may call Frankenmuth Insurance Usted puede Ilamar al numero de telefono gratis Company toll-free telephone number for de Frankenmuth Insurance Company information or to make a complaint at: para informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-704-421-7002 1-704-421-7002 You may also write to Frankenmuth Insurance Usted tambidn puede escribir a Frankenmuth Company at: Insurance Company. Frankenmuth Insurance Company One Mutual Frankenmuth Insurance Company One Avenue Mutual Avenue Frankenmuth, MI 48787 Frankenmuth, MI 48787 Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de You may contact the Texas Department of Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion Insurance to obtain information on companies, acerca de companias, coberturas, derechos o coverages, rights or complaints at: quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de You may write the Texas Department of Texas: Insurance: P.O. Box 149091 P.O. Box 149091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax:(512)490-1007 Web: http://www.tdi.texas.gov Web: http://www.tdi.texas,gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Si PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: tiene una disputa concemiente a su prima o a Should you have a dispute concerning your un reclamo, debe comunicarse con el premium or about a claim you should contact Frankenmuth Insurance Company the Frankenmuth Insurance Company primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may entonces comunicarse con el departamento contact the Texas Department of Insurance. (TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: Este aviso es This notice is for information only and does not solo para proposito de informacion y no se become a part or condition of the attached convierte en parte o condicion del documento document. adjunto. 00 ML0042 44 04 16 Page 1 of 1 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00630 – Maintenance Bond Issued for Bid Page 1 of 2 MAINTENANCE BOND BOND. NO: ___________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, ________________________________________________________________ as Principal herein, and ___________________________________________ as Surety, are held to firmly bound unto the Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority, Texas, a local government corporation with its principal location of 221 E. Main St., Round Rock, Texas, Williamson County, as Obligee in the sum of ________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), which such sum shall be ten percent (10%) of the final construction cost, and for which sum, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the day of , 20 , herein referred to as “the Contract” and incorporated herein and made a part hereof for all purposes, for the construction of the following project: project name]. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if Principal shall maintain and remedy said Work, as defined in the Contract, free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of TWO (2) YEARS commencing on the date of final completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract. PRINCIPAL ATTEST: By: Name: Principal) Secretary BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00630 – Maintenance Bond Issued for Bid Page 2 of 2 Title: S E A L) Address: Witness as to Principal Telephone Number: Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: SURETY ATTEST: By: Name: Secretary Attorney in Fact S E A L) Address: An original copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact. Approved as to Form: Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority 221 E. Main St. Round Rock, Texas 78664 By: __________________________ Title: ________________________ Date: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 1 of 72 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Definitions and Terminology.......................................................................................5 1.01 Defined Terms........................................................................................................................5 1.02 Terminology...........................................................................................................................7 ARTICLE 2 – Preliminary Matters....................................................................................................8 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance........................................................................8 2.02 Copies of Documents.............................................................................................................8 2.03 Before Starting Construction .................................................................................................9 2.04 Preconstruction Conference..................................................................................................9 2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................9 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................10 2.07 Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................................................................10 ARTICLE 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse................................................................10 3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................10 3.02 Reference Standards............................................................................................................10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies...............................................................................11 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents..........................................................................12 ARTICLE 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................13 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed......................................................13 4.02 Commencement of Performance ........................................................................................13 4.03 Reference Points..................................................................................................................14 4.04 Progress Schedule................................................................................................................15 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ...........................................................................................15 ARTICLE 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions.....................................................................................................................................17 5.01 Availability of Lands.............................................................................................................17 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas.................................................................................................17 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions.....................................................................................18 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................20 5.05 Underground Facilities.........................................................................................................22 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ......................................................................23 5.07 Endangered Species.............................................................................................................24 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 2 of 72 5.08 Archaeological Discoveries and Cultural Resources.............................................................25 5.09 Control of Water..................................................................................................................25 5.10 Site Preservation..................................................................................................................26 ARTICLE 6 – Bonds and Insurance.................................................................................................26 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds...........................................................................26 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions............................................................................................27 6.03 Workers’ Compensation Insurance Coverage......................................................................27 ARTICLE 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................27 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence.......................................................................................27 7.02 Labor; Working Hours..........................................................................................................28 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ....................................................................................28 7.04 “Or Equals” ..........................................................................................................................30 7.05 Substitutes...........................................................................................................................31 7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.............................................................32 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties....................................................................................................33 7.08 Permits.................................................................................................................................33 7.09 Taxes....................................................................................................................................33 7.10 Laws and Regulations...........................................................................................................34 7.11 Record Documents...............................................................................................................35 7.12 Safety and Protection ..........................................................................................................36 7.13 Safety Representative..........................................................................................................38 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs.......................................................................................38 7.15 Emergencies.........................................................................................................................38 7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals..................................................................38 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee...................................................................41 7.18 Indemnification....................................................................................................................43 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services .........................................................................43 7.20 Administrative Charges........................................................................................................44 7.21 Miscellaneous Contractor Responsibilities:.........................................................................44 ARTICLE 8 – Other Work at the Site..............................................................................................45 8.01 Other Work..........................................................................................................................45 8.02 Coordination........................................................................................................................46 8.03 Legal Relationships ..............................................................................................................46 ARTICLE 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities...........................................................................................47 9.01 Communications to Contractor ...........................................................................................47 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 3 of 72 9.02 Replacement of Engineer.....................................................................................................47 9.03 Furnish Data.........................................................................................................................47 9.04 Pay When Due .....................................................................................................................47 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings..........................................................47 9.06 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities..............................................................................47 9.07 Evidence of Financial Arrangements....................................................................................48 9.08 Safety Programs...................................................................................................................48 9.09 Video Observation ...............................................................................................................48 ARTICLE 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................48 10.01 Owner’s Representative ......................................................................................................48 10.02 Visits to Site .........................................................................................................................48 10.03 Project Representative ........................................................................................................48 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments....................................................................49 10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work....................................................................................49 10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work.................49 10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities....................................................49 10.09 Compliance with Safety Program.........................................................................................50 ARTICLE 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work....................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ..........................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work.............................................................................50 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work.....................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price .....................................................................................................51 11.05 Change of Contract Time .....................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals.................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................53 ARTICLE 12 – Claims......................................................................................................................53 12.01 Claims...................................................................................................................................53 ARTICLE 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work .....................................................54 13.01 Cost of the Work..................................................................................................................54 13.02 Unit Price Work....................................................................................................................56 ARTICLE 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work.....57 14.01 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................57 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals........................................................................................57 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 4 of 72 14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................58 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................58 14.05 Uncovering Work.................................................................................................................59 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work..................................................................................................59 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work....................................................................................59 ARTICLE 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period........................60 15.01 Progress Payments...............................................................................................................60 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title.............................................................................................62 15.03 Substantial Completion........................................................................................................63 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy.....................................................................................................63 15.05 Final Inspection....................................................................................................................64 15.06 Final Payment ......................................................................................................................64 15.07 Waiver of Claims..................................................................................................................65 15.08 Correction Period.................................................................................................................66 ARTICLE 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................66 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work..................................................................................................66 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause.........................................................................................67 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience.............................................................................68 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate............................................................................68 ARTICLE 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................68 17.01 Methods and Procedures.....................................................................................................68 ARTICLE 18 – Miscellaneous.........................................................................................................69 18.01 Giving Notice........................................................................................................................69 18.02 Computation of Times .........................................................................................................69 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ..........................................................................................................69 18.04 Limitation of Damages.........................................................................................................69 18.05 No Waiver............................................................................................................................70 18.06 Survival of Obligations .........................................................................................................70 18.07 Controlling Law....................................................................................................................70 18.08 Headings ..............................................................................................................................70 18.09 Prevailing Wage Rates .........................................................................................................70 18.10 Right to Audit:......................................................................................................................71 18.11 Prohibition Against Boycotting Israel:..................................................................................72 18.12 Non-Waiver of Sovereign Immunity ....................................................................................72 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 5 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents listed in the Agreement, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below or as defined in the Agreement and other Contract Documents. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1.Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2.Agreement—The written instrument, entitled Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Time, identifies the parties, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. 3.Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Owner which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents, and as reasonably required by Owner and Engineer. 4.Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, or other revision to the Contract Documents, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 5.Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth in the Contract Documents, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, or both. 6.Claim—A demand or assertion duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Time, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 7.Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 6 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 8.Effective Date of the Agreement—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Agreement becomes effective. 9.Engineer –The Project Engineer retained by the Owner as identified on page 1 of the Agreement. 10.Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Time. 11.Geotechnical Engineering Reports – Reports developed to support near-surface work at or contiguous to the Site and provide for information purpose only as “Technical Data”. 12.Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 13.Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 14.Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract Documents require Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 15.Modification—A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Agreement signed by both parties (2) a Change Order (3) a Work Change Directive or (4) a Field Order. 16.Owner – the local entity contracting for the construction services as identified on page 1 of the Agreement. Owner may sometimes herein be referred to as “BCRUA”. 17.Project —The full scope of the Work as described in the Contract Documents. 18.Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes. 19.Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 20.Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 21.Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 7 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 22.Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer and Owner, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “Substantially Complete” and “Substantially Completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 23.Successful Bidder—The Bidder who’s Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions. 24.Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Contract Documents, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06. 25.Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 26.Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. 27.Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B.Defective: 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that: a. is unsatisfactory; or b. is faulty; or c. was not performed in a good and workmanlike manner; or d. does not properly perform as required; or BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 8 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions e. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or f. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or g. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner, in writing, at Substantial Completion. C.Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) so that they are ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment so that they are complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment so that they are complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment in compliance with the Contract Documents, complete and ready for intended use. D. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A.Bonds: Contractor shall deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish within 10 days of the date on which Contractor signs the Agreement. Contractor shall not be permitted to commence performance until the bonds have been delivered even though the Contract Time may have commenced. B.Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplemental Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor three printed copies of the Agreement (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 9 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Agreement, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A.Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Engineer: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values (“Schedule of Values”) for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. The preliminary Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor shall include a reasonable estimation of the value of each item included and shall not contain disproportionate values assigned to any item or items. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference A. Before any Work at the Site is started and after the schedules described in Paragraph 2.03 A above have been submitted, a pre-construction conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. 2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At the pre-construction conference, the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A will be reviewed. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The final approved Progress Schedule shall provide for an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Time and must be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals shall provide for a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals and must be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. The Progress Schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, and shall provide for expeditious and practical execution of the Work. The Progress Schedule shall be in a detailed critical path method or other format satisfactory to the Owner and the Engineer and shall provide a graphic representation of all the significant activities and events that will occur during the performance of the Work, identify each phase of construction in occupancy and set forth dates that are BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 10 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions critical in insuring the timely and orderly completion of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values shall provide for a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work and shall be acceptable in form and substance to Owner and Engineer. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings, Submittals, Contractor Requests and other transmittals, in electronic media or digital format, as directed by the Engineer either directly, or through access to an Engineer provided and maintained secure Project website. B. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items. 2.07 Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Prior to or within three (3) days of the Notice to Proceed, the Owner and Contractor shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract Documents, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern. D. The Contract Documents supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 11 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A.Review of Contract Document: 1. Prior to commencing the Work, the Contractor shall review the Contract Documents for the purpose of discovering any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents. B.Reporting Discrepancies: 1.Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2.Discovery of Discrepancies in Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Should Contractor perform the Work after discovery of such a conflict without reporting the conflict or before receipt of a clarification or interpretation by Engineer or if, using Contractor’s reasonable expertise and experience, Contractor should have reasonably discovered any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy that might exist in the Contract Documents, Contractor will be solely liable for any correction or other measures that may be required to overcome the conflict or bring the Work into compliance with the Contract Documents. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 12 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions C.Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). Subject to the provisions of Section 3.03 C.1 above, any discrepancies or conflicts within each of the Contract Documents themselves or with each other shall be resolved by applying the following order of precedence to each of the Contract Documents. 1. Modifications 2. The Agreement 3. The Supplemental General Conditions. 4. The General Conditions 5. The Specifications 6. Drawings 7. Any other Contract Documents. 2. In regard to the Drawings and Specifications, figures shall govern over scaled measurements; large scale drawings shall govern over small scale drawings; descriptive writing shall govern over legends indicating material or condition; and the provision or interpretation that results in the greater quantity and/or quality of Work or material shall prevail. 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents, or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding, unless Contractor appeals by submitting a Change Proposal. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 13 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence upon issuance of a Notice to Proceed by the Owner. 4.02 Commencement of Performance A. Subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 3.02 and 3.03 above, Contractor may commence performance upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed and in accordance with any terms and dates contained therein. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date. B. Contractor to visually record all areas of proposed construction, to depict existing surroundings of the Site prior to beginning work. Recording to be in DVD format, recorded with date, time, and locations, and two copies are to be given to the Owner. Contractor is not allowed to proceed with the work in any area until the required DVD is submitted and accepted by the Owner. No direct payment shall be allotted for visually recording the Site. Cost of visual recording is incidental to and included in the Contract Price. Visually recording shall be in accordance with 01380, except in DVD format, or as follows, if 01380 is not applicable: 1. Video and Project Photographs - Contractor shall videotape all areas of proposed construction and all areas in the limits of work to be performed, to depict existing surroundings of the Site, prior to beginning the Work. The only work that may proceed prior to the video is work that may be necessary for the video/photographs (staking, clearing with hand-tools, pruning, mowing, etc.) The video shall be narrated indicating the Station Number and/or site address being observed. When appropriate, the address of the Project should be noted on the photo and in the video. Damage to private property caused prior to the video shall be further detailed. Special attention shall be made to previously damaged driveways, sidewalks, mailboxes, landscaping, lighting, fencing, gates, and roads. The Contractor shall also videotape the gravity sanitary sewer line segments after testing is completed. 2. Tapes to be color DVD digital format, recorded with date, time, and locations, and two 2) copies to be given to the Owner. Contractor is not allowed to proceed with the Work in any area until the required DVDs are submitted and accepted by the Owner and Engineer. Cost of visually documenting of all areas of proposed construction is to be incidental to the cost of the Project unless specifically identified on the bid form. If the Owner or Engineer is not satisfied with the quality or quantity of the photographs or video, no additional amount will be paid to Contractor to provide photographs or videos acceptable to the Owner or Engineer. No additional time will be granted for delay in construction activities due to unsatisfactory photographs or video. 3. The Contractor shall keep a copy of all pre-construction photos in the Job Office (if included in Project) or in the superintendent's vehicle (if no job office is required) for the duration of the Project. C. Construction progress photographs shall be taken by the Contractor as follows: 1. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of twenty-four (24) photographs per month to depict the progress of the construction. The time and content of the photographs may BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 14 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions be directed by the Owner or the Engineer. Attention shall be placed on items of interest to the Project (connections to existing utilities, fittings, bends, borings, taps, etc.). Monthly progress photos will be delivered to the Engineer at the monthly progress meetings or submitted with the monthly pay application, whichever is more appropriate. Owner will not approve monthly pay applications without delivery of the monthly progress photos. 2. All photographic work shall be done by a qualified photographer acceptable to the Owner and Engineer. Three (3) prints of each photograph shall be furnished promptly to the Engineer, and each print shall have a color glossy finish mounted on a substantial backing. The overall dimensions of each mounted print shall be a minimum of 3"X5" and presented to the engineer using plastic photo sleeves included in a 3-ring binder or printed on glossy photograph paper (for digital images). The outside of the binder shall be clearly labeled on the spine to include the Project name, addresses and/or station numbers included inside, and the date range the photographs were taken. Alternately, a DVD-ROM of the photographs in JPG format can be provided, if an index of the photographs on the DVD-ROM is provided. The resolution of digital images shall not be less than 1024 X 768 pixels. 3. The film negatives (or digital files) shall be retained in the files of the photographer until the completion of the Project and then be turned over to the Owner. 4. Each photograph shall have attached to the backing or underneath the photo a label, approximately 2-1/4" wide by 1-3/4" high containing thereon in neat lettering: Contractor's name, short description of view, station number, photo number, date and time taken, address (when appropriate) and photographer's firm name. Alternately, a DVD-ROM of the photographs in JPG format can be provided, if an index of the photographs on the DVD-ROM is provided that includes the Contractor's name, short description of view, station number, photo number, date and time taken, address (when appropriate) and photographer's firm name. D. Post-construction photos shall also be taken after restoration of the construction site and repair/replacement of any private property damaged by the Contractor. Post-construction photos shall be taken every 150-200 feet of station, in both directions. Post-construction photos shall be delivered to the Engineer, in accordance with item (b), prior to application for final payment. 4.03 Reference Points A. If applicable, Owner shall provide engineering surveys, or GPS control points to establish reference points for construction which, in Engineer’s judgment, are necessary to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. B. Contractor shall note the location of all reference points and controls on a set of red-lined drawings or exhibits to be maintained at all times on the jobsite. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 15 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for Owner’s acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Time. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Time shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. C. A recurring construction status meeting shall be held at a location selected by the Owner. The recurrence schedule of this meeting shall be established at the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor shall be responsible to provide a current Progress Schedule at each construction status meeting. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work and such delay, disruption or interference is indisputably proven by Contractor to adversely affect the critical path of the Progress Schedule, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Time. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is also conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes listed below not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible and such delay, disruption or interference is indisputably proven by Contractor to adversely affect the critical path of the Progress Schedule, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Time. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Time under this paragraph include the following: 1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, pandemics and earthquakes; 2. Unusual inclement weather; 3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 16 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 4. acts of war or terrorism; or 5. acts of any governmental entity or courts having jurisdiction over the Project. D. Unusual Inclement Weather is defined as a rain event or other related event which occurs at the site in excess of Normal Rainfall during a particular calendar month and is of sufficient magnitude to prevent Contractor from performing units of Work critical to maintaining the Progress Schedule. “Normal Rainfall” compiled and published by the National Oceanic And Atmospheric Administration - National Centers for Environmental Information as a Summary of Monthly Normals for precipitation accumulated from 1991 to 2020 for the Austin Camp Mabry Station, TX, USW00013958, is considered a part of the calendar day contract, and is not a justification for an extension of time. Listed below are the number of days in each calendar month which constitute Normal Rainfall for such month and for which no compensatory days for rainfall events (“Rain Days”) in such months may be claimed: January 8 days February 8 days March 7 days April 7 days May 9 days June 6 days July 5 days August 5 days September 7 days October 7 days November 7 days December 7 days Rain Days in addition to the baseline rain day determination described above will be measured with the Owner’s or Owner’s Representative’s approval at the nearest operational public weather data collection facility to the Site. E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5. F. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 17 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions G. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. H. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Time under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. I. Contractor expressly waives any right to an adjustment in Contract Price for any event of delay. Except as provided otherwise by applicable law, Contractor’s sole remedy for any delay shall be limited to an adjustment in Contract Time. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Owner shall provide any easements for ingress and egress necessary for access to the Site. C. Contractor, at Contractor’s sole cost and expense, shall provide for any additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment for which the Site and any Owner provided easements do not provide. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A.Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor have arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any land or area because of the performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 18 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ANY SUCH CLAIM, AND AGAINST ALL COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY CLAIM OR ACTION, LEGAL OR EQUITABLE, BROUGHT BY ANY SUCH OWNER OR OCCUPANT AGAINST OWNER OR ANY OTHER PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER TO THE EXTENT CAUSED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY, OR BASED UPON, CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, OR BECAUSE OF OTHER ACTIONS OR CONDUCT OF THE CONTRACTOR OR THOSE FOR WHICH CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. B.Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall also conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C.Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D.Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Contractor accepts the responsibility to satisfy itself as to the soil conditions and nature and type of geological formations in and through which this Project will be constructed. Such information as may be obtained from the test borings and accompanying notations shown on the plans is merely for the guidance of the Contractor and is not to be construed in any manner as a guarantee by the Owner that such conditions of sub-surface strata are infallible. B. Contractor waives any and all rights to make a claim against Owner relating to representations related to geotechnical data provided in the Contract Documents. If a Geotechnical Report (“Geotechnical Report”) is provided by the Owner, the locations of the test holes, if applicable, are shown in the Geotechnical Report. Logs of these test holes are included in the Geotechnical Report. Test holes information represents subsurface characteristics to the extent indicated and only for the point location of the test hole. Contractor shall make its own interpretation of the character and condition of the materials, which will be encountered. Contractor may, at its own expense, make additional surveys and investigations as it may deem necessary to determine conditions, which will affect performance of the Work. C.Reports and Drawings: Owner will identify to the Contractor: 1. any reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. any drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 19 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions D.Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. E. Where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities, the Contractor shall at its own expense carefully support and protect all such structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement. Where it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions, the Contractor shall notify and cooperate with the utility owner. In cases where damage to an existing structure or utility occurs, the Contractor shall restore the structure or utility to its original condition and position without compensation from the Owner. Contractor shall repair or replace all damage to street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, drainage structures, or other structures, to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Engineer and the respective utility Owner or authority. Structures shall be restored to a condition equal to or better than the original condition and of a similar material and design. The costs of such repair or replacement shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the Proposal. Contractor shall maintain access to all driveways at all times. Contractor shall notify residents 48 hours prior to construction adjacent to their property. The Engineer has shown the approximate location of existing piping (proposed and existing), valves, electrical conduits, fiber optic, telephone, utility poles, et al., as best as can be determined from available records. The Contractor shall verify the type, size, and location of all existing utilities in the construction area. All piping, valves, electrical conduit, etc. in the construction area shall be relocated and/or removed as necessary in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be considered for relocating any of these items whether shown on the plans or not. F. All private property along and adjacent to the Contractor’s operation, including but not limited to lawns, yards, shrubs, trees, structures, trails, paths, livestock, fences, and mailboxes shall be adequately protected, and when damaged or removed, at Contractor’s sole cost and expense shall be repaired, replaced, renewed, or otherwise put in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before the Contractor caused the damage or removal. Contractor shall make provisions for continued mail delivery during construction. All mailboxes and fences affected by construction shall be repaired or replaced immediately. Where livestock are present, Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to assure that no construction or construction related activity will allow livestock to leave their confine. Where existing fences are being crossed, Contractor shall maintain the integrity of the fence during construction through placement of guards, temporary fences, or other adequate measures as approved by the Engineer. All construction activities, including ingress and egress shall occur within the boundaries and contract constraints of the temporary and permanent construction easements. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 20 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A.Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site and was not reasonably discoverable at the time Contractor submitted its bid, either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a material change in the Drawings or Specifications; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor, after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition within three (3) business days after Contractor becomes aware of such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement from Owner permitting Contractor to do so. B.Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine the necessity of obtaining additional exploration or testing with respect to the condition encountered, conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent price and schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C.Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D.Possible Contract Price and Contract Time Adjustments: 1. Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s time required for performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. the materially different condition encountered must be the direct and proximate cause of Contractor’s increased cost of or time for performing the Work; BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 21 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time and adversely impacts the critical path as shown in the Progress Schedule. d. Contractor provides such documentation, testing or other evidence to support the applicability of subparagraphs a. through c. above to Owner’s and Engineer’s reasonable satisfaction. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew or reasonably should have known of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor submitted its Bid or entered into the Agreement with Owner for the Project; or b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to timely give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. Contractor agrees that the failure to give such notice within the time described in Paragraph 5.04.A shall constitute a waiver and release of any claim that Contractor may have for an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Provided all of the conditions described above are satisfied and if Owner and Contractor cannot come to an agreement regarding an appropriate adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time and Contract Price, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 5. Adjustments to Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, are the sole and exclusive remedies of the Contractor for differing site condition claims, and the Contractor shall not be entitled to, and hereby waives, any claims for lost profits, extended home office overhead, and all other consequential damages and/or expenses. 6. If the Contractor’s actions disturb the site such that the Owner or Engineer cannot adequately and fully investigate the alleged differing site condition, the Contractor waives its right to receive any adjustments to Contract Price or Contract Time as a result of the differing site condition. 7. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs and damages incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s failure to provide appropriate and timely written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 8. No request by the Contractor for an adjustment to Contract Price for differing site conditions shall be allowed if made after final payment under the Agreement. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 22 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 5.05 Underground Facilities A.Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents: 1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site; c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B.Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), shall identify the owner of such Underground Facility and, within three (3) business days after Contractor becomes aware of such condition, give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. C.Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent price and schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D.Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 23 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions E.Possible Contract Price and Time Adjustments: 1. Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s time required for performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and c. Contractor timely gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 3. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree on Contractor’s entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price, or both, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. B. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. C. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the discovery of such condition. Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 24 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and deduct all costs incurred from the Contract balance or if the Contract balance is insufficient to cover the costs incurred, Owner may file a claim for such costs. D. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. E. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. F. If after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G.TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER AND ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE FAILURE TO CONTROL, CONTAIN, OR REMOVE A CONSTITUENT OF CONCERN BROUGHT TO THE SITE BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE, OR TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. I. Materials utilized in the construction of the Project shall be free of any hazardous materials, except as may be specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. 5.07 Endangered Species A. No activity is authorized that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. If a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction, the Contractor shall immediately cease work in the area of the encounter and notify the Owner who will immediately implement actions in accordance with applicable statutes. These actions shall include reporting the encounter to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, and the Texas Parks and BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 25 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Wildlife Department, obtaining any necessary approvals or permits to enable the work to continue, or implement other mitigation actions. The Contractor shall not resume construction in the area of the encounter until authorized to do so by the Owner. C. Possible Contract Time Adjustment: 1. The Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in Contract Time due to impacts caused by the presence of endangered species if the impact is caused by the Contractor's Work, negligence or willful conduct. Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time to the extent that any present endangered species at the Site causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s time required for performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the presence of endangered species; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and c. Contractor gives written notice to the Owner and Engineer as required by Paragraph 5.07.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 5.08 Archaeological Discoveries and Cultural Resources A. No activity which may affect properties listed or eligible for designation as a State Archeological Landmark is authorized until the Owner has complied with the provisions of the National Historic Preservation Act and the Antiquities Code of Texas. The Owner has previously coordinated with the appropriate agencies, and impacts to known cultural or archeological deposits have been avoided or mitigated. However, the Contractor may encounter unanticipated cultural or archeological deposits during construction. B. If archeological sites or historic structures which may qualify for designation as a State Archeological Landmark according to the criteria in 13 TAC Chapter 26, or that may be eligible for listing on the National Register of Historic Places in accordance with 36 CFR Part 800, are discovered after construction operations are begun, the Contractor shall immediately cease operations in that particular area and notify the Owner and the Texas Historical Commission, 1511 N. Colorado St. , P. O. Box 12276, Capitol Station, Austin, Texas 78711-2276. The Contractor shall take reasonable steps to protect and preserve the discoveries until they have been inspected by the Owner's representative. The Owner will promptly coordinate with the State Historic Preservation Officer and any other appropriate agencies to obtain any necessary approvals or permits to enable the work to continue. The Contractor shall not resume work in the area of the discovery until authorized to do so by the Owner. 5.09 Control of Water A. Should the work to be performed require the draining, pumping, dewatering or routing of water for construction, testing, cleaning, or restoration purposes, it shall be the obligation of the Contractor to perform same, while maintaining any additional erosion control or filtration systems as may be required by the Owner, City of Cedar Park, Travis County, Williamson County, Texas Department of Transportation, Texas Commission on BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 26 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Environmental Quality, Lower Colorado River Authority, or Engineer to assure clean water control, at no extra compensation. Dewatering a contractor cost and is subsidiary to bid items for excavation and/or pipe installation. 5.10 Site Preservation A. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape within the Site and shall conduct his construction operations so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction, scarification, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the work. Except where clearing is required for permanent construction, trees and vegetation shall be preserved and protected from damages which may be caused by equipment and construction operations. Where unnecessary destruction or damage to trees occurs as a result of the Contractor’s operations, replacement or corrections shall be made at the Contractor’s expense as directed by the Engineer. Prevention of noise pollution shall be a responsibility of the Contractor. Garbage, trash, and material debris shall be picked up daily and deposited in a suitable receptacle provided and maintained by the Contractor. Measures shall also be implemented to prevent the escape of mud and concrete. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in accordance with chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. The performance bond shall extend for one (1) year from the date of Final Completion. In addition to and not in lieu of the performance bond, Contractor shall furnish a Maintenance Bond in the amount of ten percent of the final construction cost throughout the Correction period (2 years from the date of Final Completion) to maintain, correct any deficiencies, and keep in good repair the Work. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds, if any, as are required by other specific provisions of the Contract Documents. B. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds in a form acceptable to Owner. The surety on the bonds must be duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts and be acceptable to the Owner. D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in Texas, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide bonds from another surety, all of which shall comply with the requirements above. E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s suspension and/or termination rights under Article 16. F. The performance bond shall include, without limitation, guarantees that work done under the Contract Documents will be completed and performed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with sound construction principles and practices applicable to the performance of the Work; BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 27 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions G. The performance and payment bonds shall be in a penal sum of not less than 100 percent of the Contract Price and remain in effect as required by applicable laws and the requirements set forth above. H. The Contractor shall utilize a surety company that is authorized to do business in Texas in accordance with Surety Bonds and Related Instruments, Chapter 3503 of the Insurance Code. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner is self-insured as a Local Government Corporation formed under the laws of the State of Texas. B. Contractor shall provide all insurance required by Exhibit A to these General Conditions Owner’s Insurance Requirements”). 6.03 Workers’ Compensation Insurance Coverage A. The Contractor shall certify in writing that it provides workers' compensation insurance coverage for each employee of the Contractor employed on the Project. B. Each Subcontractor on the Project shall provide such a certificate relating to coverage of the Subcontractor's employees to the general Contractor, who shall provide the Subcontractor's certificate to the Owner. C. A Contractor who has a contract that requires workers' compensation insurance coverage may provide the coverage through a group plan or other method satisfactory to the Owner. D. The employment of a maintenance employee by an employer who is not engaging in building or construction as the employer's primary business does not constitute engaging in building or construction. E. In this section: 1. “Building or construction” includes: a. erecting or preparing to erect a structure, including a building, bridge, roadway, public utility facility, or related appurtenance; b. remodeling, extending, repairing, or demolishing a structure; or iii. otherwise improving real property or an appurtenance to real property through similar activities. 2. “Governmental entity” means this state or a political subdivision of this state. The term includes a municipality and the Owner. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written consent of Owner. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 28 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions C. The Contractor will be responsible for the execution of a satisfactory and complete piece of work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of its work even though not particularly specified or indicated. Should the Contractor object to methods or materials specified, Contractor shall notify Owner in writing and have same adjusted before proceeding with the Work. Proceeding without notice shall be construed as a waiver of any Contractor objections. D. Contractor shall verify all measurements and be responsible for the same and shall report to Owner and Engineer any errors, discrepancies or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents, and shall await instructions before proceeding with the Work. Prior to submitting its proposal, Contractor shall examine the premises and the limitations under which the Work will have to be executed, as well as any subsurface conditions. Contractor shall be deemed to have accepted and anticipated any condition that was or should have been discovered by such examination and hereby waives and releases any claim related thereto, including but not limited to a claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time or Contract Price. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which may be withheld at Owner’s discretion for any reason. 1. Regular working hours are defined as Monday through Friday between the hours of 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. However, construction activities within five hundred feet (500’) of a dwelling or dwelling unit that is occupied as a residence shall only be performed between the hours of 8:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Requests to work other than regular working hours shall be submitted to the Owner, Owners Representative, and Engineer not less than 48 hours prior to any proposed work outside of regular working hours. 2. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and/or inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work at times other than during regular working hours stipulated in 7.02.B.1 above and for evaluating alternative material, equipment, etc. proposed by the Contractor. At Owner’s option, overtime and evaluation costs may either be invoiced directly, deducted from the Contractor’s monthly payment request, or deducted from the Contractor’s retention prior to release of Final Payment. Overtime and evaluation costs for the Owner’s personnel shall be based on the individual’s current overtime wage rate. Overtime and evaluation costs for personnel employed by the Engineer or other Owner’s representatives shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of their respective contracts with the Owner. C. Contractor shall provide and pay for labor in accordance with the prevailing wage in the locality and shall not pay less than the prevailing wage. 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 29 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment used will not be defective or damaged. The Contractor shall examine all materials furnished at the time and place of delivery and shall reject all defective or damaged material. Any defective material not rejected by the Contractor and discovered prior to Final Acceptance of the work shall be replaced with non-defective material by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall furnish such additional material and supplies as may be necessary to install such replaced material. The Contractor shall remove defective materials and install the replaced material at the Contractor’s own expense, furnishing all labor and facilities necessary to meet requirements of the Contract Documents or modifications made during construction. Inspection before installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to furnish good quality materials in place required by the provisions of these General Conditions and the other Contract Documents. The Owner will not accept delivery of materials for the Contractor; therefore, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for making its own arrangements with suppliers and shipping agencies for delivery to the proper locations. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance of delivery of materials and supplies by its own personnel. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. D. Excess earth shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall obtain approval of the Owner if the disposal site is located inside the Owner’s jurisdictional boundaries. Material deemed unacceptable for backfill must be disposed of in accordance with all applicable local, county, state, and federal laws, rules and regulations at the Contractor’s expense. E. Contractor will pay for construction staking of all improvements under the Contract Documents. Cut sheets and/or copy of field notes shall be issued to the Engineer. The Engineer will have the authority to stop all Work and withhold approval of payment to the Contractor at any time construction stakes have been destroyed and adequate control is not in existence on the site. The decision of the Engineer and Owner is final. Halting of Work due to violation of this term shall not be considered as cause for extension of the Contract Time or an adjustment of the Contract Price. Acknowledging that property pins are used for construction staking, the Contractor shall direct his work forces to use reasonable care in protecting existing property pins. Prior to commencing excavation operations, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer and advise the Engineer of which property pins may be disturbed. The Contractor, in its inspection of the Site prior to construction, shall satisfy itself that all property pins are in place and the pin locations are marked so as to be easily located and identified. It is further understood that all property pins destroyed during BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 30 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions construction will be replaced by a registered professional land surveyor at the Contractor’s expense so as to easily be located and identified, before final payment is made. F. The Contractor shall remove from the Site, including the staging and access areas, all rejected and condemned materials or work of any kind brought to or incorporated in the Project. Should the Contractor fail to do so, or to make satisfactory progress in so doing, within forty- eight (48) hours after the date a written notice from the Engineer or Owner ordering such removal, the condemned material or Work may be removed from the Project by the Owner and the cost of such removal shall be paid to Owner by Contractor or Owner may deduct such costs from the Contract Price that may be due or may become due to the Contractor under the provisions of the Contract Documents. No such rejected or condemned material shall again be offered for use by the Contractor on the Project. 7.04 “Or Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below. 1. If Engineer, in its sole discretion, determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer may deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) it is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Time; and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B.Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s sole expense. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 31 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions C.Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or- equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. Use of an unapproved “or-equal” item will render such Work defective and will be subject to Article 14 provisions. D.Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. E.Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05. 7.05 Substitutes A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. 3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, 2) be similar in substance to that specified, and 3) be suited to the same use as that specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Time, 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 32 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B.Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Time. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. Use of an unapproved substitute item will render such Work defective and will be subject to Article 14 provisions. C.Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish, at Contractor’s expense, a special performance guarantee or other warranty bond with respect to any substitute. D.Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. E.Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute any required documentation and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. 7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days. B. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. D. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 33 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions E. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work. F. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein. G. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. H. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner. I. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier. 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B.TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS INCIDENT TO THE USE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK OR RESULTING FROM THE INCORPORATION IN THE WORK OF ANY INVENTION, DESIGN, PROCESS, PRODUCT, OR DEVICE NOT SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 7.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay all governmental charges, permit fees and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). 7.09 Taxes A. The Owner enjoys tax-exempt status. To enjoy the cost-savings benefits of its tax-exempt status, the Owner will provide a Tax Exemption Certificate to the Contractor for use on the Project. The Contractor shall use that certificate to exempt any purchases made for the Work BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 34 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions from taxes. All savings for the tax-exempt status will be passed on to the Owner by the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to bind all Subcontractors of any tier to the obligation to present and use the Tax Exemption Certificate and pass all savings to the Owner. 7.10 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing, having reason to know or reasonably should have known that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses. However, Contractor has no responsibility or liability for determining whether the Work as described in the Contract Documents complies with applicable Laws or Regulations. C. All construction by the Contractor, or his sub-contractors, shall be in accordance with all applicable BCRUA, City of Cedar Park and State of Texas ordinances, statutes, rules, and regulations. This includes, but is not limited to, the conditions noted in the Contract Documents and any permits related to the Project. These documents are included herein by reference. The Construction Specification Standards of the Engineering Department of the City of Austin, Texas as presented in the City of Austin’s Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, latest edition (“City of Austin Specifications”), shall apply to this Project. The City of Austin Specifications are included herein by reference. In the case of conflicts between standards or specifications between jurisdictions, the City of Austin Specifications shall govern unless otherwise directed by the Owner or Engineer. Copies of these specifications may be purchased at the City of Austin or are available for inspection at the City of Cedar Park, Public Works Department, 2401 Brushy Creek Loop, Building 1, Cedar Park, Texas, 78613 or City of Cedar Park, Engineering Department, 450 Cypress Creek Road, Building 1, Cedar Park, Texas 78613. D. In the execution of its obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor must comply with all applicable local, state and federal laws, including but not limited to laws concerned with labor, safety, minimum wages, and the environment. The Contractor shall be familiar with and at all times shall observe and comply with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances and regulations which in any manner affect the conduct of the Work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and their representatives against any claim arising from violation of any such law, ordinance or regulation by the Contractor, its Subcontractors or their respective employees. E. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any worker or applicant for employment because of race, sex, color, or national origin. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 and Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967 and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. F. As a requirement under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) , a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan SWP3) shall be prepared by the Contractor for this Project. The following conditions apply to this contract: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 35 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 1. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor and the Owner will be required to execute, forward to the TCEQ, and Contractor to pay application fee for a Notice of Intent (NOI) to be covered by a TPDES general permit. 2. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor and all subcontractors will implement the measures of the SWP3. 3. Upon final acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor, along with the Owner, will be required to execute and forward to the TCEQ a Notice of Termination (NOT). 7.11 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Owner. Delivery of a complete set of record documents to Owner is a condition precedent to Final Completion. B. The Contractor shall prepare a daily construction diary recording as a minimum the following information concerning events at the site and submit duplication copies to the Owner’s Representative at weekly intervals. The copies are to be signed by the Project Superintendent. 1. Work Performed. 2. Approximate count of Contractor’s personnel, by classification, on the site. 3. List by classification, of all Subcontractors, personnel and any professionals on the site that day. 4. List of all equipment on the site by make and model. 5. High and low temperatures together with general weather conditions. 6. Start time and finish time of day’s work. 7. Accidents and/or unusual events. 8. Meetings and significant decisions made. 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages and/or losses. 10. Meter readings and/or similar recordings. 11. Emergencies procedures that may have been needed. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change orders received and implemented. 14. Services connected and/or disconnected. 15. Installed equipment and/or system tests and/or startups and results. 16. Partial completions and/or occupancies. 17. Date of substantial completion certified. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 36 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions C. The Contractor shall make appropriate daily measurements of facilities constructed and keep accurate records of location (horizontal and vertical) of all facilities. D. Once per month on a recurring day determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish as-recorded drawings for the Work performed up to the end of the week preceding the day the drawings are furnished. Approval of Contractor Applications for Payment shall be contingent upon comprehensive and generally accurate as-recorded drawings. Drawings shall show as-built dimensions and locations of all work constructed. As a minimum, the final drawings shall include the following: 1. Horizontal and vertical locations of Work. 2. Changes in equipment and dimensions due to substitutions. 3. “Nameplate” data on all installed equipment. 4. Deletions, additions, and changes to scope of Work. 5. Any other changes made. 7.12 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall comply with all Laws and Regulations regarding safety and shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 37 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. H. Owner prohibits the use, possession, sale, transfer, or storage of prohibited drugs or alcohol on the Site by Contractor’s employees. This policy also applies to those employees of subcontractors who perform work for Contractor. Contractor specifically acknowledges its understanding of and familiarity with Owner’s policies, procedures, and restrictions concerning the influence, use, or presence of drugs and/or alcohol at the Project and agrees to be bound by and fully comply with the same. Further, Contractor agrees that the foregoing shall apply to its employees and those of its subcontractors and hereby agrees to ensure that all personnel engaged in the Work are aware of and familiar with Owner’s policies, procedures, and restrictions and to remove from the Project and replace any personnel Contractor believes to be in violation thereof. It is understood and agreed that Owner shall have the right to require the removal and replacement of any person or entity not adhering to such requirements. Contractor shall include the foregoing provisions in each of its subcontracts relating to the Project in order that the terms of this Article shall fully apply to such parties. I. During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine its operations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of the Work shall be constructed under conditions, which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. J. Water used for the mixing of concrete, testing, or any other purpose incidental to this project, will be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for securing and transporting such water. No separate payment will be made for water used, but the cost thereof shall be included in the various items of the proposal and bid schedule. The Contractor will be required to provide and install temporary meter(s) on existing hydrant(s) at the Contractor’s expense as necessary for Contractor’s performance of work. K. All traffic control shall be in accordance with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD). Where the Work is carried on in or adjacent to any street, alley, or public place, the Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, shall provide such watchmen, and shall provide such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the Work as are necessary. Where applicable, the Contractor shall notify Leander Independent School District (LISD), City of Cedar Park Field Operations, Public Works, and Emergency Services a minimum of seven (7) business days prior to any lane reduction, lane closure, or roadway closure. L. Barricades shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise, the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade and sufficient BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 38 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions number of barricades shall be erected to keep vehicles from being driven on or into any Work under construction. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the Work. M. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the Work due to the failure of barricades, signs, lights, and watchmen to protect it, and whenever evidence is found of such damage, the Engineer may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replace by the Contractor at its cost and expense. The Contractor’s responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights, and for providing watchmen shall not cease until the project shall has been accepted by the Owner. All lanes of traffic shall be open at the end of each working day. No trenches shall remain open at the end of each working day. 7.13 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. B. In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual on or near the Work, the Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative within twenty-four (24) hours of the event and shall be responsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the event through photographs, interviewing witnesses, obtaining medical reports and other documentation that describes the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to Owner, for the Owner's and Engineer's records, within forty-eight (48) hours of the event. Nothing in this section will relieve Contractor of its obligations and responsibilities with respect to an injury under any state and federal laws and regulations. 7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals A.Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements: 1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 39 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. B.Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1.Shop Drawings: a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. 2.Samples: a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. 3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. 4. After review and approval of a Submittal, Shop Drawing or Sample by Engineer in accordance with this section, Contractor may rely on the information provided by Engineer and Work performed in accordance with any approved Shop Drawing, Submittal or Sample and the Contract Documents will be presumed to be acceptable to Owner unless an actual defect in the Work is discovered. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for delays caused by rejection of the submittal of inadequate or incorrect shop drawings, product data or samples. The Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that only “approved” copies of shop drawings bearing the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 40 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions approval of the Engineer are allowed on the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all copies of approved shop drawings necessary for the construction operation. No portion of the Work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Engineer. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. C.Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract Documents. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Training: These provisions apply if they are applicable and not otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall obtain installation, operation, and maintenance manuals from manufacturers and suppliers for equipment furnished under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit three copies of each complete manual to the Engineer within 90 days after approval of shop drawings, product data, and samples, and not later than the date of shipment of each item of equipment to the project site or storage location. 2. The Owner shall require the Engineer to promptly review each manual submitted, noting necessary corrections and revisions. If the Engineer rejects the manual, the Contractor shall correct and resubmit the manual until it is acceptable to the Engineer as being in conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with information given in the contract documents. Owner may assess Contractor a charge for reviews of same items in excess of three (3) times. Such procedure shall not be considered cause for delay. 3. Acceptance of manuals by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of any requirements of terms of the Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor shall provide the services of trained, qualified technicians to check final equipment installation, to assist as required in placing same in operation, and to instruct operating personnel in the proper manner of performing routine operation and maintenance of the equipment. 5. Operations and maintenance manuals specified hereinafter are in addition to any operation, maintenance, or installation instructions required by the Contractor to install, test, and start-up the equipment. 6. Each manual is to be bound in a folder and labeled to identify the contents and project to which it applies. The manual shall contain the following applicable items: a. A listing of the manufacturer's identification, including order number, model, serial number, and location of parts and service centers. b. A list of recommended stock of parts, including part number and quantity. c. Complete replacement parts list. d. Performance data and rating tables. e. Specific instructions for installation, operation, adjustment, and maintenance. f. Exploded view drawings for major equipment items. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 41 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions g. Lubrication requirements. h. Complete equipment wiring diagrams and control schematics with terminal identification. E.Engineer’s Review: 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order. 3. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Time or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 4. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance nor approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 5. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 4 above. F.Resubmittal Procedures: 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 42 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements shall be considered defective. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. B. In addition to Contractor’s warranty obligations set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Paragraph 7.17 A above and subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.08 below, the Contractor warrants and guarantees the Work for two (2) years from Final Completion (“Correction Period”), or for a longer period if expressly stated in the Contract Documents. This includes a warranty and guarantee against any and all defects. The Contractor must correct any and all defects in material and/or workmanship which may appear during such Correction Period, or any defects that occur during the Correction Period even if discovered more than two (2) years after Final Completion, by repairing (or replacing with new items or new materials, if necessary) any such defect at no cost to the Owner, within a reasonable period of time, and to the Owner's satisfaction. C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; 6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 8. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 9. The failure of the Owner, Engineer, the Resident Project Representative or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the Owner or Engineer to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work or any non-conformance of the Work with any requirement of the Contract Documents. Contractor hereby waives any claim or defense to any claim by the Owner that any failure by the Owner, Engineer, Resident Project Representative or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the Owner to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work relieves or releases, in whole or in part, Contractor from any obligations or responsibility for the BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 43 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions correction of such defects or any other obligation of Contractor under the Contract Documents. E. Prior to the expiration of the Correction Period, the Owner reserves the right to require a re- inspection of the Work. Such inspection shall be made by duly authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor, in order to determine if any defects or deficiencies exist which are due to be corrected by the Contractor. F. Manufacturer’s Warranties on installed machinery and equipment as well as subcontractor and supplier warranties and guarantees, express or implied, respecting any part of the work and any materials used therein shall be deemed obtained – and shall be enforced – by the Contractor as the agent and for the benefit of the Owner. 7.18 Indemnification TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, AND IN ADDITION TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR OTHERWISE, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, CONSULTANTS, EXPERTS AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM, REGARDLESS OF ANY COMPARATIVE OR CONTRIBUTORY RESPONSIBILITY OF AN INDEMNITEE AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, OR DAMAGES WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY THE NEGLIGENCE, ACTS, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS OF ANY INDEMNITEE. TO THE EXTENT THAT SUBCHAPTER C OF CHAPTER 151 OF THE TEXAS INSURANCE CODE CHAPTER 151”) APPLIES TO THE OWNER, IT IS THE INTENT OF THE OWNER THAT IF THE PROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 151 DO APPLY, NOTHING HEREIN SHALL IMPOSE ANY REQUIREMENTS ON CONTRACTOR THAT ARE PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 AND THAT ANY OF THE PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. ACCORDINLY, IN THE EVENT THAT IN CONSTRUING AND INTERPRETING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION OR, IF APPLICABLE, AN ARBITRATOR, DETERMINES THAT CHAPTER 151 APPLIES TO THE OWNER, THEN THE COURT OR ARBITRATOR SHALL REFORM THE PROVISIONS HEREOF SO AS TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 151 AND SUCH REFORMATION SHALL NOT AFFECT THE VALIDITY OF ANY PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall not be responsible for nor warrant the adequacy of the design, performance, criteria, or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications. B. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 44 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. 1. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. 2. Owner shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. 3. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1. 7.20 Administrative Charges A. The Contractor shall also pay to the Owner administrative charges after the Substantial and then Final Completion date as follows: B. The Owner shall back charge the Contractor for any and all engineering charges and field observation charges incurred after the Substantial and then Final Completion date until acceptance of the Work by Owner. C. Back charges will be determined monthly and according to the following schedule: Description Rate Engineer or other outside services on the project Invoice Amount Owner Project Manager or Engineer $180/hr Owner Field Observer $150/hr Administrative Expenses $50/hr 7.21 Miscellaneous Contractor Responsibilities: A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, prior to the initiation of construction on easements through private property, to inform the property Owner of his intent to begin construction. Before beginning construction in areas of public dedication, the Contractor shall inform the agency having jurisdiction in the area forty-eight (48) hours prior to initiation of the work. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the limits of right-of-way and easements as obtained by the Owner and as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall restrict his operations to within the limits of the right-of-way and easements. He shall be responsible for all damages to trees, crops, grasses, etc. which as a result of his operations occur outside such limits. Should the Contractor require additional right-of-way for ingress or egress, he BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 45 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions shall make arrangements with the owners of such property for such right-of-way at no cost to the Owner. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. B. Use of explosives shall not be permitted on this Project. C. The Contractor shall protect trees, other than Cedar less than six inches in diameter, or that are within the trench width, as directed by the Engineer. The working space noted on the plans is not intended to indicate all trees can be removed. Trees to be protected will be identified prior to construction. Unauthorized tree removal will be compensated at $100.00 per caliper inch of trunk as measured at a point four feet above the ground. D. Contractor is not required to provide a field office. Meetings involving BCRUA Staff may be held at the Owner’s Water Treatment Plant. E. Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities with hand washing stations for his employees at locations along the project route, not to exceed 1,000 linear feet in spacing. For Facility projects provide sanitary facilities with hand washing station at a ratio 1:10 workers per week. F. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for all costs incurred to complete the Work. Because of the anticipated length of the Contract Time, Contractor, in preparing and submitting its Proposal and agreeing to the Contract Price, understood that there may be increases in the cost of labor and materials to perform the Work and Contractor has taken the possibility of such increases into consideration. Contractor further acknowledges and agrees that Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price based upon any increases in the cost of any labor, materials or any other services necessary for Contractor to complete the Work and satisfy its obligations under the Contract Documents, regardless of the reasons for such increases. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 46 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplemental General Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental General Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time and such delays, disruptions or interferences adversely affect the critical path of the Work as set forth in the most recent Progress Schedule. B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor. C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 47 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ANY SUCH CLAIMS, AND AGAINST ALL COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO SUCH DAMAGE, DELAY, DISRUPTION, OR INTERFERENCE. ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. For all Project and performance of Work matters, Owner will issue communications to Contractor through Engineer. However, Owner may, at its discretion, issue communications related to the Project directly to Contractor. In all such direct communications, Owner will endeavor to copy Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. 9.06 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. The Owner is not responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The failure or omission of the Owner, Engineer, Resident Project Representative or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the Owner to observe, detect, discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the Contractor from Contractor’s obligation to properly and fully perform the Work pursuant to the Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for the acts, errors or omissions of the Contractor, or any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of the Contractor. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 48 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 9.07 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Within Thirty (30) days after executing the Agreement, Contractor may request, and Owner shall furnish, reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents. 9.08 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. 9.09 Video Observation A. The Owner or it’s Representative, at their sole discretion, can install, set up, operate and maintain video equipment on Site to monitor and observe the progression of the Work. Recording can take place without notification full time or as time-lapse. ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will act as the Owner’s representative for Project administration during the construction period. Engineer shall not have the authority to bind the Owner as that authority lies with the Owner’s designated representative, but Engineer may communicate on behalf of Owner in all Project matters. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in this Article 10. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 49 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. 10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16. B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19. C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11. D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. 10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.02. 10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor. 10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Engineer’s authority, responsibility and actions as Owner’s representative shall not give rise to any liability to Contractor. Contractor expressly waives any claims it has against Engineer for the performance of its responsibilities as Owner’s representative. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Engineer shall not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The failure or omission of the Engineer to observe, detect, discover or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the Contractor, in whole or in part, from the Contractor’s obligation to properly and fully perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. D. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 50 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 10.09 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed. ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. 1.Change Orders: a. A Change Order shall be used to amend or supplement the Contract Documents when the Parties agree to the amendment, supplement, modification to the scope of work, or change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. 2.Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive may be issued by the Owner if the Parties cannot agree on a Change Order or if: a. The parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Time; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. b. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. c. Upon receipt of a Change Directive, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved. 3.Field Orders: Owner or Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Time or Contract BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 51 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. B. The total Contract Price may not be increased by a Change Order unless provision has been made for the payment of the added cost by the appropriation of current funds or bond funds for that purpose, by the authorization of the issuance of certificates, or by a combination of those procedures. C. Changes that involve an increase in the Contract Price shall be supported by documentation of the cost components. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.02); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C). C.Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee, which shall include overhead and profit, shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent; BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 52 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and 11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive. 11.05 Change of Contract Time A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment of the Contract Time shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Time or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 53 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 2.Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal with Owner and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Engineer’s action on a Change Proposal will not have the effect of adjusting the Contract Time or Contract Price without express written approval of Owner and a memorialization of Engineer’s Action in a Change Order. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 3.Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Contractor, unless Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. B.Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07; and 4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12. ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A.Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article: 1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2. Owner or Contractor demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and 3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 54 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B.Submittal of Claim: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Except for Claims submitted by the Contractor to increase the Contract Price or Contract Time as permitted in the Contract Documents, the failure of a party to timely give the notice of Claim set forth herein shall not constitute a waiver of such Claim. C.Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D.Mediation: 1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, the mediation shall occur within 60 days after the agreement to mediate. However, the mediation may be stayed and its scope and schedule may be amended. 3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. 4. Mediation is a condition precedent to litigation before a court of competent jurisdiction or tribunal. E.Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. F.Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise, that agreement should be memorialized in a Change Order if the Project is ongoing at the time of resolution and the agreement affects the Contract scope, price, or time. G. During the pendency of any claim, Contractor shall continue with all Work, including the Work in dispute, and Owner will continue to pay for properly performed Work in accordance with the payment provisions in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not have the right to stop the Work because of Owner’s failure to pay any amount disputed by Owner. H. If the Project is not Substantially Complete during the pendency or after the denial of a claim, Contractor shall not have the right to file suit against Owner in the court of competent jurisdiction until the Work is Substantially Complete. If litigation is initiated it shall be filed in the District Courts of Williamson County, Texas. ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A.Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 55 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B.Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, approved by Owner, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 56 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions d. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. e. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C.Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s employees, agents and other personnel not included in Paragraph 13.01.B, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D.Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Contract Documents. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C. E.Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 13.02 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract Documents. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 57 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall be responsible for providing the services of an independent inspection and testing lab if the Contract Documents so require. C. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; 2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 58 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions D. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A.Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B.Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C.Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D.Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. The Owner shall have the right, in Owner’s sole discretion, to have the Engineer or other consultants specify the means and methods that will be followed to correct or address any defective Work. If the Owner specifies a means or method by which defective Work will be addressed or corrected, the Contractor shall perform the specified work necessary to address or correct the defective Work at Contractor’s sole cost and expense. E.Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F.Costs and Damages: Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work, including but not limited to any engineering or other consultant’s fees incurred by the Owner to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods to address or correct such defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work, including but not limited to any engineering or other consultant’s fees incurred by the Owner to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods and work necessary to allow Owner to accept the defective Work and Contractor shall pay for all work required to be performed to allow Owner to accept the defective Work and any estimated costs, expenses and the greater of (1) the costs, expenses and damages BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 59 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions Owner may sustain in the future as a result of accepting the defective Work or (2) the diminution in the value of the Work resulting from Owner’s acceptance of defective Work. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay to Owner the above described costs, expenses and damages incurred by Owner as a result of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, upon Owner’s approval and Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such defective Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 60 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. If the payments due under Article 15 are not sufficient to cover such claims, costs, losses and damages, the Contractor shall pay the amount of such claims, costs, losses and damages to Owner upon demand by Owner. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A.Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.02. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B.Applications for Payments: 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 61 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. 4. Each payment to the Contractor by the Owner shall be made subject to submission by the Contractor of all written certifications required of the Contractor, their Subcontractors and other general and special conditions required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C.Review of Applications: 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 62 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions D.Reductions in Payment by Owner: 1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; h. other items set forth in the Contract Documents entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended. 2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. E. Withholding Payments. The Owner may withhold from any payment otherwise due the Contractor so much as may be necessary to protect the Owner and if so elects may also withhold any amounts due from the Contractor to any Subcontractors or material dealers, for work performed or material furnished by them. The foregoing provisions shall be construed solely for the benefit of the Owner and will not require the Owner to determine or adjust any claims or disputes between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Material dealers, or to withhold any monies for their protection unless the Owner elects to do so. The failure or refusal of the Owner to withhold any monies from the Contractor shall in no way impair the obligations of any surety or sureties under any bond or bonds furnished under the Contract Documents. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 63 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work Substantially Complete, Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is Substantially Complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before Final Payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. At that inspection, Owner and Engineer will review, supplement, and edit the initial punch list prepared by Contractor or prepare an additional punch list if Contractor has not yet provided a punch list. If Owner or Engineer does not consider the Work Substantially Complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Owner and Engineer consider the Work Substantially Complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. If Owner and Engineer do not consider the Work Substantially Complete, the Engineer shall notify Contractor of such, in writing, with a specific explanation of those portions of the Work that are the basis for determining the Work is not substantially complete. D. After Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to Final Payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any Substantially Completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner and Engineer Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time Owner may notify the Contractor in writing that Owner intends to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be Substantially Complete. Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03 for that part of the Work. 2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. The Owner shall have no obligation, however, to accept any portion of Work as being Substantially Complete or to occupy or use any portion of the Work until all of the Work is Substantially Complete 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 64 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions If Owner or Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be Substantially Complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Owner and Engineer consider that part of the Work to be Substantially Complete, and if Owner elects to use and occupy that part of the Work, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work by Owner will relieve Contractor of its insurance obligations under these Contract Documents. B. The Owner, at the Owner's sole option, shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work regardless of the time for completing the entire Work. The Owner’s exercise of such use and possession shall not be construed to mean that the Owner acknowledges that any part of the Work so possessed and used is substantially complete or that it is accepted by Owner, and the Owner’s exercise of such use and possession shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A.Application for Payment: 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of the Owner and Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for Final Payment. 2. The Final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to Final Payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 65 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. 4. The retainage and its interest earnings, if any, shall not be paid to the Contractor until the all other agencies having jurisdiction over any portion of the Work has authorized a reduction in, or release of, retainage on the Work. B.Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the Final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the Final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of Final Payment and present the Final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Final Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Final Application for Payment. C.Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for Final Payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of Final Payment. D.Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Engineer’s recommendation regarding whether the Work is complete and the amount of the Final Payment to be made to the Contractor, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor, unless Owner disputes the recommendation of the Engineer. If Owner disputes the recommendation of the Engineer, the Owner shall provide to the Contractor a written description of the reasons why the Owner disputes the recommendation of the Engineer and Owner shall pursue a Claim against the Contractor pursuant to the dispute resolution procedures set forth in the Contract Documents. E.Contractor’s Warranty and Guarantee: Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee will begin to run upon Final Completion as approved by Owner, and following Engineer’s written recommendation. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of Claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves Claims and rights arising from defective Work appearing after Final Completion, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 66 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B. The acceptance of Final Payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all Claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted, in writing, expressly reserved, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within two years after the date of Final Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is in need of repair, adjustment, modification, correction, or found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas; 2. correct such defective Work; 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective; 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom, and 5. Perform such work specified by Owner that will allow Owner to accept defective Work. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired, may have the rejected Work removed and replaced, or may have work performed to allow Owner to accept defective Work. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair, removal and replacement or other work performed to allow Owner to accept defective Work (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the Correction Period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 67 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination of the Agreement or termination of Contractor’s right to proceed with the Work for cause: 1. Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02A occurs, then after giving Contractor ten (10) days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Agreement or Contractor’s right to proceed with the Work, Owner may proceed to: 1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor notice that the Agreement is terminated or Owner has terminated Contractor’s right to proceed with the Work; and 2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. If Owner has exercised any of the remedies described in Paragraph 16.02B above, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. If Owner chooses to complete the Work in accordance with this provision, Owner and Contractor expressly agree that Owner shall be exempt from publicly bidding the completion work pursuant to Section 252.022 of the Texas Local Government Code. D. Owner may not proceed with the remedies under Paragraph 16.02B if Contractor within seven (7) days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its default and proceeds diligently to cure such default. E. If Owner proceeds to complete the Work and/or correct the default, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost of all related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under the Contract Documents and under any applicable Laws and Regulations. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 68 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor, Owner, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, may terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for: 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work; 3. demobilization expenses; and 4. overhead and profit on unperformed work. B. Contractor shall not be paid for any economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination, except for those costs expressly identified above. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, ( (1) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (2) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A.Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article: 1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and 2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after Final Payment has been made. 3. Reserved claims of Owner or Contractor under the Contract Documents, including Article 12. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 69 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B.Final Resolution of Disputes: 1. For any disputes subject to this Article, Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation. The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction. Mediation is a condition precedent to litigation before a court of competent jurisdiction. 2. For any claim not resolved by mediation, the parties agree to submit such claims to the jurisdiction of the District Courts of Williamson County, Texas for final dispute resolution through litigation. ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice; or 3. delivered by electronic means with a corresponding confirmation of delivery or read receipt. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday, Sunday or a legal holiday, the computation of time will conclude on the next business day. 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: 1. damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and 2. damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there and home office overhead, for losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 70 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions anticipated profit arising directly from the Work and any other damages limited by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor expressly acknowledges, to the exclusion of all other damages, the total amount of money awarded in an adjudication brought against the Owner for breach of the Agreement shall be limited to the following: 1. The balance due and owed by the Owner under this Contract as it may have been amended; 2. The amount owed for approved change orders or additional work the Contractor was directed to perform by the Owner in connection with this Contract; 3. Reasonable and necessary attorney’s fees that are equitable and just; and 4. Interest as allowed by law, including interest as calculated under the Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. C. Notwithstanding any other limitation of damages set forth in this Contract, the total amount of damages awarded in an adjudication brought against the Owner arising under this Contract shall not include: 1. Consequential damages, including those waived under Paragraph 18.04.A.2; 2. Exemplary damages; 3. Damages for unabsorbed home office overhead; or 4. Damages not expressly permitted under Paragraph 18.04 D. This Section 18.04 does not limit recovery by the Owner of Liquidated Damages or actual damages for delay if Liquidated Damages are not recoverable. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of the Contract Documents. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive Final Payment, Final Completion, and Final Acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Agreement or termination of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. The Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas. 18.08 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute substantive provisions of the Contract Documents. 18.09 Prevailing Wage Rates A. The Work subject to Government Code Chapter 2258, as amended, concerning payment of Prevailing Wage Rates. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 71 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions B. Contractor shall provide and pay for labor in accordance with the prevailing wage in the locality and shall not pay less than the prevailing wage. Prevailing wage schedule as provided by the most current decision of the U.S. Department of Labor for Williamson County, Texas. C. Contractor shall pay to Owner sixty dollars ($60) for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in this section. 18.10 Right to Audit: A. Whenever the Owner enters into any type of contractual arrangement with the Contractor, then the Contractor’s “records”, upon reasonable notice, shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction during normal business working hours. The Owner’s representative, or an outside representative engaged by the Owner, may perform such audits. The Contractor shall maintain all records relating to this Agreement for four (4) years from the date of Final Payment under the Agreement. B. The Owner shall have the exclusive right to examine the records of the Contractor. The term “records” as referred to herein shall include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character, including without limitation records, books, papers, documents, contracts, schedules, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in the Owner’s judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any contract document. Such records shall include (hard copy, as well as computer-readable data if it can be made available), written policies and procedures, time sheets, payroll registers, cancelled checks, personnel file data, correspondence, general ledger entries, and any other record in the Contractor’s possession which may have a bearing on matters of interest to the Owner in connection with the Contractor’s dealings with the Owner (all of the foregoing are hereinafter referred to as “records”). In addition, the Contractor shall permit interviews of employees as well as agents, representatives, vendors, subcontractors and other third parties paid by the Contractor to the extent necessary to adequately permit evaluation and verification of the following: 1. The Contractor’s compliance with Contract Documents; 2. The Contractor’s compliance with the Owner’s business ethics policies; and 3. If necessary, the extent of the Work performed by the Contractor at the time of contract termination. C. The Contractor shall require all payees (examples of payees include subcontractors, insurance agents, material suppliers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Article 18.10 by securing the requirements hereof in a written agreement between the Contractor and payee. Such requirements include a flow-down right of audit provision in contracts with payees that also apply to subcontractors and sub-subcontractors, material suppliers, etc. The Contractor shall cooperate fully and shall require Related Parties and all of the Contractor’s subcontractors to cooperate fully in furnishing or in making available to the Owner from time to time whenever requested, in an expeditious manner, any and all such information, materials, and data. D. The Owner’s authorized representative or designee shall have reasonable access to the Contractor’s facilities, shall be allowed to interview all current or former employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this Agreement, and shall be provided BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00700 – General Conditions Issued for Bid Page 72 of 72 Section 00700 – General Conditions adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with this Article 18.10. E. If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Article 18.10 discloses overpricing or overcharges of any nature by the Contractor to the Owner in excess of one- half of one percent (.5%) of the total contract billings, then the reasonable actual cost of the Owner’s audit shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor. Any adjustments and/or payments, which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of the Contractor’s invoices and/or records, shall be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 days) from presentation of the Owner’s findings to the Contractor. F.Review by Owner 1. The Owner, authorized representatives and agents of the OwnershallOwner shall all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the Contractor only by the Owner through authorized representatives or agents. 18.11 Prohibition Against Boycotting Israel: A. Contractor agrees that Contractor currently does not boycott Israel, as that term is defined in Texas Government Code Section 808.001, as amended, nor will Contractor boycott Israel during the term of this Agreement. 18.12 Non-Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall constitute and shall not be interpreted or construed to constitute a waiver of sovereign immunity applicable to the Owner. B. Any limitation of the sovereign immunity of the Owner shall be controlled by applicable Laws and Regulations. 1 Exhibit A. Owner’s Insurance Requirements of Contractor 1. Specific Insurance Requirements The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: Insurance Coverage/Limits Other Requirements Commercial General Liability (Occurrence Basis) Amounts of coverage shall be no less than: 1,000,000 Per Occurrence 2,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate 1,000,000 Personal And Advertising Injury Designated Construction Project(s) General Aggregate Limit Current ISO edition of CG 00 01 Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of Owner Parties on a combination of ISO forms CG 20 10 04 13 and CG 20 37 04 13. This coverage shall be endorsed to provide primary and non-contributing liability coverage. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance coverage required herein shall be primary to and will not seek contribution from any other insurance held by Owner Parties, with Owner Parties’ insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. Stop Gap coverage shall be provided if any work is to be performed in a monopolistic workers’ compensation state. The following exclusions/limitations (or their equivalent(s), are prohibited: o Contractual Liability Limitation CG 21 39 o Amendment of Insured Contract Definition CG 24 26 o Limitation of Coverage to Designated Premises or Project, CG 21 44 o Exclusion-Damage to Work Performed by Subcontractors On Your Behalf, CG 22 94 or CG 22 95 o Exclusion-Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage Hazard, CG 21 42 or CG 21 43 o Any Classification limitation o Any Construction Defect Completed Operations exclusion o Any endorsement modifying the Employer’s Liability exclusion or deleting the exception to it o Any endorsement modifying or deleting Explosion, Collapse or Underground coverage o Any Habitational or Residential exclusion applicable to the Work o Any “Insured vs. Insured” exclusion except Named Insured vs. Named Insured o Any Punitive, Exemplary or Multiplied Damages exclusion o Any Subsidence exclusion 2 Business Auto Liability Amount of coverage shall be no less than: 1,000,000 Per Accident Current ISO edition of CA 00 01 Arising out of any auto (Symbol 1), including owned, hired and nonowned Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Amounts of coverage shall be no less than: Statutory Limits 1,000,000 Each Accident and Disease Alternate Employer endorsement USL&H must be provided where such exposure exists. The State in which work is to be performed must listed under Item 3.A. on the Information Page Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of the Contractor’s employment of workers and anyone for whom the Contractor may be liable for workers’ compensation claims. Workers’ compensation insurance is required, and no “alternative” forms of insurance shall be permitted. Where a Professional Employer Organization (PEO) or “leased employees” are utilized, Contractor shall require its leasing company to provide Workers’ Compensation insurance for said workers and such policy shall be endorsed to provide an Alternate Employer endorsement in favor of Contractor and Owner. Where Contractor uses leased employees with Workers’ Compensation insurance provided by a PEO or employee leasing company, Contractor is strictly prohibited from subletting any of its work without the express written agreement of Owner. Excess Liability Occurrence Basis) Amounts of coverage shall be no less than: 5,000,000 Each Occurrence 5,000,000 Annual Aggregate Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above. Drop-down coverage shall be provided for reduction and/or exhaustion of underlying aggregate limits and shall include a duty to defend any insured. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full contract value, including change orders, and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other insurance coverage available to the named insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non-contributing. The policy must provide coverage for: Insureds shall include Owner, General Contractor, all Loss Payees and Mortgagees, and subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Insureds. Such insurance shall cover: o all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; o all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) Builders Risk o Agreed Value o Damage arising from error, omission or deficiency in construction methods, design,specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse o Debris removal additional limit o Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage o Flood Included Included 1,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 located at the site; o all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; o all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; o all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and o other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. 3 o Freezing o Mechanical breakdown including hot & cold testing o Ordinance or law o Pollutant clean-up and removal o Preservation of property o Theft Deductible shall not exceed o All Risks of Direct Damage, Per Occurrence, except o Named Storm o Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage, Per Occurrence o Flood, Per Occurrence or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A or V Included Included 1,000,000 25,000 Included Included 10,000 2% subject to $50,000 minimum 100,000 100,000 The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for the Agreement Documents, until the earliest of: o the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; o occupancy, in whole or in part; o the date on which release of substantial completion is executed; or o the date on which the insurable interests of Contractor in the Covered Property has ceased. A waiver of subrogation provision shall be provided in favor of all insureds. 2. General Insurance Requirements A.Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: i.“ISO” means Insurance Services Office. ii.“Contractor” shall include subcontractors of any tier. iii.“Owner Parties” means (a) Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority (“Owner”), (b) the Project, (c) any lender whose loan is secured by a lien against the Work, (d) their respective shareholders, members, partners, joint venturers, affiliates, subsidiaries, successors and assigns, (e) Walker Partners, LLC, (f) any directors, officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (g) others as required by the Construction Documents. B.Policies. i.Contractor shall maintain such General Liability, Excess Liability, Professional and Pollution insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least two (2) years following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. ii.All policies must: a.Be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the State in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best’s Key Rating Guide at all times Work is to be performed. b.Provide a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by Contractor, whether required herein or not. c.Contain an endorsement providing for thirty (30) days prior written notice of cancellation to Owner. d.Be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. iii.Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor’s obligation to maintain such insurance. iv.Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 4 v.Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. C.Limits, Deductibles and Retentions i.The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and excess policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. ii.No deductible or self-insured retention shall exceed $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner, except as otherwise specified herein. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same D.Forms i.If the forms of policies, endorsements, certificates or evidence of insurance required by this Exhibit are superseded or discontinued, Owner will have the right to require other equivalent forms. ii.Any policy or endorsement form other than a form specified in this Exhibit must be approved in advance by Owner. E.Evidence of Insurance. Insurance must be evidenced as follows: i.ACORD Form 25 Certificate of Liability Insurance for liability coverages. ii.ACORD Form 28 Evidence of Commercial Property Insurance for property coverages. iii.Evidence shall be provided to Owner prior to commencing Work and prior to the expiration of any required coverage. iv.ACORD Forms specify: a.Owner as certificate holder at Owner’s mailing address; b.Insured’s name, which must match that on this Agreement; c.Insurance companies producing each coverage and the policy number and policy date of each coverage; d.Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number and have the signature of the authorized representative of the producer; e.Additional Insured status in favor of Owner Parties; f.Amount of any deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000; g.Designated Construction Project(s) General Aggregate Limit; h.Primary and non-contributory status; i.Waivers of subrogation; and j.All exclusions and limitations added by endorsement to the General Liability coverage. This can be achieved by attachment of the Schedule of Forms and Endorsements page. v.Copies of the following shall also be provided: a.General Liability Additional insured endorsement(s); b.General Liability Schedule of Forms and Endorsements page(s); and c.30 Day Notice of Cancellation endorsement applicable to all required policies. F.Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties i.It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein (a) represent Owner Parties’ minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor’s indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and (b) are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor’s liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Irrespective of the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, or the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall not be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. ii.Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, 5 the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor’s expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. iii.This Exhibit is an independent contract provision and shall survive the termination or expiration of the Construction Agreement. G. Insurance Requirements of Contractor’s Subcontractors i.Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. ii.The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor’s or its subcontractor’s property shall be the Contractor’s and its subcontractor’s sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. H.Use of the Owners Equipment The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owners equipment only with express written permission of the Owners designated representative and in accordance with the Owners terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owners equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. I.Release and Waiver The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. THE FOREGOING RELEASE AND WAIVER APPLY EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY THE FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF THE OWNER PARTIES. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER F : INSURER E : INSURER D : INSURER C : INSURER B : INSURER A : NAIC # NAME: CONTACT A/C, No): FAX E-MAILADDRESS: PRODUCER A/C, No, Ext): PHONE INSURED REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER:COVERAGES IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. OTHER: Per accident) Ea accident) N / A SUBR WVD ADDL INSD THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. PROPERTY DAMAGE BODILY INJURY (Per accident) BODILY INJURY (Per person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT AUTOS ONLY AUTOSAUTOSONLY NON-OWNED SCHEDULEDOWNED ANY AUTO AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y / N WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? Mandatory in NH) DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below If yes, describe under ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT EROTH-STATUTEPER LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP( MM/DD/YYYY) POLICYEFFPOLICYNUMBERTYPEOFINSURANCELTRINSR DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) EXCESS LIAB UMBRELLA LIAB $EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE OCCUR CLAIMS-MADE DED RETENTION $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG GENERAL AGGREGATE PERSONAL & ADV INJURY MED EXP (Any one person) EACH OCCURRENCE DAMAGE TO RENTED $ PREMISES (Ea occurrence) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO- JECT LOC CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CANCELLATION AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATE HOLDER The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD HIRED AUTOS ONLY 7/16/2024 Higginbotham Insurance Agency,Inc. 1221 South MoPac Expressway,Suite 160 Austin TX 78746 Larry Sue Dunn 817-336-2377 817-347-6981 ldunn@higginbotham.net Continental Casualty Company 20443 CONTPAN-01 Texas Mutual Insurance Company22945ControlPanelsUSA,Inc. 16310 Bratton Lane,Suite 100 Austin TX 78728 Transportation Insurance Company 20494 National Fire Ins Of Hartford 20478 The Continental Insurance Company 35289 Argonaut Insurance Company 19801 1935968245 C X 1,000,000 X 100,000 15,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 X X 7015150724 7/27/2023 7/27/2024 2,000,000 D 1,000,000 X X X 7015150741 7/27/2023 7/27/2024 E X X 3,000,00070151507387/27/2023 7/27/2024 3,000,000 X 10,000 B F X N 0002105597 928968790544 7/27/2023 7/27/2023 7/27/2024 7/27/2024 OS:ALabama 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 C A Manufacturers E&O(Professional) Installation Fltr/Store Materials 7015150724 7015319026 7/27/2023 7/27/2023 7/27/2024 7/27/2024 Each Occ $1,000,00 Limit/Ded Agg $1,000,000 2,000,000/$1,000 The General Liability and Automobile Liability policy includes a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement (for Ongoing and Completed Operations)that provides additional insured status and the General Liability,Automobile Liability and Workers'Compensation policy includes a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement to the certificate holder when written contract requires such status. The General Liability and Automobile Liability policy has a blanket Primary &Non Contributory endorsement that affords that coverage to certificate holders when written contract requires such status. The General Liability,Automobile Liability,and Workers'Compensation policy includes an endorsement providing that 30 days’notice of cancellation will be See Attached... Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority 221 E.Main Street Round Rock TX 78664 ACORD 101 (2008/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER:FORM TITLE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page of AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY CARRIER NAIC CODE POLICY NUMBER NAMED INSURED EFFECTIVE DATE: CONTPAN-01 1 1 Higginbotham Insurance Agency,Inc.Control Panels USA,Inc. 16310 Bratton Lane,Suite 100 Austin TX 78728 25 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE furnished to the certificate holder,10 days for non-payment of premiums. The Umbrella Policy is follow form over the General Liability,Automobile Liability and Workers Compensation. Project:Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority –Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Section 00900– Addendum Issued for Bid Page 1 of 1 ADDENDUM Notice to Proposers: This form, Addendum – Section 00900, is included for your information only. If an actual Addendum is issued for this project, the format shown below will be used. ADDENDUM No. ______ Date _________________________, ______ Project Name: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 This Addendum forms a part of the Contract and corrects or modifies original Bid Documents, dated April 19, 2024. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in space provided on bid form. Failure to do so may subject bidder to disqualification. A. Project Manual Revisions: B. Drawing Revisions: This addendum consists of ____ page(s)/sheet(s). Approved by ARCHITECT/ENGINEER END THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Point Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 10 00 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Contract description. 2. Work by Owner or other related Work. 3. Owner furnished products. 4. Contractor's use of site and premises. 5. Work sequence. 6. Operational requirements. 7. Owner occupancy. 8. Permits. 9. Specification conventions. 10. Reference specifications and standards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for general requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit a construction plan as specified herein. 1.3 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals required to make the Project complete and fully operable. 2. Test and place the completed Project in operation. 3. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in the Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project. B. Work includes furnishing of labor, materials, equipment, and services for modification of Brushy Creek Regional Utility Authority (BCRUA) Raw Water and Finished Water Delivery Points to the City of Leander. Work is generally described as follows: 1. City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point and Off-site Solenoid Valve - Minor mechanical improvements, electrical/instrumentation improvements, and synchronization of operation of the City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point plug valve located along the north ROW of FM 1431 between Buck Run and Trails End Road intersections and the Off-site Solenoid valve located adjacent to the Travisso Wastewater Treatment Plant and Treated Effluent Storage Pond along Durango Hills Dr. 2. City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point – Installation of electrical improvements, instrumentation/control improvements, and installation of electrical rack canopy on the BCRUA Water Treatment Plant Site delivering water to Leander’s water system. 3. City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point - Installation of instrumentation/control improvements and monitoring devices on/in existing infrastructure located at the northeast corner of Bagdad Rd and Kettering Dr intersection. BCRUA Delivery Point Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 10 00 - 2 4. Related minor civil, electrical, instrumentation, Ignition HMI programming, and other items necessary for a complete, operational project. C. The project includes Base Proposal items. Reference Section 01 21 00 for detailed descriptions of all Proposal Items. D. Construct the Work in accordance with the Proposal Items listed on the Proposal Form Section 00300), as generally described below. 1. Bonds, Mobilization, and Start-up. 2. Construction of all other Work. 3. Commissioning and Startup. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER OR OTHER RELATED WORK A. The existing WTP is currently in operation and deliveries, maintenance, etc. regularly occur. If any Owner awarded contracts interfere with each other due to work being performed at the same time or at the same site, Owner will determine the sequence of work for all contracts according to the Work Sequence and Contractor's Use of Site and Premises Articles in this Section. B. Contractor shall coordinate Work with utilities of Owner, and public or private agencies. C. Construction of the BCRUA Phase 1D WTP expansion will occur at the same time as the Delivery Points Improvements Project under a separate OWNER contract. The Phase 1D project is located at the existing BCRUA WTP and construction will not impact the City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point site. However, Contractor coordination may be required for access, deliveries, and start-up as specified and detailed in the contract documents. D. Construction of the BCRUA Phase 2 Raw Water Delivery System will occur at the same time as the Delivery Points Improvements Project under a separate OWNER contract. The Phase 2 project is primarily located on Lake Travis and construction will not impact the WTP site. However, Contractor coordination may be required for shutdowns and start-up as specified and detailed in the contract documents. 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS – NOT USED 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner in all construction operations to minimize conflicts and shutdowns and to facilitate continuous Owner usage. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas indicated on Drawings. C. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: Reference General Conditions Article 7.02. D. Construction Plan: Before start of construction, submit a construction plan regarding access to Work and use of site for acceptance by Owner. After acceptance of plan, construction operations shall comply with accepted plan unless deviations are accepted by Owner in writing. BCRUA Delivery Point Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 10 00 - 3 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases during construction period. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Engineer. 1. All work shall be substantially complete in accordance with the contractual time limits. B. Sequence of Construction Plan: Before start of construction, submit construction plan regarding phasing of construction and new Work for acceptance by Owner. The proposed work sequence shall be submitted to the Engineer with the Construction Progress Schedule see Section 01 32 16). After acceptance of plan, construction sequence shall comply with accepted plan unless deviations are accepted by Owner in writing. C. The Contractor shall organize and plan the construction activities to assure the safety and reliability of and to minimize the interruption to the existing delivery points and all other related utilities. D. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and make temporary modifications as necessary to keep the existing facilities in operation during the construction period. E. Contractor shall be solely responsible for all means and methods of construction. This general sequence is not intended as a scope of work and does not cover all Work required under the Contract. Neither Engineer nor Owner assumes responsibility regarding construction work by listing this general sequence of construction. Any potential conflicts or other issues related to this sequence shall be brought to the attention of Engineer and Owner during the pre- construction meeting. F. Except as specified otherwise herein, schedule work to ensure continuous operation of the existing delivery points and related necessary facilities. Notify Owner by advance written or verbal warning at least 30 days prior to any Work requiring temporary interruption to facility operations. Notify Owner again at least 48 hours prior to commencing such Work. Owner may require Contractor to delay work requiring facility disruption if the disruption would, in the Owner’s opinion, cause an unacceptable shortage of water supply. G. Connections to existing facilities which are in service shall be thoroughly planned in advance, and all required equipment, materials and labor shall be on hand at the time of the connection. Work shall proceed continuously (24-hour a day basis), if necessary, to complete connections in the minimum time. Work requests outside the normal working hours shall be coordinated in accordance with 00700 General Conditions 7.02.B.1. Operations of existing valves or appurtenances on existing utilities, when required, shall be by or under the direct supervision of the OWNER. H. Verify the location of all conflicting utilities and components prior to construction to minimize disruptions to existing facility operations. Contractor is responsible for buried utilities in the field. Any discrepancies with the Drawings found in the field shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Owner’s Representative and Engineer. I. Any existing utilities, fencing, structures, etc. that are damaged or removed as a result of construction work shall be repaired to like new condition or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. BCRUA Delivery Point Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 10 00 - 4 1.8 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. The existing WTP and delivery points are in operation. Construction operations shall be scheduled to allow the Owner uninterrupted operation of necessary existing facilities, except as specified herein. Contractor shall coordinate connections with existing facilities to ensure timely completion of interfaced items. B. At no time shall Contractor or its employees modify operation of existing facilities or start construction modifications without prior approval from the Owner, except in an emergency to prevent or minimize damage. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for planning and coordinating work, and for implementation of any temporary facilities required during construction. Selected construction activities, and operational requirements and shutdowns associated with such activities, are listed in the following subparagraphs. The Contractor shall provide a minimum 30-day notice to the Owner prior to any scheduled Delivery Point shutdown. 1. Shutdowns for improvements integration shall not be made until proposed improvements to be integrated are substantially complete and ready for full-scale operation, or unless the proposed improvements can be isolated (i.e., valved off) from existing process units after connection is made. 2. The Owner reserves the right to cancel, postpone or terminate scheduled process integration shutdowns if continuous water supply is determined necessary or if the shutdown is not completed within the allowable timeframe. 3. Electrical Integration: a. Electrical work related to the proposed Delivery Points Improvements may require temporary localized power outages to the Delivery Point site. Temporary outages to a Delivery Point shall be planned and scheduled such that power is not disrupted for more than two hours and shall be scheduled only at times approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall make good faith effort to schedule temporary power outages during periods when flows through delivery points can be temporarily interrupted. 1.9 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner shall be allowed to occupy sites during entire period of construction. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.10 PERMITS A. Furnish all necessary permits for construction of the Work. Reference General Conditions Article 7.08. 1.11 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS A. These Specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. The words "shall be" are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. BCRUA Delivery Point Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Summary of Work and Operational Requirements 01 10 00 - 5 1.12 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI or AWWA specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date proposals are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are considered minimum acceptable quality for all equipment, material and work. In instances where capacities, size or other feature of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet listed or shown capacities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 1 SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Allowances. B. Schedule of Values. C. Application for Payment. D. Change procedures. E. Nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. F. Unit prices & measurement. G. Partial payment for stored materials and equipment H. Alternates. I. Mobilization, traffic handling, and incidentals 1.2 ALLOWANCES – NOT USED 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule of Values on either EJCDC Form C-620 or on Contractor’s standard form to be approved by the Engineer. B. Submit Schedule of Values before starting construction as specified in Section 00700 – General Conditions. C. Format: Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major Specification Section. D. Include within each line item, direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for Payment. F. Upon request of Engineer, provide documentation to support the accuracy of the Schedule of Values. G. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. H. Schedule of Values shall be acceptable to Engineer prior to submission of the first Application for Payment. I. The summation of the Schedule of Values shall represent all Work under the Contract and shall equal the Contract Price. J. Unit Price Work: Reflect unit price quantity and price breakdown from conformed Proposal Form. K. Lump Sum Work: 1. Reflect in conformed Proposal Forms, specified allowances, alternates, and equipment selected by Owner, as applicable. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 2 2. List bonds and insurance premiums, preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment testing, facility startup, and contract closeout separately. 3. Break down by Division 2 through 49 with appropriate subdivision of each Specification. 1.4 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Attach a Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. B. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment on EJCDC C-620 - Contractor's Application for Payment or a Contractor’s electronic media driven form as approved by the Engineer. C. Content and Format: Use accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump sum Work, the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit priced basis, a listing of Owner-selected equipment, if applicable, and allowances as appropriate for listing items in Application for Payment. D. Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as requested by Engineer. E. Submit revised and current construction progress schedule as specified in Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. G. Submit pay applications with transmittal letter as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. H. Substantiating Data: When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment: 1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 2. Record Documents as specified in Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements, for review by Owner, which will be returned to Contractor. 3. Supporting documentation as specified in Section 00700 – General Conditions for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored at the Site or another location. 1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Submittals: Submit name of individual who is authorized to receive change documents and is responsible for informing others in Contractor’s employment or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and installation of Work. Promptly advise Engineer of any error, inconsistency, omission, or apparent discrepancy. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 3 C. Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on EJCDC C-942 – Field Order. D. Engineer may issue Change Proposal Request including a detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and with the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within 10 calendar days. E. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a Change Proposal Request for change to Engineer, describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing reason for the change and the effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing effect on the Work by separate or other Contractors. Document requested substitutions according to Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures. F. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Change Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as recommended by Engineer and approved by Owner. G. Unit Price Change Order: For Contract unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of that which are not predetermined, execute Work under Work Directive Change. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. H. Work Directive Change: Engineer may issue directive, on EJCDC C-940 - Work Change Directive signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change. I. Document each quotation for change in Project Cost or Time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. J. Change Order Forms: EJCDC C-941 - Change Order or as approved by Engineer. K. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract. L. Correlation of Contractor Submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price. 2. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of Work affected by the change, and resubmit. 3. Promptly enter changes in Record Documents. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 4 1.6 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT AND NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. Reference Section 00700 – General Conditions for additional requirements for defective Work. B. If, in the opinion of Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Engineer will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment. 1. When the defective Work is deemed to remain, the unit price will be adjusted to new price at discretion of Engineer and Owner. C. Individual Specification Sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction. D. Authority of Engineer and Owner to assess defects and identify payment adjustments is final. E. Nonpayment for Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following reasons: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable under the Contract Documents. 2. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reason of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of Contract Documents. 3. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 4. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Products placed beyond lines and levels of the required Work. 6. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 7. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 1.7 UNIT PRICES AND MEASUREMENT A. Authority: Measurement methods are described in individual Specification Sections. B. Measurement methods delineated in individual Specification Sections complement criteria of this Section. In event of conflict, requirements of individual Specification Section govern. C. Take measurements and compute quantities. Engineer will verify measurements and quantities. D. Unit Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated on Proposal Form are for Contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided shall determine payment. 1. When actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide required quantities at contracted unit sum/prices. 2. When actual Work requires 25 percent or greater change in quantity than those quantities indicated, Owner or Contractor may claim a Contract Price adjustment. E. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant and facilities, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application, or installation of item of the Work; overhead and profit. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 5 F. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on basis of actual measurements and quantities accepted by Engineer multiplied by unit price for Work incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. A final Change Order will be executed to adjust the contract amount accordingly. G. Measurement of Quantities: 1. Weighing, measuring, and metering devices used to measure quantity of material for Work shall be suitable for purpose intended and conform to tolerances and specifications as specified in National Institute of Standards and Technology, Handbook 44. 2. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 3. Measurement by Area: Measured horizontally by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. 4. Linear Measurement: Measured horizontally by linear dimension, at item centerline or mean chord. 5. Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as completed item or unit of the Work. 6. Whenever pay quantities of material are determined by weight, material shall be weighed on scaled furnished by Contractor and certified accurate by state agency responsible. Weight or load slip shall be obtained from weigher and delivered to Owner’s representative at point of delivery of material. 7. If material is shipped by rail, car weights will be accepted provided that actual weight of material only will be paid for and not minimum car weight used for assessing freight tariff, and provided further that car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. 8. Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily and at such additional times as required by Engineer. Each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. 9. Materials that are specified for measurement by the cubic yard measured in the vehicle shall be hauled in vehicles of such type and size that actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform capacity, each vehicle must bear a plainly legible identification mark indicating its water level capacity. Vehicles shall be loaded to at least their water level capacity. Loads hauled in vehicles not meeting above requirements or loads of a quantity less than the capacity of the vehicle, measured after being level off as above provided, will be subject to rejection, and no compensation will be allowed for such material. 10. Where measurement of quantities depends on elevation of existing ground, elevations obtained during construction will be compared with those shown on Drawings. Variations of 1 foot or less will be ignored, and profiles shown on Drawings will be used for determining quantities. 11. Units of measure shown on Schedule of Values shall be as follows, unless specified otherwise. Item Method of Measurement AC Acre – Field Measure by Engineer CY Cubic Yard – Field Measure by Engineer within limits specified or shown CY-VM Cubic Yard – Measured in Vehicle by Volume BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 6 EA Each – Field Count by Engineer GAL Gallon – Field Measure by Engineer HR Hour LB Pound(s) – Weight Measure by Scale LF Linear Foot – Field Measured by Engineer MFBM Thousand Foot Board Measure – Delivery Invoice SF Square Foot SY Square Yard TON Ton – Weight Measure by Scale (2,000 pounds) 12. Measurement of Linear Items: Where payment will be made based on linear quantities and on parameters other than length, those parameters shall be as follows: Item Measurement Parameters Trench Safety System Depth of Trench: 0 to 4 feet; 4 to 10 feet; over 10 feet in 2-foot increments. The depth of trench will be measured at intervals of 25 feet along the centerline of the trench. The depth of each measuring point will be the depth from existing at grade surface to bottom of pipe base, 6 inches below pipe invert and will used for computing the depth of trench for a distance of 25 feet ahead of the point of measurement. The depth figures indicated in Schedule of Values are inclusive to nearest 0.1 foot; that is, a trench depth measured as 11.9 feet will be paid for at the unit price for excavation 10 to 12 feet deep. A trench depth measured as 12 feet will be paid for at the unit price excavation 12 to 14 feet deep. Unclassified Trench Excavation Depth of Trench: Same as Trench Safety System above. Trench Backfill and Compaction Depth of Trench: Same as Unclassified Trench Excavation above. 1.8 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Partial Payment: Partial payments will be made for materials and equipment delivered or stored when Shop Drawings and preliminary operation and maintenance data is acceptable to Engineer. B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in Work; remaining products, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 7 1.9 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Proposal Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.10 MOBILIZATION, TRAFFIC HANDLING, AND INCIDENTALS A. As specified in Section 01 21 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 1 SECTION 01 21 00 – PROPOSAL ITEMS: SCOPE OF WORK (Reissued by AD-02) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. A description of the work included with each Proposal Item. 2. Basis of Measurement for each Proposal Item. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 – Proposal Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 – General Requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Base Proposal Items refers to those Proposal items that will be included in the contract without exception. B. Allowance refers to those items for which the cost of materials or services is established and identified on the Proposal Form. Allowances are included in the Base Proposal. 1. See Section 01 20 00 for Allowance requirements. C. Alternate Proposal Items refers to those Proposal Items that will be included in the contract at the Owner’s discretion during the period of the contract, except as noted herein. A Proposal for an Alternate Proposal Item is the amount stated in the Proposal Form and identified below if an Alternate Proposal Item is accepted. It is expressly understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Alternates and may select Alternates regardless of order in the Proposal Form. If any Alternates are accepted, they will be added to the Total Base Proposal. Includes Additive Alternate Proposal Items. D. Cost refers to the total cost to the Owner for the work described, including all direct and indirect costs borne by the Contractor in conjunction with the work described, plus Contractor’s overhead and profit associated with the work described. 1. In the case of Allowances, Cost refers to the direct cost to the Contractor of the materials or services described and shall be equal to the stated Allowance. Cost shall exclude indirect costs borne by the Contractor and Contractor overhead and profit. 1.3 BASE PROPOSAL ITEMS A. Proposal Item 1: Bonds, Insurance, Mobilization, and Demobilization. 1. Work Included: Provision of acceptable Contract Documents, bonds, insurance, and placement in field and transportation of Contractor’s equipment to the project sites. Mobilization will be paid 25 percent upon submission of first pay application, proof of paid bonds and insurance, and initial field investigation. 50 percent will be paid upon mobilization of crews and equipment to any of the project worksites. The remaining 25 percent will be paid upon substantial completion of the project and delivery of the Maintenance Bond to the Owner. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. Shall not exceed 5 percent of total Proposal price. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 2 B. Proposal Item 2: Silt Fence Erosion Control 1. Work Included: Installation, maintenance and removal of silt fence around perimeter of work area as detailed in the plans. 2. Measurement: Linear Feet. C. Proposal Item 3: Revegetate Disturbed Areas 1. Work Included: Seeding, placing topsoil, grading topsoil, watering, and revegetating disturbed areas in accordance with specifications as a result of the project. 2. Measurement: Square Foot. D. Proposal Item 4: BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point - Control Valve and Meter Vault Improvements 1. Work Included: a. Modification of existing Beck electric motor actuator to function with proposed control system described in the contract documents. b. Additional conduit installation between valve and meter vaults as detailed in Plans. c. Add vault flood floats to the control valve and meter vaults located at the Raw Water Delivery Point. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. E. Proposal Item 5: BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point - Demolition of Radio Tower and Existing Control Panels 1. Work Included: Demolition of 40’ radio tower, appurtenances, and existing control panels. Salvage equipment as directed by Owner and disposal of remaining materials in accordance with specifications. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. F. Proposal Item 6: BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point - BCRUA Control System, Power Supply, and Communications Equipment Improvements. 1. Work Included: a. Replace control system components internal to the existing BCRUA control cabinet. b. Modification of BCRUA control cabinet to include pushbuttons, switches, indicator lights, and OIT. c. Relocate existing BCRUA control cabinet. d. Reroute existing underground conduits at the electrical rack to the BCRUA control cabinet. e. Configuration of communications equipment in accordance with plans and specifications. f. Programming of Master PLC for coordinated operations with the downstream solenoid valve site. Master PLC is an Opto 22 Groov Epic PR2 located at the BCRUA EST, as installed in Phase 1 of the project. g. Replace control system discrete, analog, and flow meter cables. h. Field replace the existing AC Power Supply Board with a new 24VDC Power Supply Board in the flow transmitter. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. G. Proposal Item 7: City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point - Fall-of-Potential Testing of Electrical Grounding System. 1. Work Included: Fall-of-Potential testing of the electrical grounding system. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 3 H. Proposal Item 8: BCRUA-City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point – Grounding System Improvements. 1. Work Included: Grounding system improvements at the Leander Raw Water Delivery Point in accordance with details. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. I. Proposal Item 9: BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve – Modifications in Existing Solenoid Valve Vault. 1. Work Included: a. Removal of existing pressure switch and installation of new pressure indicating transmitter, including new tapping saddle and appurtenances in accordance with plans and specifications. b. Modification of the existing solenoid valve to add open and close limit switches. c. Replacement of the 120VAC valve solenoid with a 24 VDC solenoid. d. Replacing LFMC with rigid aluminum conduit in the existing valve vault. e. Rewiring the existing 120VAC control circuit to be a 120VAC constant power circuit. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. J. Proposal Item 10: BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve - New Wall Mounted Control Panel Improvements. 1. Work Included: a. Installation of a new wall mounted Control Panel. b. Programming a new OIT in the new Control Panel. c. Adding new conduits between the existing valve vault and new control panel, including trenching and backfill. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. K. Proposal Item 11: BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve - New Wall Mounted Shade Awning over new Control Panel, Complete and In Place. 1. Work Included: Installation of a new wall mounted shade awning over the new Control Panel including all hardware and appurtenances as detailed in the plans, complete and in place. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. L. Proposal Item 12: BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve - Modification of PLC Programming at Adjacent Leander WWTP to Remove Solenoid Valve Controls. 1. Work Included: Modification of PLC programming at the adjacent Leander Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) to remove solenoid valve controls. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. M. Proposal Item 13: City of Leander Solenoid Valve - Fall-of-Potential Testing of Electrical Grounding System. 1. Work Included: Fall-of-Potential testing of the electrical grounding system. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 4 N. Proposal Item 14: BCRUA-City of Leander Solenoid Valve - Grounding System Improvements. 1. Work Included: Grounding system improvements at the Solenoid Valve site in accordance with details. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. O. Proposal Item 15: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point - New Canopy over Existing Electrical/Control Panel Rack, Complete and In Place. 1. Work Included: Installation of new canopy over existing electrical/control panel rack, including excavation, reinforcement, concrete, materials, and assembly of canopy structure, complete and in place. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. P. Proposal Item 16: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point – Existing Motorized Valve Actuator Improvements. 1. Work Included: a. The reuse or replacement of instrumentation and control cables form the existing valve vault to the control panel. b. Connection of the new controls to the existing Limitorque valve motor operator. c. Update programming of existing Limitorque motorized valve actuator for compatibility with new control panel design. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. Q. Proposal Item 17: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point - BCRUA Travisso Control Cabinet Improvements and Programming. 1. Work Included: a. Removal of the back plane and all components within the existing control cabinet. b. Provision of a new back plane with new control components to be fit within the existing control cabinet. c. Programming of a new OIT in the Control Panel. d. Programming new Opto 22 Groov Rio for existing motor operated valve control. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. R. Proposal Item 18: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point – BCRUA EST Control Panel Improvements and Programming. 1. Work Included: a. Updating programming in the existing Opto 22 Groov Epic located in the BCRUA Elevated Storage Tank (EST) pedestal/enclosure. b. Removal of the existing Leander Data Concentrator PLC. Salvage and retain as directed by Owner. c. Addition of a 4-channel analog input card in the existing Opto 22 Groov Epic to receive existing analog signal from 3 flow meters. Extension or replacement of the analog signal cables is required. d. Modification of BCRUA MQTT brokers to send/receive tags for this site. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. S. Proposal Item 19: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point – Fall-of-Potential Testing of Electrical Grounding System. 1. Work Included: Fall-of-Potential testing of the electrical grounding system. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 5 T. Proposal Item 20: BCRUA-City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point - Grounding System Improvements. 1. Work Included: Grounding system improvements at the Travisso Delivery Point in accordance with details. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. U. Proposal Item 21: BCRUA-City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point - Control Panel Components, Power Supply, Communications, and Programming Improvements. 1. Work Included: a. Addition of an Opto 22 Groov Rio to the existing BCRUA control panel configured for Allen Bradley ethernet/IP to MQTT tag translation. b. Addition of new power supply, DC UPS, and battery to the existing BCRUA control panel. c. Modifications to the 24VDC power distribution within the existing BCRUA control panel. d. Replacement and rewiring of one (1) Allen Bradley discrete I/O module. e. Replacement of an existing Allen Bradley 120VAC power supply with a new 24VCD Power Supply. f. Provision of new cellular modem antennas mounted to the exterior of the control panel and addition of antenna lighting protection. g. Modification of the existing panel PC to display any new tags being received via MQTT. h. Addition of permissions on the BCRUA primary and secondary brokers so that the City of Leander can publish a flow rate set point for this site and subscribe to select data including flow rate, valve status, and chlorine residual. i. Update PLC programming for hard coded flow rate limit and distributed flow totals limit. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. V. Proposal Item 22: BCRUA-City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point - Fall-of-Potential Testing of Electrical Grounding System. 1. Work Included: Fall-of-Potential testing of the electrical grounding system. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. W. Proposal Item 23: BCRUA-City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point - Grounding System Improvements. 1. Work Included: Grounding system improvements at the Bagdad Delivery Point in accordance with details. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. X. Proposal Item 24: BCRUA Ignition HMI Reprogramming, Graphics Updates, and Alarm Updates. 1. Work Included: a. Raw Water Delivery Point – Modification of BCRUA Ignition HMI to send/receive MQTT tags for the site. b. Raw Water Delivery Point – Updates to the BCRUA HMI graphics and alarms for the site. c. Travisso Delivery Point – Updates to the BCRUA HMI graphics and alarms for the site. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid (Reissued by AD-02) Proposal Items: Scope of Work 01 21 00 - 6 d. Travisso Delivery Point – Modification of BCRUA Historian to remove obsolete tags and addition of new tags for the site. e. Bagdad Delivery Point – Modification to BCRUA WTP HMI to substitute MQTT tags for existing Allen Bradley ethernet/IP tags. f. Bagdad Delivery Point – Graphics updates to the BCRUA Ignition HMI for additional discrete signals and alarms for the site. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. Y. Proposal Item 25: Leander Ignition HMI Reprogramming, Graphics Updates, and Alarm Updates. 1. Work Included: a. Raw Water Delivery Point – Modification of Leander Ignition HMI to send/receive MQTT tags for the site. b. Raw Water Delivery Point – Removal of obsolete raw water delivery point tags from Leander Ignition historian for the site. c. Raw Water Delivery Point – Updates to Leander HMI graphics and alarms. d. Raw Water Solenoid Valve Site – Modification of Leander Ignition HMI to send/receive MQTT tags for the site. e. Raw Water Solenoid Valve Site – Removal of obsolete solenoid valve tags from Leander Ignition historian for the site. f. Raw Water Solenoid Valve Site – Updates to Leander HMI graphics and alarms for the site. g. Travisso Delivery Point – Modification of Leander HMI to send/receive MQTT tags for the site. h. Travisso Delivery Point – Removal of obsolete tags from Leander Ignition historian and addition of new tags for the site. i. Travisso Delivery Point – Updates to Leander HMI graphics and alarms for the site. j. Bagdad Delivery Point – Graphics updates to the Leander Ignition HMI for additional discrete signals and alarms. 2. Measurement: Lump Sum. 1.4 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE PROPOSAL ITEMS – Not used. 1.5 REFERENCES – Not used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE – Not used. PART 2 PRODUCTS – Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION – Not used. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1 SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Product options. C. Product substitution procedures. D. Installer substitution procedures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contract is based on products and standards established in Contract Documents without consideration of proposed substitutions. B. Products specified define standard of quality, type, function, dimension, appearance, and performance required. C. Substitution Proposals: Permitted for specified products except where specified otherwise. Do not substitute products unless substitution has been accepted and approved in writing by Owner. 1.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 1.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data, substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents, including: 1. Manufacturer's name and address, product, trade name, model, or catalog number, performance and test data, and reference standards. 2. Itemized point-by-point comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations in quality, performance, and other pertinent characteristics. 3. Reference to Article and Paragraph numbers in Specification Section. 4. Cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product and amount of net change to Contract Sum. 5. Schedule data describing changes in construction schedule. 6. Product experience including location of history of past projects utilizing product and name and telephone number of persons associated with reference projects. 7. Changes required in other Work. 8. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement parts as applicable. 9. Certified test data to show compliance with performance characteristics specified. 10. Samples when applicable or requested. 11. Other information as necessary to assist Architect/Engineer's evaluation. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 2 C. A request constitutes a representation that Proposer or Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product. 2. Will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will coordinate installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 6. Will reimburse Owner and Engineer for review or redesign services associated with reapproval by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals without separate written request or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents. E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit requests for substitutions in writing in accordance with the requirements of this specification section. 2. Submit electronic files of Request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 3. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on Proposer or Contractor. 4. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 5. Provisions of General Conditions will apply in the event the substitution is approved and results in a change of Contract Sum or schedule. 6. Substitution will be rejected if, in the Engineer’s opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the original design, or the substitution will not adequately perform the intended function. 1.5 INSTALLER SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Document each request with: 1. Installer's qualifications. 2. Installer's experience in work similar to that specified. 3. Other information as necessary to assist Architect/Engineer's evaluation. B. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit electronic files of Request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 1 SECTION 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination and Project conditions. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Site mobilization meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Closeout meeting. G. Alteration procedures. 1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate Work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing operating equipment in service. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit as closely as practical; place runs parallel with lines of building. Use spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. Coordinate interruptions of all utilities and services. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable utility company or agency involved. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. G. After Owner's occupancy of premises, coordinate access to Site for correction of defective Work and Work not complying with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Engineer will schedule and preside over meeting after the Agreement has been executed and all bonds and insurance are in affect for the project and before any Work is started. B. The preconstruction meeting will be held at a location selected by the Engineer. C. Attendance Required: Engineer, Owner, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 2 D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Lines of communication and chain of command. 5. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and Progress Schedule. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Application for payment procedures including date for monthly submission of the Application for payment. 8. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract and Engineer. 9. Procedures and processing of requests for interpretations, field decisions, submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payments, change proposal requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 10. Project Safety. 11. Permits. 12. Scheduling activities of Contractor including sequencing of critical path Work. 13. Procedures of testing. 14. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 15. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 16. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at monthly intervals, or at intervals agreed upon by Engineer and Contractor. B. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside over meetings. C. Attendance Required: Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, and Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittal schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of Progress Schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on Progress Schedule and coordination. 13. Review of progress payments. 14. Other business relating to Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 3 E. Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning contains requirements for Commissioning Meetings. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual Specification Sections, convene preinstallation meetings at Project Site before starting Work of specific Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific Section. C. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside over meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related Work. 1.6 CLOSEOUT MEETING A. Schedule Project closeout meeting with sufficient time to prepare for requesting Substantial Completion. Preside over meeting and be responsible for minutes. B. Attendance Required: Contractor, Engineer, Owner, and others appropriate to agenda. C. Notify Engineer ten days in advance of meeting date. D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Start-up of facilities and systems. 2. Operations and maintenance manuals. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 4. System demonstration and observation. 5. Operation and maintenance instructions for Owner's personnel. 6. Contractor's inspection of Work. 7. Contractor's preparation of an initial "punch list." 8. Procedure to request Engineer inspection to determine date of Substantial Completion. 9. Completion time for correcting deficiencies. 10. Inspections by authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Certificate of Occupancy and transfer of insurance responsibilities. 12. Partial release of retainage. 13. Final cleaning. 14. Preparation for final inspection. 15. Closeout Submittals: a. Project record documents. b. Operating and maintenance documents. c. Operating and maintenance materials. d. Affidavits. 16. Final Application for Payment. 17. Contractor's demobilization of site. 18. Maintenance. 19. Asset management and warranty information. 20. Spare parts. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ALTERATION PROCEDURES A. Entire facility will be occupied for normal operations during progress of construction. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to permit continuous usage. 1. Perform Work not to interfere with operations of occupied areas. 2. Keep utility and service outages to a minimum and perform only after written approval of Owner. a. See section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work and Operational Requirements. 3. Clean Owner-occupied areas daily. Clean spillage, overspray, and heavy collection of dust in Owner-occupied areas immediately. B. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products with new products for patching and extending Work. C. Employ original and/or skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration and renovation Work. D. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. Comply with Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements E. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. F. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. G. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new Work and finishes. H. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing Work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. I. Remove, cut, and patch Work to minimize damage and to permit restoring products and finishes to original or specified condition. J. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes. K. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing Work, provide smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. L. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submit recommendation to Engineer for review. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 5 M. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing smooth transition to Engineer for review. N. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. O. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 1 SECTION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Quality assurance. C. Network analysis schedules. D. Bar chart schedules. E. Review and evaluation. F. Updating schedules. G. Distribution. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed preliminary bar chart schedule within 10 days after effective date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, Preliminary schedule shall define planned operations for first 60 days of Work, with general outline for remainder of Work. B. Participate in review of preliminary bar chart schedule jointly with Engineer. C. Within 20 days after joint review of proposed preliminary bar chart schedule, submit draft of proposed complete Critical Path Method (CPM) network diagram for review. Include written certification that major Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Participate in review of complete network diagram jointly with Engineer. E. Within 10 days after joint review of complete network diagram, submit updated and complete network analysis consisting of network diagrams and mathematical analyses. F. Submit updated network schedules with each Application for Payment. G. Submit PDF electronic file and raw data file of project schedule in Microsoft Project format. H. Submit network schedules under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures. I. Schedule Updates: 1. Overall percent complete, projected and actual. 2. Completion progress by listed activity and sub-activity, to within five working days prior to submittal. 3. Changes in Work scope and activities modified since submittal. 4. Delays in submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work. 5. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work. 6. Other identifiable changes. 7. Revised projections of progress and completion. J. Narrative Progress Report: 1. Submit with each monthly submission of Progress Schedule. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 2 2. Summary of Work completed during the past period between reports. 3. Work planned during the next period. 4. Explanation of differences between summary of Work completed and Work planned in previously submitted report. 5. Current and anticipated delaying factors and estimated impact on other activities and completion milestones. 6. Corrective action taken or proposed. K. Provide bar chart type schedule at each construction progress meeting, which details schedule for upcoming month. L. Provide Commissioning Schedule specified in Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel specializing in CPM scheduling with two years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work of complexity comparable to the Project and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request. B. Contractor’s Administrative Personnel: two years' minimum experience in using and monitoring CPM schedules on comparable Projects. 1.4 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES A. Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using CPM. The schedule requirement herein is the minimum required. Contactor may prepare a more sophisticated schedule if it will aid in execution and timely completion of Work. B. Format: 1. Listings: Reading from left to right, in ascending order for each activity. Identify each activity with applicable Specification Section number. 2. Diagram Sheet Size: 11 inches high x 17 inches wide. 3. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. 4. Use Microsoft Project latest version or equivalent scheduling software. 5. Critical path shall be clearly shown on the schedule. C. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of Work; how start of given activity depends on completion of preceding activities, and how completion of activity may restrain start of subsequent activities. D. Illustrate complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages. Indicate dates for submittals, including dates for Owner-furnished items, and return of submittals; dates for procurement and delivery of critical products; proposed dates for facility shutdowns, and dates for installation and provision for testing. Include legend for symbols and abbreviations used. E. Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams using calendar dates, and identify for each activity: 1. Preceding and following event numbers. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 3 2. Activity description. 3. Estimated duration of activity, in maximum 30-day intervals. Status of critical activities. 4. Earliest start date. 5. Earliest finish date. 6. Actual start date. 7. Actual finish date. 8. Latest start date. 9. Latest finish date. 10. Total and free float; accrue float time to Owner and to Owner's benefit. 11. Monetary value of activity, keyed to Schedule of Values. 12. Percentage of activity completed. 13. Responsibility. F. Analysis Program: Capable of compiling monetary value of completed and partially completed activities, of accepting revised completion dates, and of recomputing of scheduled dates and float. G. Required Sorts: List activities in sorts or groups: 1. By preceding Work item or event number from lowest to highest. 2. By longest float, then in order of early start. 3. By responsibility in order of earliest possible start date. 4. In order of latest allowable start dates. 5. In order of latest allowable finish dates. 6. Contractor's periodic payment request sorted by Schedule of Values list. 7. List of basic input data-generating report. 8. List of activities on critical path. H. Prepare sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01 10 00. I. Coordinate contents with Schedule of Values in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.5 BAR CHART SCHEDULES A. Format: Bar chart Schedule, to include at least: 1. Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities reasonably required to complete the Work, including: a. Subcontract Work. b. Major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates including required lead times. c. Move-in and other preliminary activities. d. Equipment and equipment system test and startup activities. e. Project closeout and cleanup. f. Work sequences, constraints, and milestones. 2. Listings identified by Specification Section number. 3. Identification of the following: a. Horizontal time frame by year, month, and week. b. Duration, early start, and completion for each activity and sub-activity. c. Critical activities and Project float. d. Sub-schedules to further define critical portions of Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 4 1.6 REVIEW AND EVALUATION A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedules with Engineer at each submittal. B. Evaluate Project status to determine Work behind schedule and Work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise schedules incorporating results of review, and resubmit within 10 days. D. Contractor shall submit a written statement as to how Contractor intends to correct nonperformance and return to the acceptable construction schedule if Contractor fails to accomplish work according to the schedule. Contractor may require increased work forces, extra equipment, extra shifts or other action as necessary. Actions taken by Contractor to complete Work within Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be justification for adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Times. 1.7 UPDATING SCHEDULES A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. Update schedules to depict current status of Work. C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. D. Upon approval of a Change Order, include the change in the next schedule submittal. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit sorts as required to support recommended changes. G. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including effects of changes on schedules of separate Contractors. 1.8 DISTRIBUTION A. Following joint review, distribute copies of updated schedules to Subcontractors, suppliers, Engineer, Owner, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed product list. D. Product data. E. Use of electronic CAD files of Project Drawings. F. Shop Drawings. G. Samples. H. Design data. I. Test reports. J. Certificates. K. Manufacturer's instructions. L. Manufacturer's field reports. M. Erection Drawings. N. Contractor review. O. Engineer review. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submittals shall be directly from the Contractor. Submittals from others (i.e., suppliers or subcontractors) shall not be accepted. B. Transmit each submittal on an Engineer accepted form. C. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised submittals with original number followed by a “.” and sequential numeric suffix. 1. Example resubmittal for shop drawing: SD-001.1. D. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 2 E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to Engineer at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. I. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Engineer review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. M. Incomplete Submittals: Engineer will not review. Complete submittals for each item are required. Delays resulting from incomplete submittals are not the responsibility of Engineer. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Comply with Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule 1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCT LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, indicate manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data: Action Submittal: Submit to Engineer for review for assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Submit electronic submittals to Engineer via email as PDF electronic files. C. Identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 3 E. After review, distribute according to "Submittal Procedures" Article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.6 ELECTRONIC CAD FILES OF PROJECT DRAWINGS A. Electronic CAD Files of Project Drawings: May only be used to expedite production of Shop Drawings for the Project. Use for other Projects or purposes is not allowed. B. Electronic CAD Files of Project Drawings: Distributed only under the following conditions: 1. Use of files is solely at receiver's risk. Engineer does not warrant accuracy of files. Receiving files in electronic form does not relieve receiver of responsibilities for measurements, dimensions, and quantities set forth in Contract Documents. In the event of ambiguity, discrepancy, or conflict between information on electronic media and that in Contract Documents, notify Engineer of discrepancy and use information in hard-copy Drawings and Specifications. 2. CAD files do not necessarily represent the latest Contract Documents, existing conditions, and as-built conditions. Receiver is responsible for determining and complying with these conditions and for incorporating addenda and modifications. 3. User is responsible for removing information not normally provided on Shop Drawings and removing references to Contract Documents. Shop Drawings submitted with information associated with other trades or with references to Contract Documents will not be reviewed and will be immediately returned. 4. Receiver shall not hold Engineer responsible for data or file clean-up required to make files usable, nor for error or malfunction in translation, interpretation, or use of this electronic information. 5. Receiver shall understand that even though Engineer has computer virus scanning software to detect presence of computer viruses, there is no guarantee that computer viruses are not present in files or in electronic media. 6. Receiver shall not hold Engineer responsible for such viruses or their consequences, and shall hold Engineer harmless against costs, losses, or damage caused by presence of computer virus in files or media. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Action Submittal: Submit to Engineer for assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Submit information as specified in individual specifications including but not limited to the following: 1. Details, sizes, and dimensions. 2. Identification of equipment, product, and material use. 3. Clear identification of the exact item, model or materials to be provided. 4. Demonstrate compliance with specified standards. 5. Indication of deviations from the Contract Documents and justify said deviation in detail in a separate letter. 6. Custom prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings 7. Scheduled information. 8. Setting diagrams. 9. Actual shopwork manufacturing instructions. 10. Custom templates. 11. Special wiring diagrams. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 4 12. Coordination drawings. 13. Individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and certifications. 14. Identify and Indicate: a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units and assemblies, and system or equipment identification or tag numbers. b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on Drawings. c. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical features of Work. Note dimensions established by field measurement. d. Project-specific information drawn accurately to scale. 15. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows: a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 16. Details including relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure and field measurements when correct fabrication of the Work depends upon such measurements. B. Separate and submit shop drawings by individual Specification Section, work item, pipe system, etc. Do not submit multiple, unrelated items in the same shop drawing. C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. When required by individual Specification Sections, provide Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a professional Engineer responsible for designing components shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Include signed and sealed calculations to support design. 2. Submit Shop Drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and approval by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Submit electronic Shop Drawings to Engineer as PDF electronic files. F. After review, distribute according to "Submittal Procedures" Article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.8 SAMPLES A. Samples: Action Submittal: Submit to Engineer for assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Samples for Selection as Specified in Product Sections: 1. Submit to Engineer for aesthetic, color, and finish selection. 2. Submit Samples of finishes, textures, and patterns for Engineer selection. C. Submit Samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate Sample submittals for interfacing work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 5 D. Include identification on each Sample, with full Project information. E. Submit number of Samples specified in individual Specification Sections; Engineer will retain one Sample. F. Reviewed Samples that may be used in the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in Specification Section. H. After review, produce copies and distribute according to "Submittal Procedures" Article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.9 DESIGN DATA A. Submit to Engineer’s knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit to Engineer for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.10 TEST REPORTS A. Informational Submittal: Submit reports for Engineer’s knowledge as Contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit test reports to Engineer for information for assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.11 CERTIFICATES A. Informational Submittal: When specified in Technical Specifications, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application Subcontractor, or Contractor to Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: 1. When specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed in full, signed by the entity supplying the product, material, or service, and submitted prior to shipment of product or material or the execution of the services. 2. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but must be acceptable to Engineer. C. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: 1. When specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by the equipment manufacturer’s representative. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 6 2. Such form shall certify that the signing party is a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, is empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment is complete and operational. D. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Completion of Field Services: 1. When specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Completion of Field Services form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by the equipment manufacturer’s representative. 2. Such form shall certify that the signing party is a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, is empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Informational Submittal: When specified in Technical Specifications, submit manufacturer's installation instructions to Engineer for informational purposes. B. Submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, and finishing, to Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. C. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Informational Submittal: Submit reports for Engineer's knowledge as Contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report in duplicate within three days of observation to Engineer for information. C. Submit reports for information for limited purposes of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.14 ERECTION DRAWINGS A. Informational Submittal: Submit Drawings for Engineer's benefit as Contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit Drawings to Engineer for information assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Engineer or Owner. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 7 1.15 CONTRACTOR REVIEW A. Review for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals before transmitting to Engineer. B. Contractor: Responsible for: 1. Determination and verification of materials including manufacturer's catalog numbers. 2. Determination and verification of field measurements and field construction criteria. 3. Checking and coordinating information in submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Determination of accuracy and completeness of dimensions and quantities. 5. Confirmation and coordination of dimensions and field conditions at Site. 6. Construction means, techniques, sequences, and procedures. 7. Safety precautions. 8. Coordination and performance of Work of all trades. C. Stamp, sign or initial, and date each submittal to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. D. Do not fabricate products or begin Work for which submittals are required until approved submittals have been received from Engineer. 1.16 ENGINEER REVIEW A. Engineer will review each submittal and return with one of the following Status/Action responses for shop drawings: 1. Status: a. “Approved” authorizes Contractor to proceed with the work provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. b. “Approved as Noted” authorizes Contractor to proceed with the work provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. “Not Approved” does not allow the work to proceed and requires revision and resubmittal according to the notations or corrections. d. “Cancelled or Void” does not allow the work to proceed and cancels the submittal. e. “Returned without Review” is for submittals required for informational or record purposes where Engineer’s review is not required. 2. Action: a. “Revise and Resubmit” triggers resubmittal from Contractor. b. “Additional Information Required” triggers resubmittal from Contractor. c. “No Action Required”. d. “Cancelled or Void”. e. “Final Distribution” finalizes the submittal. B. Do not make "mass submittals" to Engineer. "Mass submittals" are defined as six or more submittals or items in one day or 15 or more submittals or items in one week. If "mass submittals" are received, Engineer's review time stated above will be extended as necessary to perform proper review. Engineer will review "mass submittals" based on priority determined by Engineer after consultation with Owner. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 8 C. Informational submittals and other similar data are for Engineer's information, do not require Engineer's responsive action, and will not be reviewed or returned with comment. D. Submittals made by Contractor that are not required by Contract Documents may be returned without action. E. Submittal approval does not authorize changes to Contract requirements unless accompanied by Change Order, Field Order, or Work Change Directive. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section”, are part of this Specification. 1. Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 2. Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Completion of Field Services. B. Reference Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning for additional information on the Certificate of Proper Installation and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Completion of Field Services. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 9 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE OWNER: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO: PRODUCT, MATERIAL, OR SERVICE SUBMITTED: Comments: I hereby certify that the above-referenced product, material, or service called for by the contract for the named project will be furnished in accordance with all applicable requirements. I further certify that the product, material, or service are of the quality specified and conform in all respects with the contract requirements, and are in the quantity shown. Date of Execution: , 20 Manufacturer: Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative (print): Authorized Signature) 01 33 00 SUPPLEMENT - 01 BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 10 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO: EQPT TAG NO: EQPT/SYSTEM: PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION: I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been: Check Applicable) Installed, inspected, adjusted, aligned, calibrated, and lubricated in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Installed with proper internal clearances and clearances to adjacent equipment and structures. Installed free of any stresses imposed by connecting pipes or anchor bolts. Installed in a manner than will not void the warranty. Installed in a manner that is ready to be operated by others. Installed in a manner that will reliability perform the function for which it is installed. Suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions. Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. Functional tests. System has been performance tested and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. (When complete system of one manufacturer) Note: Attach any performance test documentation from manufacturer. Comments: I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 11 Date:, 20 Manufacturer: By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative: Authorized Signature) I, the undersigned Contractor, hereby certify that I am a duly authorized representative of the Contractor and certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date:, 20 Contractor: By Contractor’s Authorized Representative: Authorized Signature) 01 33 00 SUPPLEMENT - 02 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 12 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF FIELD SERVICES OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO: I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system: Check Applicable) Operates within the allowable limits for vibration (if applicable). Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning. Control logic for startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly functioning. Is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and Contract Documents. Operates in conformance with the design, Contract Documents, and manufacturer’s requirements and is ready to be placed in service for normal operation. Field services have been fully completed as required by the Contract Documents, including all required field adjustments or calibrations, training, and performance testing (excluding any field services required to be provided following Substantial Completion). I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: , 20___ Manufacturer: Authorized Signature) I, the undersigned Contractor, hereby certify that I am a duly authorized representative of the Contractor and certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: , 20 Contractor’s Authorized Representative: Authorized Signature) 01 33 00 SUPPLEMENT - 03 EQPT TAG NO: EQPT/SYSTEM: PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION: Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative: Contractor: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 1 SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Labeling. E. Testing and inspection services. F. Contractor’s responsibilities. G. Manufacturers' field services. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, Site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Products, materials, and equipment may be subject to inspection by Engineer and Owner at place of manufacture or fabrication. Such inspections shall not relieve Contractor of complying with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Supervise performance of Work in such manner and by such means to ensure that Work, whether completed or in progress, will not be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. 1.3 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' recommended tolerances and tolerance requirements in reference standards. When such tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.4 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 2 B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current as of date for receiving Bids except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards and maintain on Site when required by product Specification Sections. D. When requirements of indicated reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference in reference documents. 1.5 LABELING A. Attach label from agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, and systems required to be labeled by applicable code. B. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification, approved agency identification, and the following information, as applicable, on each label: 1. Model number. 2. Serial number. 3. Performance characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Nameplates, Trademarks, Logos, and Other Identifying Marks on Products: Not allowed on surfaces exposed to view in public areas, interior or exterior. 1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection. B. Independent testing firm will perform tests, inspections, and other services specified in individual Specification Sections and as required by Engineer. In the event of a conflict in the Contract Documents concerning sampling and testing frequency, the more stringent standard shall be enforced, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Texas. 2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full-time Professional Engineer on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections, and source quality control may occur on or off Project Site. Perform off- Site testing as required by Engineer or Owner. D. Reports shall be submitted by independent firm to Engineer, Contractor, and authorities having jurisdiction, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. 1. Submit final report indicating correction of Work previously reported as non-compliant. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 3 E. Cooperate with independent testing firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Engineer and independent testing firm 48 hours before expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent testing firm and pay for additional Samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work according to requirements of Contract Documents. G. Retesting or re-inspection required because of nonconformance with specified or indicated requirements shall be performed by same independent testing firm on instructions from Engineer. Payment for retesting or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Price. H. Independent Testing Firm Responsibilities: 1. Test Samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at Site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform indicated sampling and testing of products according to specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or nonconformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. I. Material Testing Reports: After each test, Independent Testing Firm shall promptly submit two copies of testing reports to Engineer, Contractor, and other entities as directed, indicating observations and results of tests and compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents. At a minimum, include the following information in testing reports: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector/testing technician. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and Specification Section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents. 11. Special observations, if any. Submit final report indicating correction of Work previously reported as noncompliant. Log all test results in an electronic spreadsheet for each test procedure and provide updated versions to Engineer at agreed upon time interval. J. Limits on Independent Testing Firm Authority: 1. Independent Testing Firm may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Independent Testing Firm may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 4 3. Independent Testing Firm may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Independent Testing Firm has no authority to stop the Work. 1.7 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Correct, remove, or replace defective work per Section 00700 – General Conditions. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe Site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, startup of equipment, testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer is subject to approval of Engineer. C. Report observations and Site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, "Manufacturer's Field Reports" Article. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities 1. Temporary electricity 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes 3. Temporary heating 4. Temporary ventilation 5. Temporary water service 6. Temporary sanitary facilities B. Construction Facilities 1. Field offices and sheds 2. Vehicular access 3. Parking 4. Progress cleaning and waste removal 5. Project identification 6. Traffic regulation 7. Fire-prevention facilities C. Temporary Controls 1. Barriers 2. Enclosures and fencing 3. Security 4. Water control 5. Dust control 6. Erosion and sediment control 7. Noise control 8. Pest and rodent control 9. Pollution control D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 3. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source as needed for construction operation. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed by Engineer. Do not disrupt Owner's use of service. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 C. Provide electric power and all electric power costs for Contractor’s field offices, as required. D. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required for construction operations. E. Provide power outlets with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for construction operations. Provide suitable, flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment. F. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at feeder switch at source distribution equipment. G. Permanent convenience receptacles may be used during construction. H. Provide distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets for single-phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20-ampere duplex outlets, single-phase circuits for power. 2. Provide 20-ampere, single-phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to meet applicable safety requirements to allow erection, application, or installation of materials and equipment, and observation or inspection of the Work. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, lamps, and the like, for specified lighting levels. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. D. Permanent lighting may be used during construction. 1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Where available, existing heating systems in Owner facilities may be used during construction. B. Before operating permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. Replace filters at Substantial Completion. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in indoor areas where construction is in progress unless indicated otherwise in individual product Sections. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 B. Where available, existing ventilation equipment in Owner facilities may be used during construction. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. C. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation, removal, and fuel consumed. 1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and pay for suitable quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation and heat tape to prevent freezing. B. Owner will provide water for testing. If initial tests fail, water for retesting shall be paid for by Contractor at Owner’s current, applicable water rates. 1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of Project mobilization. B. At end of construction, return existing facilities used for construction operations to same or better condition as original condition. 1.9 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Contractor’s Field Office is not a requirement of this contract. B. Do not use existing facilities for field offices or for storage, unless approved by Owner. C. Environmental Control: 1. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilating as needed to maintain products according to Contract Documents; lighting for maintenance and inspection of products. D. Storage Areas and Sheds: Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and inspection of products to suit requirements in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Preparation: Fill and grade Sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away from buildings. F. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on Owner's property. G. Maintenance and Cleaning: 1. Periodic cleaning and maintenance for sheds and storage areas. 2. Maintain walks free of mud, water, snow, and the like. H. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas to same or better condition as original condition. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. Construct temporary all-weather access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of width and load-bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. B. Construct temporary bridges and culverts to span low areas and allow unimpeded drainage. C. Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires and provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. D. Location as approved by Engineer. E. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 foot-wide driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. F. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions. G. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. H. Use designated existing on-Site roads for construction traffic. 1.11 PARKING A. Construct temporary gravel surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. Location as approved by Engineer. C. Contractor to provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services in connection with the Project to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, private property, Owner’s operations, or construction activities. D. If Site space is not adequate, Contractor shall provide additional off-Site parking at no cost to Owner. E. Use of existing on-Site streets and driveways used for construction traffic is not permitted, unless approved by Owner. Tracked vehicles are not allowed on paved areas. F. Use of designated areas of existing parking facilities used by construction personnel is not permitted. G. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. H. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. I. Permanent Pavements and Parking Facilities: 1. Before Substantial Completion, bases for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for construction traffic. 2. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Tracked vehicles are not allowed. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 5 3. Use of permanent parking structures is not permitted. J. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, ice, and the like. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original condition. K. Removal, Repair: 1. Remove temporary materials and construction before Substantial Completion. 2. Remove underground Work and compacted materials to depth of 2 feet; fill and grade Site as indicated. 3. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original condition. L. Mud from Site vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.12 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain Site in clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, before enclosing spaces. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas before starting surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from Site periodically and dispose of off-Site. E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. F. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding excess and waste material, including methods of handling and disposal. G. At least weekly, brush sweep entry drive, roadways, and other streets affected by the Work and where adjacent to the Work. 1.13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Identification Sign: 1. One painted sign, 32-sq ft area, bottom 4 feet aboveground. 2. Content: a. Project number, title, logo, and name of Owner. b. Names and titles of authorities. c. Names and titles of Engineer and Consultants. d. Name of Prime Contractor. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 6 3. Graphic Design, Colors, and Style of Lettering: Designated by Engineer. B. Project Informational Signs: 1. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as Project identification sign or standard products; size lettering for legibility at 100-foot distance. 2. Provide sign at each field office and storage shed and provide directional signs to direct traffic into and within Site. Relocate as Work progress requires. 3. No other signs are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law. C. Design sign and structure to withstand 70-mph wind velocity. D. Sign Painter: Experienced as professional sign painter for minimum of three years. E. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. F. Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members. G. Sign Materials: 1. Structure and Framing: New wood, structurally adequate. 2. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium-density overlay, minimum of 3/4 inches thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. 3. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. 4. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as selected. 5. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors as selected. H. Installation: 1. Install Project identification sign within 15 days after date established by Notice to Proceed. 2. Erect at designated location. 3. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. 4. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. 5. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing. I. Maintenance: Maintain clean signs and supports; repair deterioration and damage. J. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore area. 1.14 TRAFFIC REGULATION A. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding closing or restricting use of public streets or highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission of proper authority. Ensure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits. B. Conduct the Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 7 C. Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of public and private travel. D. Signs, Signals, and Devices: 1. Post-Mounted and Wall-Mounted Traffic Control and Informational Signs: As approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Traffic Control Signals: As approved by local jurisdictions. 3. Traffic Cones, Drums, Flares, and Lights: As approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Flag Person Equipment: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Flag Persons: Provide trained and equipped flag persons to regulate traffic when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes. F. Flares and Lights: Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. G. Haul Routes: 1. Consult with authorities having jurisdiction and establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and Site access. 2. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 3. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and to minimize interference with public traffic. H. Traffic Signs and Signals: 1. Provide signs at approaches to Site and on Site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. 2. Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control and areas affected by Contractor's operations. 3. Relocate signs and signals as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control. I. Removal: 1. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. 2. Repair damage caused by installation. 3. Remove post settings to depth of 2 feet. 1.15 FIRE-PREVENTION FACILITIES A. Prohibit smoking within buildings under construction and demolition. Designate area on Site where smoking is permitted. Provide approved ashtrays in designated smoking areas. B. Establish fire watch for cutting, welding, and other hazardous operations capable of starting fires. Maintain fire watch before, during, and after hazardous operations until threat of fire does not exist. C. Portable Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10; 10-pound capacity, 4A-60B: C UL rating. 1. Provide one fire extinguisher at each facility. 2. Provide minimum of one fire extinguisher in every construction trailer and storage shed. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 8 3. Provide minimum of one fire extinguisher on roof during roofing operations using heat- producing equipment. 1.16 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of Site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by authorities having jurisdiction for public rights-of-way. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Preserve and protect existing trees and plants designated to remain. 1. Protect areas within drip lines from traffic, parking, storage, dumping, chemically injurious materials and liquids, ponding, and continuous running water. 2. Provide 4-foot-high barriers around drip line, with access for maintenance. 3. Replace trees and plants damaged by construction operations. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, Site, and structures from damage. 1.17 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A. Provide fencing as necessary for protection of existing facilities and to maintain controlled access to the Site. Maintain fence throughout construction period. B. Construction: Commercial-grade chain-link fence. C. Provide 8-foot-high fence around construction Site as required; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. D. Provide orange plastic construction netting around open excavations. E. Exterior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary weathertight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual Specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self- closing hardware and locks. 2. Provide temporary roofing as necessary. 3. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of equipment and materials stored. 1.18 SECURITY A. Security Program: 1. Contractor is responsible for protecting the Work premises from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program at Project mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until directed by Engineer. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 9 4. No claim is to be made against Owner by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser. Contractor to make good all damage to Owner property resulting from Contractor failure or provide suitable security measures. 5. Security program to be at least equal to those provided by Owner to protect existing facilities during normal operation and shall include additional security fencing, surveillance, barricades, lighting, and other measures as required to protect the Site. 6. Submit a security program to Engineer for review if requested. B. Entry Control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles to Project Site. 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workers and visitors and make available to Owner on request. 4. Coordinate access of Owner's personnel to Site in coordination with Owner's security forces. C. Personnel Identification: 1. Provide identification badge for each person authorized to enter premises. 2. Badge to Include: Personal photograph, name, and employer. 3. Maintain list of accredited persons and submit copy to Owner on request. 4. Require return of badges at expiration of employment on the Work. D. Restrictions: 1. Do not allow cameras on Site or photographs taken except by written approval of Owner or as specified. 2. Do no work on Saturdays or Sundays without approval of Owner. 1.19 WATER CONTROL A. Grade Site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain necessary pumping equipment. B. Protect Site from puddles or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect Site from soil erosion. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods that minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.21 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Refer to Section 31 25 12 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention. B. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. C. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 10 D. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, drains, and other devices to prevent water flow. E. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts and clays. F. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation. Promptly apply corrective measures. 1.22 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. B. Conduct construction operations during regular working hours except as approved by Engineer. 1.23 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work. B. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. 1.24 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances and pollutants produced by construction operations. B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Control dust caused by the work and comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. Sprinkling or similar methods will be permitted to control dust. Use of petroleum products or chlorides is prohibited. Sprinkling must be repeated as needed to keep the disturbed area damp. Dust control shall be performed as the work proceeds whenever a potential for dust nuisance or hazard occurs. D. Burning is not allowed on this project. E. Blasting is not allowed on this project. 1.25 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials before Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade Site as indicated on Drawings. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 11 D. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 1 SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product delivery requirements. C. Product storage and handling requirements. D. Product options. E. Equipment electrical characteristics and components. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Specified products define standard of quality, type, function, dimension, appearance, and performance required. B. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers that are suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Confirm that manufacturer's production capacity can provide sufficient product, on time, to meet Project requirements. C. Domestic Products: Except where specified otherwise, domestic products are not required for this Project. Domestic products are interpreted to mean products mined, manufactured, fabricated, or produced in United States or its territories. D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents. E. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being replaced. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. When practical, factory assemble products. Mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable protective coating. B. Transport and handle products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage. D. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on label, date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 2 F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products; use methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Remove damaged products from Site and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so as not to delay progress of the Work. 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Store, rotate, maintain, and protect products according to manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer’s instructions for material requiring special handling, storage, or protection shall be provided prior to delivery of material. B. Store in approved storage yards or sheds provided in accordance with Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance during storage, installation, and until products are accepted for use by Owner. C. Store and protect products according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Store products with seals and labels intact and legible. E. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment suitable to product. F. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place products on sloped supports aboveground. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products; use methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. K. Keep running account of products in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for products delivered, but not installed in the Work. 1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Products complying with specified reference standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of manufacturers named and complying with Specifications; no options or substitutions allowed. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 3 C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not named according to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box. B. Cord and Plug: Furnish minimum 6-foot long cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length may be specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 1 SECTION 01 61 03 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Common requirements for equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 – Proposal Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 – General Requirements. 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 40 05 00 – Common Requirements for Process Piping. 5. Section 40 90 01 – Instrumentation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E1934, Standard Guide for Examining Electrical and Mechanical Equipment with Infrared Thermography. b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 4. Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. 9.6.4, Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Valves. 5. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE). 7. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 1940, Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in a Constant Rigid) State - Part 1: Specification and Verification of Balance Tolerances. 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 9. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): a. ATS, Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 430, Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers. 11. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 12. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 14. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 2 b. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels. 15. Vibration Institute. B. Miscellaneous: 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" shall be selected and utilized uniformly throughout Project even if: a. More than one (1) manufacturer is listed for a given "product" in Specifications. b. No manufacturer is listed. 2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical wiring, instrumentation, controls, and system components shall fully comply with specific NEC requirements related to area classification and to NEMA 250 and NEMA ICS 6 designations shown on Electrical Power Drawings and/or defined in the Electrical specifications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment. B. Major Equipment Supports - Supports for Equipment: 1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with supported equipment weighing 2000 LBS or greater, or; 2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported equipment weighing 500 LBS or greater, or; 3. Located on slab-on-grade or earth with supported equipment weighing 5000 LBS or more. C. Equipment: 1. One (1) or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function. 2. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. 3. Not limited to items specifically referenced in "Equipment" articles within individual Specifications. D. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for general requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. General for all equipment: a. Data sheets that include manufacturer's name and complete product model number. 1) Clearly identify all optional accessories that are included. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the requirements of the standards referenced. c. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions. d. Equipment identification utilizing tagging system and name utilized in Drawings. e. Equipment installation details: 1) Location of anchorage. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 3 2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage. 3) Anchorage setting templates. 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions. f. Equipment area classification rating. g. Shipping and operating weight. h. Equipment physical characteristics: 1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 2) Materials of construction and construction details. i. Equipment factory primer and paint data. j. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. k. Equipment lining and coatings. l. Equipment utility requirements including air, natural gas, electricity, and water. m. Ladders and platforms provided with equipment: 1) Certification that all components comply fully with OSHA requirements. 2) Full details of construction/fabrication. 3) Scaled plan and sections showing relationship to equipment. 2. Mechanical and process equipment: a. Operating characteristics: 1) Technical information including applicable performance curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and efficiencies. 2) Brake horsepower requirements. 3) Copies of equipment data plates. b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. c. Equipment bearing life certification. d. Equipment foundation data: 1) Equipment center of gravity. 2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation. 3. Electric motors: a. Motor manufacturer and model number. b. Complete motor nameplate data. c. Weight. d. NEMA design type. e. Enclosure type. f. Frame size. g. Winding insulation class and temperature rise. h. Starts per hour. i. Performance data (unless specified otherwise): 1) Guaranteed minimum efficiencies at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load 2) Guaranteed minimum power factor at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load. 3) Locked rotor and full load current at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. 4) Starting, full load, and breakdown torque at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. j. Bearing data and lubrication system. k. Thermal protection system including recommended alarm and trip settings for winding and bearing RTDs. l. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 4 1) Dimensioned outlined drawing. 2) Connection diagrams including accessories (strip heaters, thermal protection, etc.). m. Certifications: 1) When utilized with a reduced voltage starter, certify that motor and driven equipment are compatible. 2) When utilized with a variable frequency controller, certify motor is inverter duty and the controller and motor are compatible. a) Include minimum speed at which the motor may be operated for the driven machinery. n. Electrical gear: 1) Unless specified in a narrow-scope Specification Section, provide the following: a) Equipment ratings: Voltage, continuous current, kVa, watts, short circuit with stand, etc., as applicable. 2) Control panels: a) Panel construction. b) Point-to-point ladder diagrams. c) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. d) Technical product data on panel components. e) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. f) Panel access openings. g) Nameplate schedule. h) Panel anchorage. 4. Systems schematics and data: a. Provide system schematics where required in system specifications. 1) Acknowledge all system components being supplied as part of the system. 2) Utilize equipment, instrument and valving tag numbers defined in the Contract Documents for all components. 3) Provide technical data for each system component showing compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 4) For piping components, identify all utility connections, vents and drains which will be included as part of the system. 5) For factory painted equipment, provide paint submittals in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been initially started up, has been calibrated and/or adjusted as required, and is ready for operation. a. Reference Certificate of Proper Installation form attached to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 2. Certification for major equipment supports that equipment foundation design loads shown on the Drawings or specified have been compared to actual loads exhibited by equipment provided for this Project and that said design loadings are equal to or greater than the loads produced by the equipment provided. 3. Field noise testing reports, if such testing is specified in narrow-scope Specification Sections. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 5 4. Notification, at least four (4) weeks in advance or as specified elsewhere, that motor testing will be conducted at the factory. 5. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer-supplied control panels that interface in any way with other controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with the supplier/installer of those interfacing systems. 6. Motor test reports. 7. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel drawings for manufacturer- supplied control panels truly represent panel wiring including any field-made modifications. 8. Certification that driven equipment and VFDs are compatible. 1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Service Conditions: 1. Ambient Air Temperature (ºF): a. Minimum: 6. b. Average: 69. c. Maximum: 111. 2. Wind Speed (mph): a. Minimum Average Daily: 0.2. b. Mean Average Daily: 8. c. Maximum Average Daily: 20. 3. Raw Water Temperature (ºF): a. Minimum: 50. b. Average: 72. c. Maximum: 90. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – NOT USED. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Low Voltage Electric Motors: 1. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed AC or DC drives, provide motors that are fully compatible with the speed controllers. 2. Design for frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment. 3. Design for full voltage starting. 4. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by driven equipment. 5. Size for altitude of Project. 6. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates which include all data required by NEC Article 430. 7. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally constructed motor driven equipment specified by model number in which a redesign of the complete unit would be required to provide a motor with features specified. 8. AC electric motors less than 1/3 HP: a. Single phase, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 6 c. Built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element with stainless steel enclosure. 9. AC electric motors 1/3 to 1 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) For single phase motors, provide built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element. 10. AC electric motors 1-1/2 to 10 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. c. For vertical motors provide 15-year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 11. AC electric motors greater than 10 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) Design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 50,000 HRS of operation for motors up to and including 100 HP. c. For vertical motors provide 15-year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. d. Thermal protection: 1) For motors 50 HP and above controlled from a variable frequency drive and for all other motors 100 HP and above, provide integral thermal detectors with normally closed contacts that will open on over-temperature or resistance type temperature detector (RTD) complete with monitor and alarm panel having a normally closed contact that will open on over-temperature. a) Two (2) thermal sensing devices per phase in each phase hot-spot location. 12. Severe duty motor to have the following minimum features: a. All cast iron construction. b. Gasketed conduit box. c. Epoxy finish for corrosion protection. d. Hydroscopic varnish on windings for corrosion protection. e. Drain plug and breather. B. Low Voltage NEMA Design Squirrel Cage Induction Motors: 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA and IEEE for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Motors to meet NEMA MG 1 (NEMA Premium) efficiencies. 3. Do not provide motors having a locked rotor kVA per HP exceeding the NEMA standard for the assigned NEMA code letter. 4. For use on variable frequency type adjustable speed drives, provide: a. Induction motors that are in compliance with NEMA MG 1, Part 31. b. Nameplate identification meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31 requirements. c. Insulated drive end bearing on all motors. d. Insulated non-drive end bearings, at a minimum, on all motors with horizontal shaft 100 HP and larger. e. An insulated bearing carrier on the non-drive end for vertical shaft motors 100 HP and larger. f. Shaft grounding ring on all motors: 1) Factory installed, maintenance free, circumferential, bearing protection ring with conductive microfiber shaft contacting material. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 7 2) Electro Static Technology AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring or approved equal. 5. Design motor insulation in accordance with NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above a 40 Deg C ambient. 6. Design motors for continuous duty. 7. Size motors having a 1.0 service factor so that nameplate HP is a minimum of 15 percent greater than the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. a. As an alternative, furnish motors with a 1.15 service factor and size so that nameplate HP is at least equal to the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. 8. Motor enclosure and winding insulation application: a. The following shall apply unless modified by narrow-scope Specification Sections: MOTOR LOCATION MOTOR ENCLOSURE / WINDING INSULATION Unclassified Indoor Areas TEFC, Standard Insulation Wet indoor Areas TEFC, Standard Insulation Wet outdoor Areas TEFC, Extra Dip and Bake for Moisture Corrosive Areas TEFC, Severe/ Chemical Duty Class I, Division 1 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Class I Division 1 Locations Class II, Division 1 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Class II Division 1 Locations Class I or Class II, Division 2 Areas Explosion Proof, Approved for Division 1 Locations or TEFC with maximum external frame temperature compatible with the gas or dust in the area, Extra Dip and Bake for moisture NOTE: Provide TENV motors in the smaller horsepower ratings where TEFC is not available. 9. Provide oversize conduit box complete with clamp type grounding terminals inside the conduit box. C. V-Belt Drive: 1. Provide each V-belt drive with sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. 2. Provide V-belt drives with a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed. 3. Provide static proof belts. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Data Plate: 1. Attach a stainless-steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating equipment. 2. Permanently stamp information on data plate including manufacturer's name, equipment operating parameters, serial number, and speed. B. Gages: 1. Provide gages in accordance with Sections 40 05 06 – Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping and 40 90 01 - Instrumentation. 2. Provide at the following locations: a. At locations identified on Drawings. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 8 3. Utilize tapping sleeves or saddles where indicated on Drawings for mounting per Section 40 05 06 - Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping. C. Lifting Eye Bolts or Lugs: 1. Provide on all equipment 50 LBS or greater. 2. Provide on other equipment or products as specified in the narrow-scope Specification Sections. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with modern engineering and shop practices. B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field. C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable. D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. E. Furnish equipment which requires periodic internal inspection or adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. 1. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items. F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. 1. Provide drain connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing. G. Fabricate equipment which will be subject to Corrosive Environment in such a way as to avoid back-to-back placement of surfaces that cannot be properly prepared and painted. 1. When such back-to-back fabrication cannot be avoided, provide continuous welds to seal such surfaces from contact with corrosive environment. H. Control Panels Engineered and Provided with the Equipment by the Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer’s standard design for components and control logic unless specific requirements are specified in the narrow-scope equipment Specification Section. 2. NEMA or IEC rated components are acceptable, whichever is used in the manufacturer’s standard engineered design, unless specific requirements are required in the narrow-scope equipment Specification Section. 3. Affix entire assembly with a UL 508A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to delivery. a. Control panels without an affixed UL 508A label shall be rejected. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 9 2.5 SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES – NOT USED. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.2 INSTALLATION CHECKS A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed Specifications, secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized representative(s) of equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment installation. 1. In each case, representative(s) shall be present during placement and start-up of equipment and as often as necessary to resolve any operational issues which may arise. B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a written report certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Is in accurate alignment. 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. a. Secure and deliver a field written report to Owner immediately prior to leaving jobsite. C. Reference Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning for Certificate of Compliance and Certificate of Proper Installation. D. No separate payment shall be made for installation checks. 1. All or any time expended during installation check does not qualify as Operation and Maintenance training or instruction time when specified. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND HAZARD WARNING SIGNS A. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with Section 10 14 00 – Identification for Process Piping and Equipment. 3.4 FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS – NOT USED. 3.5 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire. C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor leads. D. Tape stripped ends of conductors and associated connectors with electrical tape. 1. Wrapping thickness shall be 150 percent of the conductor insulation thickness. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Common Requirements for Equipment 01 61 03 - 10 E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Furnish equipment manufacturer’s field quality control services and testing as specified in the individual equipment Specification Sections. 2. Execute start-up requirements in accordance with Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements and Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning. 3. Perform and report on all tests required by the equipment manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Provide testing of electrical equipment and connections in accordance with the Electrical specifications. B. Other Testing: 1. Perform tests and inspections not specifically listed but required to assure equipment is safe to energize and operate. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements and Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1 SECTION 01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Field engineering. B. Closeout procedures. C. Starting of systems. D. Demonstration and instructions. E. Minimum start up requirements. F. Project record documents. G. Operation and maintenance data. H. Manual for materials and finishes. I. Manual for equipment and systems. J. Spare parts and maintenance products. K. Product warranties and product bonds. L. Maintenance service. M. Examination. N. Preparation. O. Execution. P. Cutting and patching. Q. Protecting installed construction. R. Final cleaning. 1.2 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Engineer will locate and Contractor shall protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify Engineer of discrepancies discovered. B. Control datum for survey is established by Owner-provided survey indicated on Drawings. C. Retain professional land surveyor or civil engineer registered in state of Texas who shall perform or supervise engineering surveying necessary for additional construction staking and layout. D. Contractor shall verify setbacks and easements; confirm Drawing dimensions and elevations. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting Site Work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Engineer loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Contractor shall retain Engineer to replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion: Complete following items before requesting Certification of Substantial Completion, either for entire Work or for portions of Work: 1. Submit approved maintenance manuals, Project record documents, digital images of construction photographs, and other similar final record data in compliance with this Section. 2. Complete facility startup, testing, adjusting, balancing of systems and equipment, demonstrations, and instructions to Owner's operating and maintenance personnel as specified in the Contract Documents. 3. Submit asset management information documentation per Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning. 4. Conduct inspection to establish basis for request that Work is substantially complete. Create comprehensive list (initial punch list) indicating items to be completed or corrected, value of incomplete or nonconforming Work, reason for being incomplete, and date of anticipated completion for each item. Include copy of list with request for Certificate of Substantial Completion. 5. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full, unrestricted use of Project and access to services and utilities. Include certificate of occupancy, operating certificates, and similar releases from authorities having jurisdiction and utility companies. 6. Install all grating, stairs, guardrails, and other required safety devices. 7. Assemble and place as-built control panel and loop drawings in all cabinets. 8. Install all identification for electrical systems Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 9. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of material, and similar physical items to Owner. 10. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys directly to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 11. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from Project Site, along with construction tools, mockups, and similar elements. 12. Perform final cleaning according to this Section. B. Prerequisites for Final Completion: Complete following items before requesting final acceptance and final payment. 1. When Contractor considers Work to be complete, submit written certification that: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed. b. Work has been examined for compliance with Contract Documents. c. Work has been completed according to Contract Documents. d. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 2. Submittals: Submit following: a. Final punch list indicating all items have been completed or corrected. b. Final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. c. Specified warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, and other similar documents. d. Accounting statement for final changes to Contract Sum. e. Contractor's affidavit of payment of debts and claims on Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. f. Contractor affidavit of release of liens on Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens. g. Consent of surety to final payment on Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3 3. Perform final cleaning for Contractor-soiled areas according to this Section. 1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems. Reference Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. C. Verify that tests, meter readings, and electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute startup under supervision of manufacturer's representative or Contractors' personnel according to manufacturer's instructions, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning, and the individual Specification Sections. F. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative who will be present at Site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup and will supervise placing equipment or system in operation. G. Submit a written report according to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures and Section 01 91 00 – Facility Commissioning that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel including training and start-up prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in classroom environment located at the BCRUA WTP. Instruction shall be provided by qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the equipment and Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction and prior to date of Substantial Completion. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 4 G. Equipment and systems requiring training are specified in individual Specification Sections. H. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual Specification Sections. I. The manufacturer's instructor shall present at least one "hands-on" demonstration of common preventative and corrective maintenance repairs so that all operation and maintenance personnel have the opportunity to witness the demonstration. The manufacturer shall provide the tools and equipment to conduct the demonstrations and prepare and submit video recordings of the demonstrations for future reference. J. In any “hands-on” training situation where Owner’s operation or maintenance personnel participate in disassembly or assembly of equipment components, the manufacturer shall be responsible for such disassembly or assembly and shall provide written certification of proper equipment operation to the Engineer after reassembly of all equipment. K. Demonstration Period: 1. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the mechanical, electrical, and control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising each facility as evidence of Substantial Completion for each facility. 2. Duration of Demonstration Period: Minimum 30 consecutive days. 3. Timing of Demonstration Period: a. Complete Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) specified in Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. b. Following successful completion of FDT, Demonstration Period shall begin in conjunction with 30-Day Acceptance Test specified in Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. 4. Demonstration Period for each facility must be successfully completed prior to Substantial Completion for each facility. 5. If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate amount of time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any equipment or systems that renders the affected equipment or system inoperative exceeds 5 percent of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of functional integrity will be deemed to have failed. a. In the event of failure, a new Demonstration Period will recommence after correction of the cause of failure. b. The new Demonstration Period shall have the same requirements and duration as the Demonstration Period previously conducted. 6. Conduct the demonstration of functional integrity under full operational conditions. 7. Owner will provide operations personnel during Demonstration Period. a. Owner’s personnel will be available to operate the system and provide process decisions affecting plant performance. b. Contractor shall assist with operation of the system under authority of Owner’s operations personnel and provide preventative/corrective maintenance of equipment until successful completion of the Demonstration Period. 8. Owner reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, etc., to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes. 9. Time of beginning and ending any Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner, and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 5 10. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner’s questions, provide final field instruction on select systems and to respond to any system problems or failures which may occur. 11. Provide all labor, supervision, utilities, chemicals, maintenance, equipment, vehicles, or any other item necessary to operate and demonstrate all systems being demonstrated. 1.6 MINIMUM START UP REQUIREMENTS A. Motors. 1. Check each motor for comparison to amperage nameplate value. 2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction. B. Valves. 1. Inspect hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems. 2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage but permit valve stems to operate without galling. 3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged complete. 4. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak. 5. Remove and repair bonnets which leak. 6. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with a surface preparation of “Moly-Cote” or Mallow-Pro”, after cleaning. C. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material and are properly positioned for intended use. D. Tighten all pipe joints after system has been placed in operation. Replace gaskets which show any sign of leakage after tightening. E. Inspect all joints for leakage. 1. Promptly remake each joint which appears to be faulty, do not wait for rust to form. 2. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints. F. Remove rust, scale and foreign material from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. G. Set and calibrate equipment and instrumentation, including all electrical and control systems per Section 40 90 01 – Instrumentation. Field calibration is acceptable for any equipment and instrumentation if within 12 months of factory calibration with a calibration certificate or sticker. Calibration shall be completed using instrumentation calibrated by NIST traceable certified calibration facility and have a calibration sticker dated within 12 months of the use date. H. All instrumentation shall be within calibration per Section 40 90 01 at Substantial Completion. Any instrumentation not within calibration shall be re-calibrated or replaced with calibrated instrumentation prior to Substantial Completion. I. Check each electrical control and power circuit to assure that operation complies with specifications and requirements to provide desired performance. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 6 J. Replace items which are defaced, broken, or which read incorrectly. K. Provide reports to Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on Site one complete paper copy set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work in accordance with General Conditions 00700: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Engineer and Owner. 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. 3. To facilitate accuracy of records, make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 4. Provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation and examination. 5. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Engineer or Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record, at each product Section, description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates used. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction as follows: 1. Include Contract modifications such as Addenda, supplementary instructions, change directives, field orders, minor changes in the Work, and change orders. 2. Include locations of concealed elements of the Work. 3. Identify depth of buried utility lines and provide dimensions showing distances from permanent facility components that are parallel to utilities. 4. Dimension ends, corners, and junctions of buried utilities to permanent facility components using triangulation. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 7 5. Identify and locate existing buried or concealed items encountered during Project. 6. Measured depths of foundations in relation to vertical datum. 7. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 8. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 9. Field changes of dimension and detail. 10. Details not on original Drawings. G. Submit marked-up paper copy documents to Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. H. Submit PDF electronic files of marked-up documents to Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit preliminary data electronically as a PDF within 60 days after approval of corresponding shop drawing(s). Files to be fully functional, searchable, and viewable in the most recent version of Adobe Acrobat and Bluebeam. B. After all preliminary data have been found to be acceptable to Engineer and owner, submit updated PDF and provide two hard copy sets of data bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. Include bookmarks in PDF to match manual table of contents. C. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," title of Project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. Include cover information on spine of binder. D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. Provide heavy duty plastic sheet lifters in front and back of binder. E. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. F. Contents: Prepare table of contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers and equipment supplier’s project number. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by Specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Include the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 8 f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. g. Safety precautions to be taken when operating and maintaining or working near equipment. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop Drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Specified certificates and service agreements. d. Originals of warranties and bonds. 1.9 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit electronic preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return with comments. B. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit completed volumes at least 15 days prior to request for Substantial Completion. Draft will be reviewed and returned with Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes within ten days after final inspection. 1. Provide one electronic final volume in searchable PDF. Include bookmarks in PDF to match manual table of contents. E. Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re-ordering custom- manufactured products. F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections. I. Include listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.10 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 9 C. Submit completed volumes at least 30 days prior to request for Substantial Completion. Draft will be reviewed and returned with Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes within ten days after final inspection. 1. Provide one electronic final volume in PDF. Include bookmarks in PDF to match manual table of contents. E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. G. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed. H. Operating Procedures: Include startup, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required. K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. N. Include configuration information. O. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. P. Include Contractor's coordination drawings with color-coded piping diagrams as installed. Q. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. R. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. S. Include field test reports and test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and individual Specification Sections. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 10 T. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections. U. Include listing in table of contents for design data with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. 1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections. Store and maintain all components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations until they have been transferred to the Owner. B. Spare parts may be transferred on an individual Specification Section basis or for the entire Project after commissioning and startup and successful completion of the Demonstration Period. Once spare parts have been transferred to the Owner, they shall not be transferred back to the Contractor and shall not be available for use by the Contractor to address deficiencies or warranty items. C. Assemble and deliver all spare parts to Project Site and place in location as directed by Owner. D. Develop and utilize a Chain of Custody form to document the transfer of all spare parts and extra products. 1. At a minimum, the Chain of Custody form shall include the description, manufacturer, model number, and quantity of all parts being transferred, as well as the Project name, Specification Section, date of transfer, and the printed name and signature of the Contractor and Owner’s representatives responsible for transferring/receiving the spare parts. 2. An executed copy of each Chain of Custody form shall be provided to the Owner within 24 hours of transfer and retained by the Contractor until the completion of the Project. 3. Any parts transferred to the Owner without an accompanying Chain of Custody form documenting the transfer shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Reference General Conditions 7.17 for Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee. B. Obtain warranties executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers within ten days after completion of applicable item of Work. C. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. D. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. E. Co-execute submittals when required. F. Include table of contents and assemble all warranties in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. Provide electronic PDF submittal as well. G. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 11 H. Time of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Unless specified otherwise, furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in Specification Sections for two years from date of Final Completion as specified in General Conditions 7.17.B. B. Contractor shall coordinate to have these services provided by the manufacturer’s representative with Contractor support as required. C. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component. E. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing Site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual Specification Sections. D. Verify that utility services are available with correct characteristics and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance according to manufacturer's instructions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 12 B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer-required or -recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 EXECUTION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions, performing each step in sequence. Maintain one set of manufacturer's installation instructions at Project Site during installation and until completion of construction. B. When manufacturer's installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on approved Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1. Secure Work true to line and level and within specified tolerances, or if not specified, industry-recognized tolerances. 2. Physically separate products in place, provide electrical insulation, or provide protective coatings to prevent galvanic action or corrosion between dissimilar metals. 3. Exposed Joints: Provide uniform joint width and arrange to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Engineer for final decision. E. Allow for expansion of materials and building and structural movement. F. Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of Work under conditions to ensure best possible results in coordination with entire Project. 1. Isolate each unit of Work from incompatible Work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 2. Coordination enclosure of Work with required inspections and test to minimize necessity of uncovering Work for those purposes. G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of Work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Engineer for final decision. 2. Elements Identified as Accessible to Handicapped: Comply with applicable codes and regulations. H. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. I. Clean and perform maintenance on installed Work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Lubricate operable components as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installers to perform cutting and patching. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 13 B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and nonconforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Restore Work with new products according to requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit. I. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Engineer for decision or remedy. 3.5 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate Work area to prevent damage. C. Use durable sheet materials to protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects. D. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final Project assessment. B. Clean Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from Site. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 14 D. Clean interior of all electrical cabinets and gear of dust, debris, and wire clippings. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with appropriate cleaning materials. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 1 SECTION 01 73 20 - OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Methods of installing and sealing openings and penetrations in construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 – Proposal Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 – General Requirements. 3. Section 09 96 00 – High-Performance Coatings. 4. Section 40 05 06 – Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. d. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. e. A351, Standard Specication for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. f. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. g. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. h. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. i. A995, Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure- Containing Parts. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 501, Class 1 Locations. b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. c. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for requirements. 2. For each structure, provide dimensioned or scaled (minimum 1/8 IN = 1 FT) plan view drawings containing the following information: a. Vertical and horizontal location of all required openings and penetrations. b. Size of all openings and penetrations. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 2 c. Opening type. d. Seal type. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Unless noted otherwise: a. Steel, Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, meeting requirements of ASTM A153/A153M. Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable. b. Penetrations 24 IN DIA or less: ASTM A53, Schedule 40. c. Penetrations larger than 24 IN DIA: ASTM A36, Minimum 1/4 IN thickness. B. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Link-Seal. 2. Type: Interconnected synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall sleeve opening. 3. Fabrication: a. Pressure plates shall be reinforced nylon polymer. b. Assemble interconnected rubber links with Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. 4. Size: According to manufacturer’s instructions for size of pipes shown on Drawings to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening and to withstand a hydrostatic head of 40 feet of water. C. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Unless noted otherwise: Galvanized steel: ASTM A653, G90. 2. Minimum 12 GA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Provide waterstop plate/anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and sleeves cast-in-place in concrete. 1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. 2. For commercial castings, cast water stop/anchor with wall pipe. 3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork. 4. For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 IN larger than outside diameter of sleeve, pipe or ductwork. 5. For commercial castings, waterstop/anchor size to be manufacturer standard. 6. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. B. Factory or shop-coat painted components in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00 – High-Performance Coatings. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Obtain prior acceptance from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 SQ IN must be made in newly completed construction. B. Perform HVAC penetrations in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501. D. Install sleeves and castings in accordance with ACI 318. E. Install sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces. F. Size sleeves and blockouts that will receive sealant such that free area to receive sealant is minimized to maintain seal integrity. G. For insulated piping and ducts, size sleeves and blockouts large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation. H. Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through grating, provide banding at the entire perimeter of the opening. I. Where pipes, conduits or ducts are removed where passing through grating: 1. Metal grating: Provide banding at perimeter and cover opening with 1/4 IN plate of the same material of the grating. 2. FRP grating: Provide full depth cover meeting same loading requirement as existing material or replace grating section. J. Do not cut into or core drill any beams, joists, or columns. K. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns. L. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns, or slabs. M. Field Cutting and Coring (Only allowed where specifically indicated on Drawings or otherwise approved by Engineer): 1. Saw or core drill with non-impact type equipment. 2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or less holes through structure following opening outline. 3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. a. Knock out within saw cuts using impact type equipment. b. Do not chip or spall face of surface to remain intact. c. Do not allow any overcut with saw kerf. N. Precast-Prestressed Concrete Construction: 1. Do not cut openings or core drill vertically or horizontally through stems of members. 2. Do not locate or install sleeves or recess sleeves vertically or horizontally through or in stems of members. 3. Cast openings and sleeves into flanges of units. 4. Cast openings larger than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension in units at time of manufacture. 5. Cast openings smaller than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimensions in flanges of units at time of manufacture or field cut. O. Where alterations are necessary or where new and old work join, restore adjacent surfaces to their condition existing prior to start of work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 4 P. For interior wall applications where backer rod and sealant are specified, provide backer rod and sealant at each side of wall. Q. Use full depth expanding foam sealant for seal applications where single or multiple pipes, conduits, etc., pass through a single sleeve. R. Do not make duct or conduit penetrations below high water levels when entering or leaving tankage, wet wells, or other water holding structures. S. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Utilize one (1) seal for concrete thickness less than 8 IN and two (2) seals for concrete 8 IN thick or greater. 2. Utilize two (2) seals for piping 16 IN diameter and larger if concrete thickness permits. 3. Install seals such that bolt heads are located on the most accessible side of the penetration. T. Backer Rod and Sealant: 1. Install in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. 2. Provide backer rod and sealant for modular mechanical seal applications, unless noted otherwise. a. Apply on top side of slab penetrations and on interior, dry side wall penetrations. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Floors, Roofs, Foundation Base Slabs, Foundation Walls, Foundation Footings, Partitions and Walls for Ductwork, Piping, and Conduit: 1. Provide the following opening and penetration types, unless noted otherwise: a. Type A - Block out 2 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe, or conduits. b. Type B - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. c. Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve cast-in-place. Provide pipe sleeve with water ring for wet and/or washdown areas. d. Type D - Commercial type casting or fabrication. e. Type E – Saw cut or line drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit spools. f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit. g. Type G - Saw cut or line drill. Remove area 1 IN larger than outside dimension of pipe, duct or conduit. h. Type H - Core drill. i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. j. Type J- Grating Banding for any field cut openings. 2. Unless noted otherwise, provide seals of material and method described as follows. a. Category 1 - Modular Mechanical Seal. b. Category 2 - Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA specifications unless otherwise noted on Drawings. c. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon sealant with backing rod and sealant used in sleeve annulus. d. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. e. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on both sides of opening. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 5 f. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both sides of opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening. g. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant or full depth expanding foam sealant depending on application. h. Category 8- Banding for all grating openings and banding and cover plate of similar materials for abandoned openings. 3. Furnish openings and sealing materials through new floors, roofs, grating, partitions, and walls in accordance with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New Construction, or as specifically detailed on the Drawings. 4. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing floors, roofs, grating, partitions, and walls in accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing Construction, or as specifically detailed on the Drawings. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 6 SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT APPLICATIONS OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location C F I 7 Not Req 7 D F I (1) Not Req Not Req 7 C F 7 Not Req Through floors on grade above water table C F I 4 Not Req 4 C F I (1) 7 Not Req 7 C F I (1) 4 Not Req 7 Through slab on grade below water table F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req Through floors in washdown areas C I 4 4 C H (2) I (1) 4 3 4 F H (2) I (1) Not Req 3 7 Through walls where one side is a hazardous area C F I 7 Not Req 7 D F I (1) Not Req Not Req 7 C F 7 Not Req Through exterior wall below grade above water table C F I 7 Not Req 7 C D F I (1) 1 Not Req Not Req 1 F I (1) Not Req 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well above high water level) to dry area C F I 7 Not Req 7 C D F H (2) 1 Not Req Not Req 1 C F H (2) I (1) 7 Not Req 7 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well below high water level) to dry area F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req Through exterior wall above grade A B C 6 6 6 A B D H (2) 5 5 Not Req 5 C H (2) 5 4 Roof penetrations A 2 A 2 A 2 Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications A C 4 4 A C 4 4 A C F 4 4 Not Req 1)Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits. 2)Single pipe 3 IN and smaller or single conduit. 3)Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 IN. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Openings and Penetration in Construction 01 73 20 - 7 SCHEDULE B. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT APPLICATIONS OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY OPENING TYPE SEAL CATEGORY Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location B E 7 Not Req B (1) E (3) H (2) 7 Not Req 7 B (1) E (3) H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through floors on grade above water table B 7 B 7 B 7 Through slab on grade below water table E Not Req E Not Req E Not Req Through floors in washdown areas G 3 G H (2) 3 3 G H (2) 3 3 Through walls where one side is a hazardous area B E 7 Not Req B (1) B (3) E H (2) 7 1 Not Req 7 B (1) (3) E H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through exterior wall below grade above water table B 7 B (1) B (3) H (2) 7 1 7 B (1) (3) H (2) 7 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well above high water level) to dry area B E 7 Not Req B E H 1 Not Req 1 B (1) (3) E H (2) 7 Not Req 7 Through wall from tankage or wet well below high water level) to dry area E Not Req E Not Req E Not Req Through exterior wall above grade G 6 G (1) (3) H (2) 5 5 G (1) (3) H (2) 5 7 Roof penetrations G 2 G (1) (3) H (2) 2 2 G 2 Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications G 4 G (1) (3) H (2) 4 4 G (1) (3) H (2) 4 4 Grating openings and penetrations J 8 J 8 J 8 1)Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits. 2)Single pipe 3 IN and smaller or single conduit. 3)Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 IN. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 1 SECTION 01 73 29 – DEMOLITION, CUTTING, AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: Demolition, cutting, and patching of existing construction as required to accommodate proposed work. Protection and removal of items identified to be saved or reused. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): Guideline K, Containers for Recovered Non-flammable Fluorocarbon Refrigerants. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.6, Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1926—Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 4. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), U.S. Code of Federal Regulations CFR), Title 40: a. Part 61—National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. b. Part 82—Protection of Stratospheric Ozone. c. Part 273—Standards for Universal Waste Management. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ACM: Asbestos-containing material. B. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed building or structure or any part thereof. C. Modify: Provide all necessary material and labor to modify an existing item to the condition indicated or specified. D. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean, and reinstall equipment, including electrical, instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment fully functional, to the new location identified on the Drawings. E. Renovation: Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way. F. Salvage/Salvageable: Remove and deliver, to the specified location(s), the equipment, building materials, or other items so identified to be saved from destruction, damage, or waste; such property to remain that of Owner. Unless otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to Contractor. G. Universal Waste Lamp: In accordance with 40 CFR 273, the bulb or tube portion of an electric lighting device, examples of which include, but are not limited to, fluorescent, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 2 high-intensity discharge, neon, mercury vapor, high- pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps. H. Universal Waste Thermostat: A temperature control device that contains metallic mercury in an ampule attached to a bimetal sensing element, and mercury-containing ampules that have been removed from these temperature control devices in compliance with the requirements of 40 CFR 273. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for general requirements. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit proposed Demolition/Renovation Plan, in accordance with requirements specified herein, for acceptance before such Work is started. 2. Submit copies of any notifications, authorizations and permits required to perform the Work. 3. Submit a shipping receipt or bill of lading for all containers of ACM shipped. 4. Submit a shipping receipt or bill of lading for all universal waste shipped. 1.5 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. When applicable, demolition Work shall be accomplished in strict accordance with 29 CFR 1926-Subpart T. B. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractor’s safety requirements shall conform to ANSI A10.6. C. Furnish timely notification of this project to applicable federal, state, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61-Subpart M. 1.6 DEMOLITION/RENOVATION PLAN A. Demolition/Renovation Plan shall provide for safe conduct of the Work and shall include: 1. Detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation. 2. The Contractor’s planned sequence of operations, including coordination with other work in progress. 3. Procedures for removal and disposition of materials and equipment specified to be salvaged. 4. Disconnection schedule of utility services. 5. Storage plans for materials on site. 6. Identification of items to be salvaged, as directed by Owner. B. Include statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof deck, floors, walls, and framing members, and their suitability to perform as a safe working platform or, if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the Work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 3 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The Work of this Specification shall not commence until Contractor’s Demolition/Renovation Plan has been approved by Engineer. B. Include the Work of this Specification in the progress schedule, as specified in Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule. C. Areas in which the Work is to be accomplished will be indicated in the drawings and in accordance with the sequence of work specified in Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work and Operational Requirements. 1.8 USE OF EXPLOSIVES A. Use of explosives is not permitted. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION A. In accordance with applicable laws and regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE DEMOLISHED OR RENOVATED A.Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of new work. 1.Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work. 2.Remove masonry or concrete in small sections. B. Structures: 1. Existing above-grade structures indicated shall be removed to grade. 2. Core drill concrete slabs and other concrete improvements scheduled to remain in place below ground, or break holes at the structure’s lowest point to allow water to freely migrate through. C. Substructure: 1. Extract conflicting existing substructures when in conflict with proposed new construction. D. Utilities and Related Equipment: 1. Notify Owner or appropriate utilities to turn off affected services at least 48 hours before starting demolition or renovation activities. 2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by Engineer. 3. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the Drawings, notify Owner prior to further work in that area. 4. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location as determined by BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 4 the Owner. 5. Excavate and remove utility lines serving buildings to be demolished to 3 feet beyond the outside perimeter of the demolition. 6. Provide a permanent leak-proof closure for water and gas lines. 7. Plug sewer lines with concrete to a minimum plug length of 2 feet to prevent groundwater infiltration. E. Paving and Slabs: 1. Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated to a depth of 8 inches below existing adjacent grade. 2. Provide neat saw cuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated. F. Concrete: 1.Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining surfaces as specified. 2. Saw concrete along straight lines. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished Work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete. Where new concrete adjoins existing, the new Work shall abut or tie into the existing construction as indicated. 3.Protect remaining concrete from damage. 4.Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete. 5.Break out concrete after initial saw cuts in the event concrete thickness prevents cutting through. 6.Make openings by drilling holes around perimeter of opening and then chipping out the concrete where sawing is not possible. Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to remaining concrete. 7.Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 inch on all sides and build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete. 8.Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 inch from face of concrete and fill resulting holes with nonshrink grout. 9.Reinforcing steel that is cut and exposed: a.Remove to a depth of 2 inches. b.Fill void with epoxy patch. H.Removal of Existing Anchor Bolts or Other Protruding Elements: 1.Remove all protruding elements. 2.Remove to a depth of 1/4 inch from finished surface. 3.Fill void with epoxy patch. I. Patching: 1. Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished Work, patch and repair to match adjacent finished surfaces as to texture and finish. 2. Where new Work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new Work. 3. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and shall include: a.Fill holes and depressions left as a result of removals in existing masonry and concrete walls with an approved patching material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 5 J. Electrical: 1. Cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials a minimum of 3/4 inch below final finished surface. 2. When removing designated equipment, conduit and wiring may require rework to maintain service to other equipment. 3. Rework existing circuits or provide temporary circuits as necessary during renovation to maintain service to existing lighting and equipment not scheduled to be renovated. Existing equipment and circuiting shown are based upon limited field surveys. Verify existing conditions, make all necessary adjustments, and record the Work on the Record Drawings. This shall include, but is not limited to, swapping and other adjustments to branch circuits and relocation of branch circuit breakers within panelboards as required to accomplish the finished work. 4. Raceways and cabling not scheduled for reuse. 5. Inaccessibly Concealed: Cut off and abandon in place. 6. Exposed or Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Remove. 7. Raceways and Cabling Scheduled for Future Use: Cap/seal and tag. 8. Relocating Equipment: Extend existing wiring or run new wiring from the source. 9. Where the existing raceway is concealed, the outlet box shall be cleaned, and a blank cover plate installed. 10. Where the concealed raceway is uncovered remove raceway (or extended to new location if appropriate). 11. Provide new typewritten panelboard circuit directory cards. K. Universal Waste Lamps and Thermostats: Manage, contain, package, and label in strict accordance with 40 CFR 273. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Building Occupancy: Refer to Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work and Operational Requirements for specific requirements related to concurrent occupancy of existing facilities. B. Dust and Debris Control: 1. Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. 2. Vacuum and dust the Work area daily. 3. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to vehicular traffic. C. Traffic Control Signs: Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered around removal Work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. D. Existing Work: 1. Survey the site and examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent of the Work before beginning any demolition or renovation. 2. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items scheduled to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of Owner; any Contractor-damaged items BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 6 shall be repaired or replaced as directed by Engineer. 3. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between removal of existing exterior surfaces and installation of new to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 4. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of or during performance of the Work. Responsibility for additional structural elements or increasing the strength of existing structural elements as may be required as a result of any Work performed under this Contract shall be that of the Contractor. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have Engineer acceptance. 5. Do not overload pavements to remain. E. Facilities: 1. Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. 2. Protect all facility elements not scheduled for demolition. 3. Provide interior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities. F. Protection of Personnel: 1. During demolition, continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. 2. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner’s personnel and the general public from injury due to demolition Work. 3. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner’s personnel and the general public to occupied portions of the structure. 3.3 BURNING A. The use of burning at the Site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted. 3.4 RELOCATIONS A. Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Clean all items to be relocated prior to reinstallation, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged items with new undamaged items as approved by Engineer. 3.5 BACKFILL A. Do not use demolition debris as backfill material. B. Fill excavations, open basements and other hazardous openings to existing ground level or foundation level of new construction in accordance with Sections 31 05 13 – Topsoil and 31 23 23 – Fill. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 7 3.6 TITLE TO MATERIALS A. Owner shall have first right of refusal for all items removed. B. Except for Owner-selected salvaged equipment and materials, all items designated to be removed shall become the property of Contractor: 3.7 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL A. Do not remove equipment and materials without acceptance of Contractor’s Demolition/Renovation Plan by Engineer. B. Salvage equipment and material to the maximum extent possible. C. Remove salvaged items selected by Owner as the property of Owner in a manner to prevent damage, and pack or crate to protect the items from damage while in storage. Properly identify containers as to contents. D. Repair or replace, at the discretion of Engineer, items damaged during removal or storage. E. Deliver salvaged items that are selected by Owner as the property of Owner to a storage site as directed on the Site. F. Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, property scheduled to become Contractor’s property after Engineer’s authorization to begin demolition. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site. 3.8 REUSE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Remove and store materials and equipment selected by Owner to be reused or relocated to prevent damage. Reinstall as the Work progresses. B. Properly store and maintain equipment and materials in same condition as when removed. C. Store equipment and material designated to be reused in a location designated by Owner. D. Equipment and material designated to be reused shall be cleaned, serviced and checked for proper operability before being put back into service. E. Engineer will determine condition of equipment and materials prior to removal. F. Salvaged items shall be delivered to Owner free from excess process material and pressure washed, if possible, without damaging the item. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 01 73 29 - 8 3.9 UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to remain in place, shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with applicable permits and regulations. B. Combustible material shall be disposed of off the Site. C. Universal Waste Lamps and Thermostats: Dispose of in strict accordance with 40 CFR 273. D. Sludge or biosolids or items containing or covered with biosolids, sludge or other process material shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable regulations for disposal of wastewater biosolids and sludge material. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Debris and rubbish shall be removed from vaults and similar excavations. Debris and rubbish shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 1 SECTION 01 91 00 – FACILITY COMMISSIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. References. 2. Definitions. 3. Commissioning description. 4. Submittals. 5. Closeout submittals. 6. Quality assurance. 7. Qualifications. 8. Commissioning services. 9. Commissioning responsibilities. 10. Commissioning meetings. 11. Commissioning reports. 12. Sequencing. 13. Scheduling. 14. Maintenance materials. 15. Test equipment. 16. Examination. 17. Implementation of verification checklists, startup forms, and functional and performance testing procedures. 18. Function and performance test methods. 19. Deficiencies and test acceptances. 20. Demonstration and training. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 – Proposal Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work and Operational Requirements. 3. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 4. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements. 5. Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. 1.2 REFERENCES – NOT USED 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor: General construction firm contracted with Owner to construct Project. B. Engineer: Consulting engineering firm retained by Owner to perform Project design and construction administration services. The term Engineer includes any individuals directly employed by or subcontracted with engineering firm. C. Owner: Entity contracting for construction services. 1.4 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION A. Commissioning: Systematic process of ensuring systems perform interactively according to design intent and Owner's operational needs. Commissioning process encompasses and BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 2 coordinates system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, functional and performance testing and training, and verification of actual performance. B. Commissioning Intent: 1. Verify equipment and systems are installed, fully functional, and controlled according to manufacturer's instructions, industry accepted minimum standards, and Contract Documents. 2. Verify equipment and systems receive adequate operational checkout by Contractor. 3. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 4. Verify complete operation and maintenance documentation is delivered to Owner. 5. Verify Owner's operating and maintenance personnel are adequately trained. C. Equipment and Systems to be Commissioned, including but not limited to: 1. Modulating valves. 2. Process control and instrumentation systems. D. Commissioning does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide finished and fully functioning Project. E. Commissioning Process Overview and General Order of Commissioning Tasks: 1. Planning Phase: a. Commissioning begins with initial commissioning meeting. b. Conduct progress commissioning meetings throughout construction to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities and to resolve problems. c. Equipment documentation is submitted to Engineer during normal submittals with detailed startup procedures. d. Contractor develops specific equipment and system functional and performance test procedures. Manufacturers, suppliers, and the Contractor review, approve, coordinate, manage, and conduct procedures. 1) Functional and performance test procedures will be developed by Contractor at 60 days prior to test dates. Engineer shall have 30 days to review test procedures and provide feedback to Contractor. 2. Commissioning Phase: a. Contractor executes functional acceptance test, operational readiness test, and software test procedures with support from equipment and system installers and documents the results. Engineer verifies that functional and performance tests and any other procedures were completed according to accepted procedures. b. Items of noncompliance in material, installation, calibration, configuration, or setup are corrected at Contractor's expense, and system is retested. c. Engineer reviews operation and maintenance documentation for completeness. d. Engineer reviews training procedures provided by equipment and system installers. Contractor coordinates training schedules with Engineer acceptance and executes training. Engineer verifies training was completed. e. Deferred testing is conducted as specified. 3. Startup and Demonstration Phase: a. Contractor returns interim conditions used to facilitate testing to normal operating conditions and simulated signals are reset to live values in preparation for Startup. b. The following equipment is started up in a logical sequence: 1) Electrical equipment ancillary systems. 2) Control valves. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 3 c. Contractor operates the entire system with Owner’s assistance for 100 hours to complete the Functional Demonstration Test as specified in Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. d. 30 Day Acceptance Test - Owner operates the entire system with Contractor’s assistance for 30 consecutive days to complete the Demonstration Period as specified in Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements and simultaneous Acceptance Test as specified in Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA) System. Owner will provide operations personnel for operation of the system during this period. 4. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals to Engineer for acceptance according to procedures specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Qualification Data: Submit the following prior to the Initial Commissioning Meeting: 1. Name and resume of Contractor’s personnel responsible for commissioning the Project, including name, email, telephone number, credentials, education, work experience, etc.. a. Reference Paragraph 1.8 - Qualifications. 2. Detailed description of three commissioning projects of similar size and complexity, completed by the person performing the commissioning on the Project within past five years. Include names, telephone numbers, and emails of Owner's and Engineer’s project manager. 3. The Contractor’s personnel responsible for commissioning shall be approved a minimum of 30 days prior to the Engineer scheduling the Initial Commissioning Meeting identified in paragraph 1.11.C, below. C. Furnish preliminary operation and maintenance data manuals to Engineer according to Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements for each piece of equipment or system indicated to be commissioned. 1. Submit required preliminary manuals within timeframe specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Preliminary manuals must be accepted prior to beginning commissioning and/or training activities for each piece of equipment or system. 3. In addition to items specified in Section 01 70 00 and individual Specification Sections, operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following: a. Supplemental procedures and checklists prepared by equipment and system installers to accommodate Project conditions. b. Sensor and actuator calibration procedures. c. Factory test reports. D. Furnish a Certificate of Proper Installation (COPI) at the completion of installation of each individual piece of equipment prior to beginning commissioning. Contractor shall sign COPI along with the manufacturer’s authorized representative. Contractor and manufacturer shall certify that: 1. Equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, calibrated, and lubricated. 2. Equipment has been installed with proper internal clearances and clearances to adjacent equipment and structures. 3. Equipment is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Equipment as installed shall not void the warranty. 5. Equipment as installed is ready to be operated by others. 6. Equipment as installed will reliably perform the function for which it is installed. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 4 7. Equipment is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions. E. Furnish a Certificate of Completion of Field Services at the completion of commissioning of each individual piece of equipment. Contractor shall sign Certificate of Completion of Field Services along with the manufacturer’s authorized representative. Contractor and manufacturer shall certify that: 1. Equipment operates within the allowable limits for vibration. 2. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning. 3. Control logic for startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly functioning. 4. Equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and Contract Documents. 5. Equipment has been tested and is functioning as intended. F. Furnish field service reports documenting a complete list of activities completed during all site visits. Include the following: 1. Completed field checkout sheets. G. Furnish completed checklists, startup plans, and functional and performance test procedures to Engineer for acceptance with all fields completed and signed. Include all applicable field notes and supporting documentation. H. Submit written Training Plans to Engineer for acceptance prior to scheduling and conducting training, including the following: 1. Equipment number(s) and specification section number included in training session. 2. Intended audience. 3. Location of training. 4. Objectives. 5. Subjects covered. 6. Duration of training on each subject. 7. Instructor for each subject and instructor’s qualifications/resume. 8. Instructional methods to be used, including what portion of training will be completed in a classroom or in the field and what portion of training will be observation-only or hands-on. 9. Training materials (if separate from O&M manual). 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements contains requirements for closeout procedures. B. Engineer will review and accept submittals for conformance to Contract Documents as related to the commissioning process to aid in the development of functional and performance testing procedures and to verify compliance with equipment Specifications. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit final operation and maintenance manuals as specified in individual equipment and system Specifications. In addition to items specified in Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements, include the following in final manuals: 1. Completed Certificate of Proper Installation (COPI). 2. Completed Certificate of Completion of Field Services. 3. Field service reports. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 5 4. Completed (as-tested) checklists, startup plans, and functional and performance testing procedures. 5. Detailed description of any corrections or deficiencies observed during commissioning and record of where deficiency or correction is documented. 6. Detailed description of any deviations in the accepted equipment or system from the requirements as per the Contract Documentations and where deviation acceptance is documented. 7. All data collected during commissioning. 8. Accepted training plan and training documentation. 9. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, and commissioning process changes. 10. Brief description of verification method used as well as observations and conclusions from testing for each commissioned piece of equipment and system. D. Training Submittals: 1. Completed sign-in sheet (provided by Contractor) for all training sessions, including the date, time, location, equipment included, and a list of all attendees. 2. Training videos as required per Paragraph 3.5. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work according to specified standards and guidelines. B. Perform Work according to State of Texas regulations. C. Maintain one copy of each document on Site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Commissioning Role: Individual employed by Contractor specializing in performing Work of this Section. 1. Minimum of five years of documented experience performing commissioning and startup of similar municipal water infrastructure projects. 2. Experienced in operation and troubleshooting flow control systems, electrical, and instrumentation and control systems. 3. Experienced in monitoring and analyzing system operation using control system trending or standalone data-logging equipment. 4. Excellent verbal and written communication skills, highly organized, and able to work with both management and installers. B. Instructor: Instructors providing training on specified equipment and/or systems. 1. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience with the equipment or system. 2. Instructors must be proficient and experienced in conducting training of the type required and must have successfully conducted similar training courses. 3. Submit each instructor’s résumé and specific details of instructor’s operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific equipment for which instructor will provide training to demonstrate their qualifications. Provide services of replacement instructor with acceptable qualifications if Engineer does not accept qualifications of proposed instructor. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 6 1.9 COMMISSIONING SERVICES A. Contractor shall provide personnel responsible for commissioning the Project acceptable to Owner to perform specified commissioning. The personnel responsible for commissioning shall support the project as necessary for the Contractor to complete their responsibilities in line with the Project schedule. 1.10 COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Responsibilities indicated for Owner, Engineer, and Contractor are provided only to clarify commissioning process. B. Engineer Responsibilities: 1. Perform Site observation of each system immediately before system startup. 2. Furnish design narratives and sequence documentation required for commissioning. 3. Clarify operation and control of commissioned equipment when Specifications, control drawings, or equipment documentation is not sufficient. 4. Coordinate resolution of design issues affecting system performance identified during commissioning. 5. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, according to Contract Documents. 6. Prepare and submit final design intent documentation reflecting installed conditions for inclusion in operation and maintenance manuals. 7. Review all commissioning related submittals from Contractor for acceptance, including: a. Checklists and startup plans for pieces of equipment to be commissioned. b. Functional and performance test procedure forms for equipment. c. Operation and maintenance manuals. d. Completed checklists for major pieces of equipment. e. System startup reports. f. Completed functional and performance test procedures and forms. g. All other startup documentation specified herein. 8. Witness tests for commissioning of equipment and systems. 9. Review equipment warranties to ensure Owner's responsibilities are defined. 10. Return to Site minimum of three months before expiration of overall Project warranty period. a. Review with Owner's personnel the current equipment and system operation and condition of outstanding issues related to original and seasonal commissioning. b. Interview Owner's personnel to identify problems or concerns regarding equipment and system operation. c. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording changes in operation and maintenance manuals. d. Identify deficiencies covered by warranty or original construction contract. e. Assist Owner's personnel to develop reports, documents, and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. 11. Recommend Owner acceptance of the commissioning Work when Engineer deems it to be complete. 12. Accept requests for deferred or seasonal testing activities that could not be completed during commissioning. Witness testing and review results submitted by the Contractor. Inspect and document deficiencies noted for resolution. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Basic Contractor Responsibilities: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 7 a. Communicate requirements for commissioning submittal data, operation and maintenance data, commissioning tasks, and training to each supplier and subcontractor for equipment and systems indicated to be commissioned. b. Facilitate coordination of commissioning work. c. Attend commissioning meetings. d. Prepare: 1) Checklists and startup plans for pieces of equipment to be commissioned. 2) Functional and performance test procedure forms for equipment. e. Cooperate with Engineer and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. f. Require manufacturers to review commissioning test procedures for equipment installed or provided by manufacturer. g. Furnish test equipment to complete equipment and system tests, including any proprietary or non-proprietary equipment. h. Furnish qualified personnel to assist in completing commissioning. i. Furnish manufacturers’ qualified field representatives as specified in individual Specification Sections to assist in completing commissioning. j. Ensure equipment and system installers execute commissioning responsibilities according to checklists, startup plans, and functional and performance test procedures provided by the Engineer, Contract Documents, and Progress Schedule. k. Prepare and submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Update original sequences of operation reflecting actual installation and commissioning. l. Ensure equipment and system installers execute any seasonal and/or deferred commissioning and testing prior to completion of the Project’s warranty period. m. Ensure equipment and system installers correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operation and maintenance manuals and record documents for issues identified during testing. 2. Basic Commissioning Responsibilities: a. Coordinate and direct commissioning Work. b. Coordinate execution of commissioning plans. c. Schedule commissioning Work with Engineer for inclusion in Progress Schedule and develop and update Commissioning Schedule as per Paragraph 1.14. d. Attend and actively participate in commissioning meetings. e. Provide commissioning submittals required to perform commissioning tasks. f. Develop and complete verification tests, checklists, and startup plans. g. Execute functional and performance test procedures in cooperation with equipment and system installers. h. Attend selected Project progress meetings and all pre-installation meetings. Review corresponding meeting minutes. Resolve potential conflicts with commissioning activities. i. Inspect equipment and system installations for completeness prior to manufacturer’s installation inspections. j. Document that equipment and systems are installed and perform according to design intent and Contract Documents. k. Notify Engineer of deficiencies. l. Coordinate Owner's personnel training and videography in accordance with Paragraph 3.5 – Demonstration and Testing. m. Coordinate and supervise all required testing and any re-testing required to confirm deficiency corrections are complete. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 8 n. Oversee and approve content and adequacy of Owner's personnel training. o. Review operation and maintenance manuals. p. Compile commissioning record and testing data for inclusion in final operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Detailed Commissioning Responsibilities: a. Execute and document testing, cleaning, and flushing of each system. Include documentation in operation and maintenance manuals. b. Execute functional and performance testing of control systems and prepare them for operations. c. Create functional and performance trend logs and monitor data to verify equipment and system performance. d. Coordinate, witness, and assist as necessary to complete all functional and performance tests performed by equipment and system installers. 1) Coordinate retesting until satisfactory performance is achieved. 2) Perform actual functional and performance testing on equipment as specified in individual Specification Sections. e. Maintain deficiency and resolution log and separate testing record. Submit progress reports and test results with recommended and completed actions to Engineer. f. Review documentation from factory performance tests. Determine what additional testing and documentation is required to comply with Contract Documents and develop a complete Factory Performance Test submittal. g. Prepare preventative maintenance plans, detailed operating plans, and record documents as specified. 4. Contractor may not: a. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. b. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. c. Assume duties of Engineer. D. Owner Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for Owner's personnel to attend commissioning activities and training sessions according to commissioning plan. 2. Accept commissioning Work completion. 3. Provide operations personnel during Demonstration Period to assist in operation of the system and provide process decisions affecting facility performance. 1.11 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements contains requirements for progress meetings. B. Engineer will arrange meetings, prepare agendas with copies for participants, and preside at meetings. C. Initial Commissioning Meeting: 1. Engineer will schedule meeting within 60 days after start of construction of the first process mechanical structure or system. 2. Attendance Required: Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and SCADA Integrator. Require attendance by installers of the following equipment and systems indicated to be commissioned, including, but not limited to: a. Electrical equipment and systems. b. Control valves. 3. Agenda: a. Designation of personnel representing parties for commissioning activities. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 9 b. Review commissioning process and responsibilities. c. Review commissioning plan development procedures. d. Review required commissioning submittals. e. Review Contractor’s initial commissioning schedule. D. Commissioning Progress Meetings: 1. Engineer will schedule meetings as required throughout progress of the Work. a. Beginning two months before commissioning and startup activities, meetings will be scheduled at maximum monthly intervals. b. During commissioning and startup activities, meetings will be scheduled at maximum bi-monthly intervals, or weekly as required. 2. Attendance Required: Engineer, Contractor, and any subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, or manufacturers necessary to support the topics being discussed. 3. Agenda: a. Coordination of commissioning activities. b. Commissioning deficiency resolution. c. Review of the Contractor’s commissioning schedule as defined in Paragraph 1.14. d. Planning for future commissioning activities. E. Engineer will record meeting minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants and those affected by decisions made. 1.12 COMMISSIONING REPORTS A. Commissioning Reports: Submit monthly reports to Engineer. Include the following. 1. Progress reports. 2. Scheduling changes. 3. Reports of specific commissioning activities. 4. Testing progress. 5. Deficiencies and deficiency resolution reports. B. Completed “As-Tested” Checklists and Startup Forms. C. Completed “As-Tested” Functional and Performance Test Procedures: 1. Completed Engineer-provided functional and performance test procedures, including all additional documentation called for in the procedures. 1.13 SEQUENCING A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work contains requirements for sequencing. B. Sequence Work to complete commissioning, functional and performance testing, demonstration, and Owner's personnel training before Substantial Completion. Complete the following for each piece of equipment and system indicated to be commissioned to achieve functional completion: 1. Complete and sign startup and checklist documentation. 2. Complete functional and performance testing. 3. Complete training of Owner personnel. 4. Submit final operation and maintenance data manuals. 5. Correct identified deficiencies or obtain acceptance by Owner to exclude deficiencies from functional completion. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform commissioning for other season within six months of Substantial Completion. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 10 D. For equipment or systems where commissioning is delayed by Owner occupancy requirements or unforeseen conditions, perform commissioning as specified for seasonal operation equipment. 1.14 SCHEDULING A. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule contains requirements for scheduling. B. Schedule Work to allow adequate time for commissioning activities. C. Identify commissioning milestones, activities, and durations on a separate Commissioning Schedule. 1. Identify the following for each piece of equipment and system including: a. Operation and maintenance manual submittal (preliminary and final). b. Training plan submittal. c. Spare parts turnover. d. Asset management spreadsheet turnover. e. Supplier site visits related to commissioning, including inspecting equipment installation to issue Certificate of Proper Installation, overseeing functional and performance testing, providing training, and other site visits as required. f. Verification check and startup. g. Functional and performance test. h. Demonstration and training sessions. i. Commissioning completion. 2. Identify SCADA system testing as required per Section 40 90 02 – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. 3. Identify the Demonstration Period as required per Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements. 4. The initial schedule shall be presented at the first Commissioning Progress Meeting. The schedule shall be updated by the Contractor for each subsequent Commissioning Progress Meeting. 1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements contains requirements for maintenance materials. B. Furnish one set of manufacturer's proprietary test equipment, tools, and instruments required to complete commissioning. 1. Deliver test equipment to Owner after completion of functional and performance test. Obtain signed receipt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Testing Equipment: Calibrated within last year; of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and measure system performance within the following tolerances unless otherwise specified for individual equipment or systems. 1. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus or minus 2.0 percent of measured value range. 2. Flow Sensors: Accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of measured value range BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 11 B. Recalibrate test equipment according to manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. 1. Affix calibration tags to test equipment or furnish calibration certificates upon request. C. Equipment Furnished by Contractor and Remaining Property of Contractor: 1. Standard testing equipment required to perform verification check and startup and required functional and performance testing. 2. Data-logging equipment and software. 3. Two-way radios for personnel performing commissioning. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment and systems are installed according to individual Specification Sections. B. Verify utility and power connections are complete and services operational. 3.2 IMPLEMENTATION OF CHECKLISTS, STARTUP FORMS, AND FUNCTIONAL AND PERFORMANCE TESTING PROCEDURES A. Notify Engineer and Owner and schedule all commissioning and startup activities with each party required to participate a minimum of four weeks in advance. Confirm schedule with Engineer and Owner two weeks prior to activities being conducted. B. Allow Engineer and Owner to witness testing activities. 1. At their discretion, Engineer will witness procedures for equipment to be commissioned. For multiple units, Engineer will witness procedures on 50 percent, but not less than one of each type of unit. a. Equipment and systems include those identified in subsection 1.4.C. 2. Owner shall have the option to witness all testing. C. Verification Check, Startup, and Functional and Performance Test Procedures: 1. Perform verification check, startup, and functional and performance testing, and any other verification checks or tests required by equipment and component manufacturers. 2. Complete entire form or procedure for each piece of equipment or system indicated to be commissioned. 3. Complete each form or procedure in sequence performed by party assigned to each task. 4. Record completion of each task. Indicate results of task where required and record any anomalies or deviations observed in the field. Sign and date plan by individual performing task. 5. Identify items not completed successfully. 6. Sign and date plan indicating completion of entire checklist, plan, or procedure. 7. Submit executed plan to Engineer within two days of completion. D. Notify Engineer of completion of verification check and startup activities and submit verification check and startup reports for acceptance. E. Deficiencies and Acceptances: 1. Engineer will review completed reports and procedures and issue deficiency report or acceptance. 2. Correct deficiencies and resubmit updated form with statement indicating corrections made for Engineer acceptance. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 12 3. Repeat process until all reports and procedures are accepted. 4. Costs for incomplete commissioning items that later cause deficiencies or delays may be charged to party responsible for incomplete item. F. Complete the following before performing functional and performance tests: 1. Verification check and startup. 2. Receive acceptance of completed Verification and Startup Reports from Engineer and Owner. G. Contractor will witness and document results of functional and performance tests. H. Conduct functional and performance tests as specified herein and in individual Specification Sections. I. Demonstrate that each piece of equipment and system is operating according to documented design intent and Contract Documents. 1. Conduct testing proceeding from components, to subsystems, to systems. 2. Bring equipment and systems to condition capable full dynamic operation. 3. Verify full functionality of control systems, including all modes of operation, alarms, and interlocks. 4. Verify performance of individual components and systems. 5. Verify function and performance of interactions between systems. 6. Identify and correct all areas of deficient performance. J. Operate each piece of equipment and system through each specified mode of operation including seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warmup, cool-down, partial load, full load, and other conditions specified in individual Specification Sections. 1. Verify each sequence in sequences of operation. 2. Test for proper responses to power failure, freezing, overheating, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc., as identified in the control narratives and strategies, and other abnormal conditions. 3.3 FUNCTIONAL AND PERFORMANCE TEST METHODS A. Simulated Conditions: Simulating testing conditions may be conducted to check functionality but will not relieve the Contractor from proving overall functionality and performance under actual operating conditions before final acceptance of any equipment or system will be given. Engineer must accept all simulated testing conditions. B. Overwritten Values: Overwriting sensor values to simulate conditions may only be used if acceptable to the Engineer. C. Simulated Signals: When a transducer or transmitter does not include internal functionality to simulate an analog output, using a signal generator to create simulated signals to test and calibrate transducers automatic controls is generally recommended instead of using sensors as signal generators with simulated conditions or overwritten values. D. Altering Setpoints: Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a specific sequence is acceptable. Reset setpoint after completing test. E. Indirect Indicators: Using indirect indicators for responses or performance is permitted only after visually and directly verifying and documenting indirect readings through control system representing actual conditions and responses over tested parameter range. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 13 F. Perform each function and test under conditions simulating actual conditions as close as is practically possible. 1. Provide materials, temporary system modifications, and other items or steps necessary to produce flows, pressures, temperatures, and other responses to execute test according to specified conditions. 2. At completion of test, return modified equipment and systems to pretest condition. 3.4 DEFICIENCIES AND TEST ACCEPTANCES A. Deficiencies: 1. Contractor shall record and report deficiencies to the Owner and Engineer. 2. Minor deficiencies may be corrected during tests at the Engineer's discretion. Deficiency and resolution will be documented on procedure form. 3. Failure of the Contractor to attend a scheduled commissioning activity will be considered a deficiency. 4. When a deficiency is identified, Engineer will discuss issue with Contractor. a. When party executing test accepts responsibility to correct deficiency: 1) Contractor documents deficiency and submits deficiency report to responsible party believed to be responsible for deficiency. 2) Contractor receives and documents responsible party's response. 3) Responsible party corrects deficiency, signs statement of correction on deficiency form certifying equipment is ready for retesting and submits form. 4) Contractor submits completed deficiency form to Engineer. 5) Contractor reschedules test, and test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved. b. When responsible party disputes deficiency or responsibility for deficiency: 1) Contractor documents response from the alleged responsible party. 2) Contractor submits deficiency report with the alleged responsible party’s response to Engineer, party executing test, and party believed to be responsible for deficiency. 3) Contractor negotiates resolution with all parties involved to provide equipment, components, and systems in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4) Contractor documents resolution process. 5) When resolution is decided, appropriate party corrects deficiency, signs statement of correction on deficiency form certifying equipment is ready for retesting and submits form to 6) Contractor submits completed deficiency form to Engineer. 7) Contractor reschedules test, and test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved. B. Retesting Costs: 1. When deficiency is discovered requiring rescheduling or retesting: a. Owner may deduct cost incurred from witnessing retesting efforts from final payment due to Contractor. C. Provide written report to Engineer before each scheduled commissioning meeting concerning status of each deficiency. Include explanations of disagreements with resolution proposals for each discrepancy. 1. Engineer will retain original deficiency forms until end of Project. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 14 D. Manufacturing Defects: Unless required otherwise in individual Specification Sections, when ten percent but not less than three identical pieces of equipment or equipment with only small size or capacity differences fail to perform to Contract Document requirements due to manufacturing defects, all identical units may be considered defective by Owner. 1. Within one week of notice from Owner, examine all other identical units and record findings. Submit findings to Owner within two weeks of original notice. 2. Within two weeks of original notification, provide signed and dated written explanation of problem, cause of defect, and proposed solutions meeting Contract Document requirements. Include equipment submittals supporting solution. 3. Owner will determine whether replacement or repair of all identical units is required. 4. Install two examples of proposed solution. Owner will test installations for up to one week before deciding if solution is acceptable. 5. Upon acceptance, replace or repair all identical items at Contractor's expense. Extend warranty accordingly if original equipment warranty had begun. 6. Complete repairs or replacements with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. E. Test Acceptance: Contractor notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on functional and performance test forms. 1. Contractor submits completed standard forms to Engineer. 2. Engineer recommends acceptance of each test to Owner. 3. Owner gives final acceptance for each test, as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements contains requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate equipment and systems and train Owner's personnel as specified in individual equipment and system Specifications. 1. Engineer will interview Owner's personnel to determine special needs and areas where training will be most valuable. 2. Owner and Engineer will determine type and extent of training for each commissioned piece of equipment and system. a. Training duration is specified in individual Specification Sections. 3. Contractor will communicate and coordinate training requirements to equipment and system installers and manufacturers with training responsibilities. 4. Training shall include both classroom and field instruction. C. Owner’s personnel will complete a post-training evaluation form to assess the value of the training provided by the Contractor. Post-training evaluation forms will be collected directly by the Engineer or Owner following the completion of a training session. 1. Engineer will make recommendation to Owner regarding acceptance of training based on the feedback received from the post-training evaluation forms. 2. Should training be deemed unacceptable by the Engineer’s review of the evaluation forms, Contractor shall be required to repeat the respective training at no additional cost to the Owner. An updated Training Plan shall be submitted and accepted prior to scheduling the repeat training sessions detailing what changes to the training session will be made to ensure the new training will be satisfactory. D. Scheduling Requirements for Training: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Facility Commissioning 01 91 00 - 15 1. A minimum of four (4) weeks’ notice is required to schedule any training session. Training sessions may only be scheduled once the preliminary operation and maintenance data manual and Training Plan have been accepted for the respective system. Confirm dates with Owner two (2) weeks prior to training being conducted. 2. Training shall be scheduled to occur concurrently with the implementation of the Functional and Performance Test Procedures, such that the equipment has been authorized for full use and may be operated during the training. 3. Individual training sessions shall not exceed four (4) hours in duration. Should more than four (4) hours of training be required, training shall be split into multiple sessions. 4. A minimum of two (2) redundant training sessions will be required for some sessions to accommodate the Owner’s shift schedules. Overlapping training sessions are not acceptable. 5. Redundant training sessions will be required for the following equipment: a. 40 90 02 - Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. b. Redundant training sessions shall be scheduled on alternating weeks to accommodate shift schedules. c. Training shall be scheduled and completed between 8 am and 5 pm on business days. E. For primary equipment training: 1. Require SCADA Integrator to provide short discussion of equipment control as part of training session. F. Contractor shall provide professional videography services, including post-production editing, recording of both classroom and field portions of training, and documenting Q&A sessions, for each training session. 1. Where redundant sessions are provided for a single piece of equipment, only one session needs to be recorded. 2. Post-production editing shall include removal of all non-essential audio and video and shall separate classroom and field portions of the training into individual chapters. Provide a sample video for acceptance prior to producing and submitting project training videos. 3. Should a recording be unacceptable to the Owner due to poor sound quality, image quality, etc., training shall be repeated and re-recorded until a suitable recording is provided at no additional expense to the Owner. 4. Final delivery method of the recordings (on DVD or submitted electronically, preferred file type, etc.) shall be as requested by Owner. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DIVISION 03 CONCRETE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies normal weight, cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Material Certifications: For each product or material indicated in Part 2 Products,” excluding formwork. B. Design Mixture: For each concrete mixture submit: 1. Mix design proportions and characteristics. 2. Certifications indicating conformance of aggregate and cementitious materials. 3. Admixture data sheets. 4. Field test data or trial batch mixture data to validate specified compressive strength in accordance with ACI 301, latest edition. C. Reinforcing bar layout drawing with bar lists clearly marked and referenced to the Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Comply with ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete,” including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. “General Requirements.” 2. “Formwork and Formwork Accessories.” 3. “Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports.” 4. “Concrete Mixtures.” 5. “Handling, Placing, and Constructing.” D. Comply with ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 2 1. Form ties shall leave no material within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2. For fluid bearing and below grade walls, provide single tie rods with midpoint washer to prevent water seepage. Systems that result in a through wall hole are not permitted. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Supports: 1. Unexposed Surface: CRSI Class 3 – No Protection. 2. Exposed Surface: CRSI Class 1 – Maximum Protection – uniform high density polyethylene (plastic) or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP). Plastic protected wire bar supports are not allowed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: 1. Cement: a. Type I or I/II Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C150. b. Type IL blended hydraulic cement, conforming to ASTM C595. c. Type GU hydraulic cement, conforming to ASTM C1157. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F or C. No more than 25 percent of the cement may be replaced with fly ash. If fly ash is not available, then provide a straight cement mix. B. Coarse Aggregate: 1. In conformance with ASTM C33, uniformly graded, with a maximum size as indicated in “Concrete Mixtures.” 2. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. C. Fine Aggregate: Washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones; conforming to ASTM C33. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1602 Table 2. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 3 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Repair Materials: Pre-packaged, low-shrink, non-slump, non-metallic, quick setting patching mortar, as approved by the manufacturer for each application. 1. Sikatop 123 by Sika Corporation. 2. Five Start Structural Concrete by Five Star Products, Inc. 3. Approved equal. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion. D. Zinc Richer Primer: Coat aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete. Primer shall be Tneme-Zinc or approved equal. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Waterproof Sheet: In accordance with ASTM C171. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1602 Table 2. E. Membrane-Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: Use Min. 28-Day Compressive Strength (psi) Max. Size of Coarse Aggregate Max. Water/ Cement Ratio Max Slump in.) General 4000 1-1/2” 0.45 5* (+/-1”) Pipe blocking, lean concrete 1500 1-1/2” 0.70 --- Slump may be increased to 8 inches with the addition of a HRWR. C. Air Content: 1. Air entrain exposed concrete within range permitted by ACI 301 for Exposure Class F1. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 4 2. Do not allow entrapped air to exceed 3 percent in floor slabs to receive troweled finish. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Fabricate reinforcement steel to provide lapped connections, bends, and transitions in reinforcement as required for continuity of the typical reinforcement specified on the Drawings. 2. Unless otherwise detailed, intersecting wall and/or beam reinforcement shall extend to the far face and terminate in a standard hook. Reinforcement at the outside face of corners shall be continuous or provide tension lap splices at each side of the corner. B. Do not weld reinforcement. 3.3 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Purposefully roughen joints to a 1/4-inch amplitude and clean. B. Construction Joints: Locate joints as indicated or as approved by Owner’s Representative. C. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, and as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Additional water may only be added to concrete prior to placement and only at Project Site. Slump shall be evaluated prior to and after the addition of all water. Do not take strength cylinders until after addition of all water. 1. Quantity of water shall not exceed the amount withheld at the batch plant. Quantity withheld shall be indicated on the batch ticket. Addition of water shall not result in a slump or water-cement ratio greater than that specified. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 5 C. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 5 feet. With HRWR concrete may free fall a maximum of 10 feet. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.5 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish or nonslip broom finish. Except as indicated below, apply a final “light float” finish to the surface as the concrete hardens. Surface shall have a uniform granular texture and shall meet the straightness requirements. D. Trowel Finish: Apply a normal steel trowel finish to interior surfaces exposed to view and grouted surfaces in junction boxes. E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete sidewalk and ramp surfaces. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. No Finish: After forms are removed, repair or patch tie-holes and defects. Otherwise, no additional finish is required. Apply to surfaces which are not visible from the inside or outside of the completed structure or less than 12 inches below finish grade (i.e. back of retaining walls below embankment, etc.). B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast surface texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. Apply to surfaces exposed to view and 12 inches below finish grade. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 301. Additionally, comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb./sq. ft. x h before and during finishing BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 6 operations. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least 7 days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: a. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 3.9 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Repair materials and surface preparation shall be completed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative prior to beginning any demolition of defective area. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Grouting 03 60 00 - 1 SECTION 03 60 00 - GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rapid curing epoxy grout. 2. Non-shrink cementations grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. American Society of Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 3. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C191 - Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle. 5. ASTM C307 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 6. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 7. ASTM C531 - Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 8. ASTM C579 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 9. ASTM C827 - Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. 10. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). C. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Concrete Research Division (CRD): 1. CRD C621 - Non-Shrink Grout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data on grout and results of tests performed by a certified independent testing laboratory showing conformance to ASTM C 1107. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s instructions for mixing, handling, surface preparation and placing epoxy type and non-shrink type grouts. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify grout meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM C1107, Grade C. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Grouting 03 60 00 - 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Deliver grout in manufacturer's unopened containers with proper labels intact. C. Store grout in a dry shelter, protect from moisture. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not perform grouting if temperatures exceed 90 degrees F. C. Maintain minimum temperature of 45 degrees F before, during, and after grouting, until grout has set. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I and II. B. Water: 1. Potable; containing no impurities, suspended particles, algae or dissolved natural salts in quantities capable of causing: a. Corrosion of steel. b. Volume change increasing shrinkage cracking. c. Efflorescence. d. Excess air entraining. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed natural sand. 2. Gradation in accordance with ASTM C33 and represented by smooth granulometric curve within required limits. 3. Free from injurious amounts of organic impurities as determined by ASTM C40. D. Mix: 1. Portland cement, sand and water. Do not use ferrous aggregate or staining ingredients in grout mixes. 2.2 RAPID CURING EPOXY GROUT A. Manufacturers: 1. Sika, Sikadur 42, Grout-Pak PT. 2. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc., Crystex. 3. Five Star Rapid Epoxy Grout BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Grouting 03 60 00 - 3 4. Substitutions: Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures. B. Rapid Curing Epoxy Grout: High strength, three component epoxy grout formulated with thermosetting resins and inert fillers. Rapid-curing, high adhesion, and resistant to ordinary chemicals, acids and alkalies. Property Test Result Compressive Strength ASTM C579 12,000 psi at 7 days Tensile Strength ASTM C307 2,000 psi minimum Coefficient of Expansion ASTM C531 30x10-6 in per degree F Shrinkage ASTM C827 None 2.3 NON-SHRINK CEMENTATIOUS GROUT A. Manufacturers: 1. The Euclid Chemical Company, "Euco N-S Grout." 2. Master Builders, "Masterflow 713." 3. U.S. Grout Corporation, "Five Star Grout." 4. Substitutions: Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures. Non-shrink Cementations Grout: Pre-mixed ready for use formulation requiring only addition of water; non-shrink, non-corrosive, non-metallic, non-gas forming, no chlorides. B. Properties: Certified to maintain initial placement volume or expand after set and meet the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with CRD-C621, for Type D non- shrink grout: Property Test Time Result Initial 2 hours (Approx)Setting Time ASTM C191 Final 3 hours (Approx) Expansion 0.10% - 0.4% Maximum 1 day 4,000 psi 7 days 7,000 psi Compressive Strength CRD-C621 28 days 10,000 psi to 10,800 psi 2.4 FORMWORK A. Per manufacturer’s requirements and as shown on drawings. 2.5 CURING A. Prevent rapid loss of water from grout during first 48 hours by use of approved membrane curing compound or with use of wet burlap method. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Grouting 03 60 00 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Use rapid curing epoxy grouts for setting of base plates, installation of anchors and dowels, and in aggressive chemical environments. B. Use non-shrink grout for underwater pile grouting, concrete repair, filling of construction joints where indicated on the Drawings, and other locations as indicated on the Drawings. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify areas with Engineer to receive grout. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved. B. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout. C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted. E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none standing. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FORMWORK A. Construct leakproof forms anchored and shored to withstand grout pressures. B. Install formwork with clearances to permit proper placement of grout. 3.5 MIXING A. Mix and prepare rapid curing epoxy grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength in accordance with requirements specified in Section 2.2. B. Mix and prepare non-shrink cementations grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength in accordance with requirements specified in Section 2.3. C. Mix grout components in proximity to work area and transport mixture quickly and in manner not permitting segregation of materials. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Grouting 03 60 00 - 5 3.6 PLACING GROUT A. Place grout material quickly and continuously. B. Do not use pneumatic-pressure or dry-packing methods. C. Apply grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air. D. Do not vibrate placed grout mixture, or permit placement when area is being vibrated by nearby equipment. E. Thoroughly compact final installation and eliminate air pockets. F. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grout has been placed. 3.7 CURING A. Immediately after placement, protect grout from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. After grout has attained its initial set, keep damp for minimum of 3 days. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 318 and under provisions of Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of grout to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of grout components may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DIVISION 05 METALS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 1 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.” B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: As indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 1. ZRC Galvilite or approved equal. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. E. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Loctite LB 8023 Marine Grade Anti-Seize lubricant or approved equal. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 3 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all steel and iron to comply with ASTM A153 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123 for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 4 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. F. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Where stainless steel nuts and bolts will be installed, apply anti-seize lubricant to threads as recommended by lubricant manufacturer to prevent seizure of nut and bolt during installation or upon removal at a future date. 3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND BASEPLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 2. Moist cure grout for a minimum of 7 days. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's “Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.” C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be 100 percent visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 1. Corrective measures shall be taken when welding is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship. Chip and grind if the removal of part of the weld or a portion of the base metal is required. Where deposition of additional weld material is necessary, the sides of the area to be welded shall have no less than one to one (1:1) slope to allow room for depositing new material. Correct defective or unsound welds by the removal and replacement of the entire weld using the following procedures: a. Excessive Convexity: Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal by grinding. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 5 b. Shrinkage Cracks, Cracks in Base Metal, Craters and Excessive Porosity: Remove defective portions of base and weld material down to sound metal, and deposit additional sound material. c. Undercutting, Undersize, and Excessive Concavity: Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and Incomplete Fusion: Remove and replace the defective portion of the weld. e. Slag Inclusion: Remove those parts of the welds containing slag. Fill with sound weld metal. f. Removal of Adjacent Base Metal during Welding: Clean and form full size by depositing weld material. 2. Remove cracked welds throughout their length. 3. Where work performed subsequently to the making of the deficient weld has rendered the weld inaccessible, or has caused new conditions which make connection of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, restore the original conditions by removing welds or members, or both before making the necessary corrections. Another option is to compensate for the deficiency with additional work according to the revised design, approved by the Engineer. 4. Cut apart and reweld improperly fitted and misaligned parts. 5. Straighten members distorted by heat of welding using mechanical means or by carefully supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. Heated areas shall not exceed 1200 degrees Fahrenheit as measured by Tempilsticks. Parts to be heated for straightening shall be free from external stress forces, except when mechanical means are used in conjunction with heat application. 6. If faulty welding or its removal for rewelding damages the base metal so that, in the Engineer's judgment, it is not in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, remove and replace the damaged material and compensate for the deficiency in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 7. Maximum space between pieces or members for fillet welds shall be 1/16 inch. Only effective portion shall be considered in measuring fillet welds. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. 1. Two coats, 1.5mil DFT per coat. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Testing of Electrical Systems 26 01 26 - 1 SECTION 26 01 26 - TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and incidentals of an independent testing agency. B. These specifications cover the suggested field tests and inspections that are available to assess the suitability for initial energization and final acceptance of electrical power equipment and systems. C. The purpose of these specifications is to assure that electrical equipment and systems are operational, are within applicable standards and manufacturer’s tolerances, and are installed in accordance with design specifications. D. The Work specified in these specifications may involve hazardous voltages, materials, operations, and equipment. These specifications do not purport to address all of the safety issues associated with their use. It is the responsibility of the user to review all applicable regulatory limitations prior to the use of these specifications. E. Testing shall be inclusive of all low voltage equipment including conductors that are provided under this Contract. F. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low voltage equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Organization: 1. The testing organization shall be an independent, third party entity which can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems being evaluated. 2. Testing organization shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems. 3. The Testing organization shall use technicians who are regularly employed for testing services. 4. An organization having a designation of NETA Accredited Company issued by the International Electrical Testing Association meets the above criteria. 5. Independent testing agency shall follow all tests and recommendations in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification for all equipment provided. 6. Testing Organization performing the Work shall submit appropriate documentation to demonstrate that it satisfactorily complies with these requirements. 7. Acceptable Testing Agencies: a. Absolute Testing Services, INC. b. Electrical Power Systems. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Testing of Electrical Systems 26 01 26 - 2 c. National Field Services. d. Real Power Technologies. e. Shermco Industries. 8. Testing Personnel: a. Technicians performing these electrical tests and inspections shall be trained and experienced concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated. These individuals shall be capable of conducting the tests in a safe manner and with complete knowledge of the hazards involved. They must evaluate the test data and make a judgment on the serviceability of the specific equipment. b. Technicians shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NETA ETT, Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians. Each on-site crew leader shall hold a current certification, Level 3 or higher, in electrical testing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Electrical Qualifications & List of Test Submittals: 30 days prior to any testing taking place, Contractor shall submit to the Owner/Engineer the name of the testing agency; a list of all tests to be conducted shall also be submitted at this same time. No testing shall take place until this has been submitted and approved by the Engineer. 2. Electrical Testing Plan: A minimum of 2 weeks before testing is to take place, Contractor shall submit a detailed testing plan of the different configurations to be tested for the Owner’s and Engineer’s approval. 3. Electrical Testing Report: a. A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the low voltage equipment. This report shall certify that: 1). The equipment has been properly installed. 2). Is in accurate alignment. 3). Meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer. b. Provide a detailed list of all tests that were performed and the test results as part of the Electrical Testing Report. c. Provide written notice of acceptable and unacceptable test results. Provide recommended remediation for unacceptable results. d. Electrical Testing Report(s) shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval no later than 1 week after testing has been conducted. 1.4 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Testing of Electrical Systems 26 01 26 - 3 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. Electrical Apparatus Service Association (EASA). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 6. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 10. State and local codes and ordinances. 11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Low Voltage Cables. 2. Grounding. B. At a minimum, unless indicated otherwise, all testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for energization and startup of the equipment. C. Electrical testing instrument calibration shall be as indicated in ANSI/NEMA ATS-2017. 3.2 TEST REPORT A. The test report shall include the following: 1. Summary of the Project. 2. Description of equipment tested. 3. Description of tests. 4. Test data. 5. Analysis and recommendations. B. Test data records shall include the following minimum requirements: 1. Identification of the testing organization. 2. Equipment identification. 3. Nameplate data. 4. Humidity, temperature, and other conditions that may affect the results of the tests and/or calibrations. 5. Date of inspections, test, maintenance, and/or calibrations. 6. Identification of the testing technician. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Testing of Electrical Systems 26 01 26 - 4 7. Identification of inspections, tests, maintenance, and/or calibrations to be performed and recorded. 8. Identification of expected results when calibrations are to be performed. 9. Identification of as-found and as-left results, as applicable. 10. Identification of all test results outside of specified tolerances. 11. Sufficient spaces to allow all results and comments to be indicated. C. The testing organization shall furnish a copy or copies of the complete test report as specified. 3.3 TEST DECAL A. The testing organization shall affix a test decal on the exterior of equipment or equipment enclosure of protective devices after performing electrical tests. B. The test decal shall be color-coded to communicate the condition of maintenance for the protective device. Color scheme for condition of maintenance of overcurrent protective device shall be: 1. White: Electrically and mechanically acceptable. 2. Yellow: Minor deficiency not affecting fault detection and operation, but minor electrical or mechanical condition exists. 3. Red: Deficiency exists affecting performance, not suitable for service. C. The decal shall include: 1. Testing organization. 2. Project identifier. 3. Test date. 4. Technician identifier. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 1 SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 26 shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. C. Permanent Utilities: 1. Contractor will be responsible to coordinate with the electric utility to de- energize and re-energize sites where conditions of safe work require de- energization. D. Temporary utilities: 1. Contractor may need to include generator power for outages, depending on the Contractors’ means and methods of connecting to existing power equipment. 2. Contractor shall provide electrical testing and inspection services for temporary connections to existing equipment. 3. Fusing for temporary equipment shall be coordinated with upstream devices to ensure the fuses will terminate before interrupting electrical service to plant process equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Contractors' Qualifications: 1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the Specifications and methods of performing the Work in this Division. A licensed Journeyman shall be on-site at all times when electrical Work is being performed. Electrical Work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in Texas. 2. Contractor shall provide a monthly report to the Owner/Engineer for review stating that the Master Electrician has been to the Site and thoroughly reviewed the Work. The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and include the date and time the Master Electrician was on the Site. Include report in Contractor’s monthly pay application. 3. Contractor’s company must have 10 years of experience with performing electrical Work within pump stations. B. Workmanship: Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 2 The appearance of finished Work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the Site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Submittals shall be submitted separated by specification section. Combined submittals will not be reviewed. Submittal will be marked not approved, revise and resubmit. 2. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be marked revise and resubmit. 3. Resubmittals shall be marked with a red strike-through for the items removed from the submittal and clouded with the items added to the submittal. Submittals shall be marked to track changes between resubmittals. 4. Resubmittals will include the engineer’s submittal comments and vendor response to each comment. 5. All submittals will be in PDF format and sections will be bookmarked for navigation. 6. All submittals will include a copy of the specifications with indication per section of compliance or deviation. 7. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 8. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 9. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the Shop Drawings, submittals, spare part lists, schematics, project-specific final wiring diagrams with any changes made during startup and maintenance procedures. 10. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications, the following information shall be included for motors: a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified. b. Make and motor type. c. Brake horsepower of the motor. d. Locked rotor current at full load. e. Motor efficiency at full load (3-phase motors only). f. Starting torque. g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (3-phase only). h. Speed of the motor at full torque. i. Full load current. j. Service factor. k. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 degrees C ambient. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 3 B. Delays during submittals due to the Contractor not following the format mentioned above shall not be the fault of the Owner or Engineer. C. Contractor shall: 1. Prepare, and keep up-to-date, the Record Drawings and detailed construction drawings. 2. Record the exact locations of each of these differences, sizes and details of the Construction Work as executed, with cross-references to and other requirements on the Record Drawings. 3. Keep the Record Drawings on the Work Site; 4. Upon completion of the Work, or at such other time as may be determined by the Engineer, submit the Record Drawings and copies to the Owner’s representative in accordance with the Owner’s Requirements. 5. Underground Interference drawing showing all underground duct banks, ground rods, ground conductors, pipes, piers, vaults, manholes, pull boxes, etc. that clearly identifies the location and routing of these systems. All interferences shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention. 6. Provide revised drawings in AutoCAD noting any changes made to equipment during startup. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Electrical Work shall be executed in accordance with local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the Work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). 3. ASTM International (ASTM). 4. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 6. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 7. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 8. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 9. Local electrical ordinance. 10. Local utility companies. 11. National Electrical Code (NEC). 12. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA). 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 14. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 16. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 17. Rural Electrification Association (REA). 18. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). 19. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 20. Uniform Building Code (UBC). BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 4 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Follow the manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Major electrical equipment shall be stored indoors and space heaters energized where applicable. Equipment that will be stored indoors for an extended period of time and that do not have permanent space heaters shall have a 100-watt portable space heater placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of condensation in the equipment. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for storage requirements. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the Work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the Work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the Work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the Work is installed. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of Work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed better than the general arrangement of Work on the Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size, the Contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system in accordance with the National Electrical Code at no cost to the Owner. E. Contractor is required to abide by the Owner’s construction safety and health program where applicable. F. Clearances indicated in the National Electrical Code must be maintained around equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Supplemental or alternative materials supplied and installed by the Contractor shall be approved prior to installation. Materials installed without pre-approval through the submittals process, shall be removed from the Site and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. No exceptions. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 5 B. Discrepancies between the Drawings and Specifications shall be addressed prior to bidding the Project, otherwise the most expensive of the two options shall be assumed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be: 1. NEMA 12 for indoor air-conditioned areas. 2. NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel enclosures for indoor ventilated areas. 3. NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for exterior applications and all other locations. B. Maintain waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through enclosures, the roof, exterior walls and floors. C. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations below floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, VFDs, control panels and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4 inches high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 2 inches wider and 2 inches longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6-inch x 6-inch #6 welded wire mesh. D. Route all conduits parallel to building lines, columns, or steel route conduits near to columns and roof beams. E. Do not penetrate the top of enclosures in exterior applications. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. 3.3 PAINTING A. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 3.4 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner’s representative, utility companies and Owner’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 6 to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the Project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent Work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent Work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as- built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. E. In cases where high voltage ductbanks may exist, Contractor shall employ safe drilling/excavating techniques such as vacuum excavation, etc. 3.5 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation upon completion of the Work. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 2000V and less. 2. Tray cable, Type TC rated 2000V and less. 3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 2000V and less. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations C. Field quality- control reports. D. Qualification data for testing agency. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. B. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. C. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. D. Do not drop reels from any height. E. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable. F. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 2 G. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer’s standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-healing end caps applied to both ends of cable. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to be terminated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Encore Wire Corporation. 4. General Cable; Prysmian Group North America. 5. Okonite Company (The). 6. Service Wire Co. 7. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." 3. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable used in VFD circuits. 4. Conductors: Copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. F. Shield: 1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFDs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, dual spirally wrapped copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. 2.2 TRAY CABLE, TYPE TC A. Description: A factory assembly of insulated current-carrying conductors with or without an equipment grounding conductor in a nonmetallic jacket. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 3 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Encore Wire Corporation. 4. General Cable; Prysmian Group North America. 5. Okonite Company (The). 6. Service Wire Co. 7. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1277. 3. Comply with ICEA S-73-532/NEMA WC 57 for Type TC cables used for control, thermocouple extension, and instrumentation. 4. Comply with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC 70 for Type TC cables used for power distribution. 5. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. E. Ground Conductor: Insulated. F. Conductor Insulation: Type XHHW-2. Comply with UL 44. G. Shield: Metallic. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Power Distribution Blocks: rated for 600 VAC at 90C for termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC Cable Systems; Atkore International. 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Incorporated, Power Systems. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 4 6. ILSCO. 7. O-Z/Gedney; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 8. TE Connectivity Ltd. D. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION, COPPER, 600 VOLT: The appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. All compression connectors shall be long-barrel type, no exceptions. E. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. F. Wire-nuts: Silicone-based pre-filled spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering and UL listed for damp and wet locations. Wire-nut shall meet requirements of UL486D for sealed wire connector systems. Wire-nut shall be spring insulated, properly sized, and resistant to vibration. May be used for #12 through #10 solid gauge conductor for lighting and branch circuits only. G. Tape: 1. 600 VOLT VINYL TAPE (PHASE IDENTIFICATION): Scotch Vinyl Electrical Tape 35. 2. 600 VOLT VINYL TAPE: Scotch Vinyl Electrical Tape Super 88. 3. RUBBER TAPE: Scotch Liner less Rubber Splicing Tape 2242 or 130C. 4. ARC PROOFING TAPE: Scotch Fire and Electric Arc Proof Professional Grade Tape 77. Fireproofing shall be done with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape, anchored at each end with a double wrap of Scotch Glass Cloth Electrical Tape 89. 5. INSULATING RESIN: Scotchcast Electrical Insulating Resin 2104. H. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: Two hole with long barrels. 3. Termination: Compression. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: 1. Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: 1. Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 5 C. VFD Output Circuits Cable: VFD specific cable construction for all drive to motor connections. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW- 2, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG. G. Where multiconductor cables transition from cable tray to conduits or underground raceways, multiconductor cables will be permitted in conduits. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installed unapproved conductors and cables shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. B. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. C. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief for vertical runs as required. 1. Where single conductors and cables are in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length all conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 4 inches on center. 2. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bundle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein and in specification section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.” 3. Cap and label each side of spare conductors not terminated with the UL listed end caps. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 6 4. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. 5. For conductors that will be connected by others, provide at least 6 feet spare conductors in free standing panels and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies. Provide additional spare conductor in any particular assembly where it is obvious that more conductor will be needed to reach the termination point. a. Each circuit shall include a ground wire. Sharing grounds or neutrals is not allowed. 6. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. D. Conductors and Cables Installed In Conduit 1. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. 2. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. 3. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place in accordance with the NEC and these specifications. Exception: Only flexible connections to motors shall be permitted to be installed after the installation of the remainder of the raceway system. The installation of these conductors shall be limited to exposure to damage for a maximum of one (1) week prior to installing flexible connection and making final terminations. Any conductors exposed to damage (i.e. not installed in raceway) longer than one (1) week shall be subject to rejection by the Owner and/or Engineer. If rejected, the cables shall be removed, discarded, replaced, reinstalled and retermination at the Contractor’s expense. 4. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 5. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are found to have been installed without tension-monitoring, the conductors and cables shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, all at the Contractor’s expense. E. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 7 G. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. H. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." I. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 26 05 36.01 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and continuous temperature and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inch of slack. D. Power Conductors: Splicing of existing power conductors shall be permitted where specifically indicated on the plans. Splices for all other circuits shall be disallowed. Splice in junction boxes or at outlets only for lighting and receptacle branch circuits. Splices for all other circuits shall be disallowed. All splices are subject to the Engineer’s approval. Obtain approval from Engineer before installing any splices. E. Where pre-approved by Engineer, 480V splices shall terminate conductors using power distribution blocks mounted on a junction box backplane. F. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. G. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. H. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. I. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a silicone filled twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3' above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that the resin encapsulates conductor and spring materials. Conductor splices and taps inside the MCC, VFDs, panels, etc. shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. J. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer of rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3' above the finished BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 8 grade, the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. Splices must be pre-approved by the Engineer. K. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for terminating conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. L. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. M. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors. N. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. O. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. Light switches and receptacles shall be connected with pig-tails and crimp-on connectors. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems." All ungrounded conductors will have phase colored insulation. B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements: a. Low voltage switchboards. b. Low voltage motors and motor operated valves. c. Power cables entering or leaving dry type distribution transformers. d. Instrumentation cables (CT and PT) which interconnect between different sections of equipment. 2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. b. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. c. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following: 1). A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2). Calibrated torque wrench. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 9 d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. e. Inspect for correct identification. f. Inspect cable jacket and condition. g. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500 V(dc) for 300 V rated cable and 1000 V(dc) for 600 V rated cable for a one-minute duration. h. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. i. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 1 SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600-volt wires and cables. Electrical Work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical.” B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. RS-485 cabling. 3. Low-voltage control cabling. 4. Control-circuit conductors. 5. Identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. Low-Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 volts or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. C. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: For each type of product. 2. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 3. Source quality-control reports. 4. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 2 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M. 2. ADC. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. AMP NETCONNECT; a Tyco Electronics brand; a TE Connectivity Ltd. company. 5. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 6. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 7. CommScope, Inc. 8. Draka USA. 9. General Cable; General Cable Corporation. 10. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 11. KRONE Incorporated. 12. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 13. Nexans. 14. Siemon Co. (The). 15. Superior Essex Inc. B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 1. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with NEMA WC 66, UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685. b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR complying with UL 1666. c. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. AMP NETCONNECT; a Tyco Electronics brand; a TE Connectivity Ltd. company. 4. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 5. Belden Inc. 6. Corning Cable Systems. 7. Dynacom Corporation. 8. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 9. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 10. KRONE Incorporated. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 3 11. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 12. Molex Premise Networks. 13. Panduit Corp. 14. Siemon Co. (The). B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight- position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with eight- position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. F. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. G. Faceplates: 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.” 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical- fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. H. Legend: 1. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts. 2.4 RS-485 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685. 2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 4 A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. Individually and overall shielded one pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded 19x30 tinned- copper conductors with 0.021-inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non- hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, and drain wire. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383 and shall be suitable for wet location. 2. Shielded. 3. Extruded PVC jacket minimum 0.050. 4. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685. 2.6 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. General Cable; General Cable Corporation. 2. Southwire Company. 3. Alpha. 4. Okonite. 5. Belden. B. General: 1. Wires and cables shall be soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper, UL 83 and UL 1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90 degrees Celsius in dry locations and in wet locations. 2. Control, signal and instrumentation circuits and as specifically indicated on the Drawings the minimum conductor permitted is #16. C. Single Conductor Cables: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, in raceway or cable tray, complying with UL 44. E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, in raceway or cable tray, complying with UL 44. F. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, in raceway or cable tray, complying with UL 44. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 5 B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2. C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Test cables on receipt at the Site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius as required elsewhere in specifications and drawings or as required to meet cable bend radius requirements. D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. E. Backboards: Install backboards with 48-inch dimension vertical or as indicated in drawings. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 6 B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 2. Cables may not be spliced. 3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer’s limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, “Copper Structured Cabling Systems”. 5. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 7. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, “Copper Structured Cabling Systems”. 8. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 9. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to Maintain cable geometry. D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.” E. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 7 b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag. 3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No. 12 AWG. 3.6 GROUNDING A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, “Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)” Chapter. B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.” 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 “Identification for Electrical Systems.” B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 8 A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA- 568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA- 568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in “Test Instruments (Normative)” Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in “Measurement Accuracy Informative)” Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 PREPARATION A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.10 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 2. If rejected, the cables shall be removed, discarded, replaced, reinstalled and re- terminated at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the Drawings indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the Drawings shall be in its own conduit. 4. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 9 5. The cable shall not be bent to a radius no smaller than the manufacturer cable’s minimum bending radius. 6. All terminated conductors shall be labeled as specified prior to testing and final terminations being done. Any conductor that is de-terminated for any reason shall be retested. All associated controls, if tested before, shall be retested following final retermination. B. Ground Conductors: Conduits and other raceway shall contain an insulated equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, cabinets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Bond each end of each of the conduit to the ground system. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results For Electrical”. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall be in accordance with section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and include: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground conductors. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Connectors. 6. Field quality control reports in accordance with section 26 01 26 “Testing Of Electrical Systems. 7. Operations and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 8. Include the following: a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS. 1). Tests shall determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums and instructions shall recommend corrective actions if values do not. 2). Include recommended testing intervals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB, Electrification Products Division. 2. Burndy; Hubbell Incorporated, Construction and Energy. 3. ERICO; nVent. 4. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inch in cross section, with 9/32 inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inch apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting must comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and must be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Mechanical-Type Bus-Bar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 3 E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. I. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper, rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. J. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 ft. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS A. Conduit Ground Fittings: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. B. Ground Rod Boxes: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod”. H-10 rated boxes shall be Brooks Precast Model “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO HS-20 rating by ALT Fabrication Item 3114 or approved equal. C. Exothermic Welding Process: Cadweld Materials – as manufactured by ERICO products or approved equal. 2.6 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel shall be exothermically welded. The use of mechanical type connections. B. All grounding system connections to grounding electrodes will be via exothermic weld or compression connection except in ground test wells where mechanical connection is required. C. Any concealed conductor connection below grade, encased in concrete, or in the transformer yard ground grid may be via exothermic weld or compression connections. D. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in the National Electrical Code. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 4 E. Exothermic welds will be made in new molds purchased specifically for this project and replaced after the manufacturer’s maximum number of welds has been met, or if visible damage has occurred. F. All welding material will be new and purchased specifically for this project. Store welding material indoor in an air conditioned, low humidity space. G. Utilize an electronic ignition system with pre-packaged weld material for consistent weld quality. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, #4 minimum. 1. Bury depth as indicated in drawings. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms where indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inch minimum from wall, 6 inch above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors or compression connections except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 5. Connections to Equipment: NEMA ground pads and insulated jumpers 6. Connections to Ground Pad: Exothermic 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors must be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode must be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 5 A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inch will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned- copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure- sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inch above to 6 inch below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install ground rods as indicated on the drawings. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to ground grid cables and grounding electrodes. Install two, tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 6 AWG for ground grid attachment and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Networking equipment racks: Install insulated ground conductor from ground ring to grounding stud in equipment rack. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 6 D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Swing Gates: Must be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands must be bonded to the grounding conductor. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inch below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems," and must be at least 12 inch deep, with cover. 1. Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors or pressure connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 7 1. Metal Pipes: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building ground ring to metal pipes. Use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug- type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric fitting is used between dissimilar pipe metals, connect grounding jumper across fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Valves and meters: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass valves and meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. H. Bonding HVAC service platform: Bond metal grating and supports of service platform to the equipment grounding conductors of the water source heat pumps. I. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 ft. of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 ft. long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2 Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. J. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 ft. long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length. K. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 8 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than three full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground- rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Individual ground rods should measure 20 Ohm or less to remote Earth. 3. Entire grounding system should measure 5 Ohm or less to remote Earth when all bonding and grounding systems are interconnected. E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: 1). Hangers. 2). Steel slotted support systems. 3). Trapeze hangers. 4). Clamps. 5). Turnbuckles. 6). Sockets. 7). Eye nuts. 8). Saddles. 9). Brackets. b. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. G-Strut. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. g. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Material: Stainless Steel, Type 304. 3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless-steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1). Hilti, Inc. 2). ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3). MKT Fastening, LLC. 4). Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1). B-line, an Eaton business. 2). Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3). Hilti, Inc. 4). ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5). MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A325. 6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: 304 Threaded stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 “Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications” for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.” C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 3/8 inch in diameter. D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMCs may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components or 200 pounds, whichever is greater. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 4 D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete.” C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer’s setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer’s written instructions. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete conduit system for each type of electrical system. Electrical Work shall be in accordance with Division 26. B. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install concrete electrical manholes and pull boxes, as specified and indicated on the Drawings. Manhole sizes shown on the Drawings are the minimum size allowed. Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all manholes and pull boxes in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370 and relevant sections of the NEC. Contractor shall be responsible for setting elevations at manhole and cable entry locations to meet the intent of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes per the NEC Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the NEC. Electrical Work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit. C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene conduit. D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 2 1. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged- cover enclosures, and cabinets. 2. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 3. Contractor shall provide detailed conduit layout showing number, size, and location of conduits entering the manholes. Cables routed in conduits shall be clearly identified. Details shall also show elevation of conduits entering manholes. Manhole details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the duct bank/manhole system being installed. 4. Manholes, Pull and Junction Boxes Sizing Calculations: Detailed calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer with the manholes, pull and junction boxes’ initial submittal. Submittals submitted without sizing calculations shall not be accepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Picoma Industries, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries. 10. Calbond. 11. Southwire Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. 13. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 14. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. D. PVC-Coated Aluminum Conduit: PVC- coated. 1. Comply with UL 6A. 2. Exterior Coating Thickness: 0040 inch, minimum. D. LFMC: Flexible aluminum conduit with PVC jacket. E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 3 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for Rigid Aluminum: a. Material: Aluminum. 1). Type: Form 7. b. Class I and II Hazardous Locations: 1). Material: Copper-free aluminum. 2). Type: Series OE, LBH and LBY. 3). Covers: Copper-free aluminum. 3. Fittings for PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum: a. Material: PVC Coated Cast Aluminum. b. Type: Form Form 7. c. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inches, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. F. Expansion Fittings: PVC, aluminum, or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper, Crouse Hinds XJG 4 inches or equal with bonding jumper for aluminum or steel. Where expansion/deflection fitting is specified on the Drawings, provide Crouse Hinds XJGD or equal. G. Insulated Grounding Bushings: Threaded bushings, O-Z Type ABLG with lay-in means of grounding conduit. H. Fittings for LFMC: 1. Fittings for aluminum LFMC shall be aluminum with reinforced sealing gaskets with Thomas and Betts stainless steel retaining ring, external grounding lugs, and insulated throat. Fittings shall be Emerson STB-L or equal. 2. Fittings for steel LFMC shall be steel with reinforced sealing ring, external grounding lug, and insulated throat. Fittings shall be Emerson STB-L or equal. J. Joint Compound for ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 1. Aluminum Conduit: Penetrox A-13 or approved equal. a. UL Listed. b. Compatible with insulating materials such as rubber, or polyethylene. c. Rated for all voltages. K. Sealing Compound: 1. Hazardous Locations: Chico “A” or Chico SpeedSeal, Hydra-Seal S-60 or approved equal. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Where conduits pass between indoor/outdoor locations or between conditioned/unconditioned spaces, provide re-enterable duct sealing compound, Thomas & Betts CIDUCT or approved equal. L. Lubricants: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 4 1. Hazardous locations Class I, Div. II Locations: a. Metal-to-Metal Joint: STL thread lubricant. 1). Applicable to dissimilar metals. 2). Maintain grounding continuity. b. Lighting Fixture Threaded Joint: HTL high temperature lubricant. 1). Applicable to dissimilar metals. 2). Maintain grounding continuity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX INC. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Champion Fiberglass 7. Condux International, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson & Sessions. 11. Niedax Inc. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 5 1. Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 12 for indoor, air conditioned spaces and 304 stainless steel for all other spaces unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 2. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. Lamson & Sessions. 4. Niedax Inc. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless- steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 6 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. MonoSystems, Inc. 11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 13. RACO; Hubbell. 14. Robroy Industries. 15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 16. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 17. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. 18. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 1. Outlet Boxes for Rigid Aluminum: a. Material: Aluminum. 1). Type: Form 7. b. Class I and II Hazardous Locations: 1). Material: Copper-free aluminum. 2). Type: Series GUA. 3). Covers: Copper-free aluminum. 2. Outlet Boxes for PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum: a. Material: PVC Coated Cast Aluminum. b. Type: Form 7. c. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inches, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 pounds. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 pounds shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 7 J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. K. Gangable boxes are allowed. L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 12 for air- conditioned spaces, Type 4X 304 SS for all other spaces, with continuous-hinge cover and flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: 304 stainless steel for Type 4X and Steel for Type 12. Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer’s standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Backplane Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer’s standard enamel. 4. Enclosures shall include a grounding kit. M. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 12, steel for indoor, air-conditioned spaces, Type 4X 304 stainless steel for all other spaces, box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer’s standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 4. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 5. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Cabinet shall include a grounding kit. 2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Manholes and Concrete Pullboxes: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers; Precast: Precast concrete products shall comply with the Specifications and shall be produced by the following manufacturers: a. Brooks Products. b. American Industrial Precast Products. c. Dalworth Quickset Co. d. Old Castle. e. No Equal. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers; Castings: Metal castings shall comply with the Specifications and shall be produced by the following manufacturers: a. McKinley Iron Works, Fort Worth, TX. b. Neenah Foundry, Neenah, WI. c. No equal. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 8 3. Design Criteria: Concrete for precast concrete shall obtain a compressive strength of 4000 psi minimum at 28 days, and shall be an air entrained mix of the manufacturer’s standard mix design. 4. Standards: a. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1). AASHTO H 20 — Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2). ANSI/ASTM A-15 — Zinc Coating (Hot Dipped) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3). ANSI/ASTM A-569 — Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15% Maximum), Hot Rolled, Commercial Quality. 4). ASTM A-48 — Gray Iron Castings. 5). ASTM A-123 — Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips. 5. Materials: a. Manhole Frames and Covers: Class 30B gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48; machine finished with flat bearing surfaces. b. Sump Covers: Class 30B gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48. c. Pulling Irons: 304 stainless steel bar with 7/8-inch diameter forming a triangle of 9 inches per side when set; galvanized according to ANSI/ASTM A153 for irregularly shaped articles. d. Cable Rack Inserts: 304 stainless steel channel inserts with a minimum load rating of 800 pounds; length to match cable rack channel. e. Cable Rack Channel: 4-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 3/16-inch 304 stainless steel channel wall bracket, 48 inches long, with cable rack arm mounting slots on 8-inch centers. f. Cable Racks: 2-1/2-inch by 14-inch 304 stainless steel channel with high glazed, wet process porcelain insulators conforming to ANSI/ASTM A569. g. Ground Rod: 3/4-inch by 10-foot copper clad steel, installed in the floor of the manhole, and all metallic cable racks, irons, etc. grounded (to the ground rod). Ground rod may be field installed, but floor penetration shall be sealed against the entrance of water under positive head. h. Joint Sealant: Flexible plastic gasket of flexible butyl resin sealant. i. Dampproofing: Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. or approved equal. 1). Bituminous Dampproofing: a). Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing: 1) Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1. 2). Miscellaneous Materials: a). Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Mixes: a. Concrete and reinforcing shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.” BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 9 C. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. e. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. f. Synertech Moulded Products. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, “ELECTRIC” or “CONTROLS”. 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of hot-dip galvanized-steel diamond plate. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. f. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. g. Synertech Moulded Products. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 4. Tier 5 5. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 6. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 7. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 8. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, “ELECTRIC” or “CONTROLS”. 9. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 10 10. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Conduit types shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Buried or Concrete Encased Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased unless noted otherwise. Conduit below grade shall not be smaller than 2 inches. a. Elbows: PVC coated ARC or Fiberglass. 2. Above Grade Non Concealed Conduit: ARC unless noted otherwise. 3. PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Shall be used for conduit stub-ups through concrete and concrete wall penetrations. 4. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: May be used in all locations. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall be used in corrosive environments or where in contact with concrete. 5. Liquid Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Shall only be used to equipment in non- hazardous locations not subject to physical damage or excessive temperatures, requiring vibration isolation unless otherwise indicated, 6 feet maximum length. The bending radius shall be in accordance with Chapter 9, Table 2 of the NEC and shall not deform or alter the flex jacket. 6. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 12 Steel for indoor, air- conditioned spaces, NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel for all other spaces. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1. Exposed 1/2 inch for light fixture whips, 3/4 inch trade size. 2. Underground: 2 inches in duct banks. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use threaded rigid aluminum conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Aluminum Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 11 coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. 4. Fiberglass Conduit: Order fiberglass conduit with integral PVC coupler option or use manufacturer supplied two part epoxy for connections. D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hertz. E. Where raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install PVC coated rigid aluminum or Fiberglass extending 6 inches past the top of the concrete slab where conduit does not terminate in a floor mounted enclosure. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg. F. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on the Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Use the conduit route where shown on the Drawings. Route conduits that do not have a specified route in the most direct path between the two points, i.e. home runs shown with an arrow symbol. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits on the Drawings shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. C. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the Engineer’s prior approval. D. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other Work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other Work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3 inches of separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1 inch. Conduits shall not be installed/concealed in water bearing walls. E. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown on the Drawings. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using mineralac-type hardware, strut channel clamps, or one hole straps with clamp backs. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 12 F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for an additional 25 percent conduit. G. Parallel runs of conduit shall have bends and offsets made at the same point such that the angle of bend is the same in each conduit and the conduits remain parallel throughout the run. Conduits not installed in this manner shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense. Conductors that are installed shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. H. Conduits installed in parallel shall be arranged such that crossings are eliminated. I. Nuts, bolts, concrete anchor bolts and other metallic fasteners shall be 316L stainless steel. J. Install conduit with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings. Threadless, or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. Rigid aluminum conduit shall have each set of threads coated with an oxidation inhibitor, Ilsco, De-Ox, ITT Noalox, Blackburn Contax or approved equal. K. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. The use of duct tape or any other tape shall be prohibited. L. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. M. Provide at least 1/4 inch air space between the back of boxes, equipment and the wall. N. Size conduits as required by the National Electrical Code for the number and sizes of wires to be drawn into the conduit. O. Conduits terminating inside an air-conditioned space from outside shall be sealed to prevent moisture/condensation from entering the enclosure. P. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Q. Where applicable, aluminum conduit, straps, and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete. Provide a neoprene washer between the two materials. R. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. S. Conduit system shall be swabbed clean prior to installation of conductors. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 13 T. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Section 26 05 26 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.” U. Install manufactured PVC coated aluminum or Fiberglass conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. V. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. W. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2 inches trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. X. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” for hangers and supports. Y. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Z. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 18 inches of changes in direction or where conduit penetrates through a floor, wall, or transitions from underground. Conduits transitioning from underground to be supported by a structure shall include an expansion fitting before the conduit is strapped at its first conduit support. AA. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. BB. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-pound tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. CC. Install conduit drain assemblies in outside or underground conduits to provide for draining. 3.3 CONDUITS THROUGH CONCRETE: A. Conduit shall not be placed horizontally in a concrete floor slab or a beam without the Engineer’s written approval. B. Conduit passing through concrete shall be PVC coated aluminum or Fiberglass. Conduit shall extend 6 inches above concrete transition. Aluminum conduit which penetrates into concrete shall be factory-coated with 0.40 inches of polyvinylchloride, per Spec. MIL-P- 15147. C. Where conduit transitions from below concrete into a duct bank, the conduit shall be PVC coated aluminum or Fiberglass to the elbow. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 14 D. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3 inches from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1 inch from any reinforcement bars. E. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level for multi - level structures, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 3.4 RACEWAYS EMBEDDED IN SLABS A. Run conduit larger than 1 inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. B. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. C. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. D. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by the Engineer for each specific location. E. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC to PVC coated aluminum or Fiberglass before rising above floor. 3.5 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Expansion Fittings: 1. Expansion fittings used with aluminum conduit shall be installed in the following locations: a. At construction joints. b. In conduit runs longer than 100 feet. c. Transitions from underground to above elevation (exposed). 2. Install in each run of aboveground ARC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg. F and that has straight- run length that exceeds 100 feet. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits, concealed or surface mount, cross building, structure, construction and seismic expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer’s written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. 5. Acceptable expansion/deflation fittings made of neoprene in outdoor applications shall have aluminum lagging over the neoprene held in place with stainless steel tie-wraps. 3.6 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 15 A. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 3.7 JUNCTION BOX AND PULL BOX INSTALLATION A. Mount boxes at heights indicated on the Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated. B. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. C. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. D. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. E. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. F. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. G. Drilling holes in boxes to support the box shall not be allowed. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Concrete Encased Conduit: 1. Duct banks routed below building slabs or any equipment pad shall be steel reinforced concrete encased. 2. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 31 23 17 “Trenching” for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 3. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 23 23 “Fill” 4. After installing conduit and concrete, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 23 23 “Fill” BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 16 5. At the transition from underground and or from concrete, protect conduit from mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit a maximum of 24 inches and a minimum of 4 inches into the earth or concrete at the transition. 6. Contractor shall properly tape PVC coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC conduit in underground concrete encased duct banks so that no aluminum conduit is in contact with concrete encasement. Tape shall be manufactured by Scotch or approved equal. Coordinate with tape manufacturer for type of tape to use for the installation. a. Couple PVC coated aluminum conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.” 8. For installation of conduits to be used by electric utility, coordinate with the utility for exact requirements. 9. Conduit which is below the finished grade shall be PVC Schedule 40, except where indicated on the Drawings or noted otherwise. 10. Where underground conduits are routed under a concrete slab on grade and brought up under the slab, the duct bank reinforcing steel shall be tied into the slab. 11. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 18 inches deep to the top of the concrete encasement for 600-volt duct banks and 24 inches deep to the top of the concrete encasement for 5 kV, or 25 kV and as shown on the Drawings, whichever is greater. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. 12. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct bank dimensions shown on the Drawings. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. 13. The concrete shall be red in color. Apply dye in concrete truck, sprinkling dye on top of the duct bank after concrete placement is prohibited. Place 3-inch CMU blocks under rebar cage to suspend rebar off of the bottom of the trench so that it does not contact the soil and is completely encased in the concrete envelope when concrete is placed. 14. Underground conduits shall drain to an underground structure with a floor drain, such as a manhole. 15. Contractor shall install duct bank spacers a minimum of every 5 feet. 16. Conduit shall slope uniformly at not less than 4 inches per 100 feet, or more than 60 inches per 100 feet unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Arrange duct banks to drain into manholes with no low pockets in the duct runs. The electrical contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor and the Drawings on the proposed grades for the Site. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 17 A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer’s written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F. Conduit penetrations will be a minimum of 24” above the bottom of the enclosure. 3.10 SIZING AND INSTALLATION OF WIREWAYS, PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and sizing all wireways, pull boxes and junction boxes per the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the NEC. B. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Use screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. D. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. E. Wireway Supports: Per manufacturer’s recommendations. Contractor shall support the wireway rigidly to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. Supporting wireways from corrugated metal structures shall not be allowed. F. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings. G. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and communication systems. H. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100 feet apart when conduit runs are not broken by junction or outlet boxes. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 18 I. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. J. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6 inches separation, except in acoustic-rated walls, provide 24 inches separation. K. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box. L. Box shall be mounted using mounting lugs. Drilling through the box to mount is prohibited. Any box drilled to mount will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 3.11 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed. G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. H. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. I. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot- type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. J. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 19 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.13 CONDUIT TERMINATIONS A. Conduit terminations at enclosures shall maintain the NEMA rating of the enclosure. Conduit terminations damaging enclosures shall not be permitted. Damaged enclosures will not be accepted and shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. B. Use grounding hubs for termination of conduits into enclosures. C. Locknut termination of conduits shall not be used on this Project except were liquid tight fittings require locknuts to maintain UL listings. Locations utilizing liquid tight fittings shall include a stainless steel banded sealing gasket. Damaged bands or gaskets due to overtightening shall be replaced by the Contractor. D. For exterior, wet locations, and where conduit enters from exterior or wet locations, conduit terminations shall not penetrate the top of NEMA 4X, enclosures. Enclosures with top penetrations shall be removed and replaced with conduits re-routed for side or bottom penetration at the Contractor’s expense. If conductors have been installed and are too short to accommodate the re-routed conduit, then they shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. E. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. F. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. The use of duct tape or any other tape shall be prohibited. G. Conduits terminating inside an air-conditioned space from outside shall be sealed to prevent moisture/condensation from entering the enclosure. H. Where locknuts are allowed, do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path. I. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with grounding hubs. Install grounding hub hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. 3.14 JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Junction boxes shall be installed so they are accessible from the front. B. Junction boxes shall have terminal strips/distribution blocks for splicing conductors where approved by the Engineer or as shown/specified on the Drawings. Terminal strips BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 20 shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. No top entry in junction boxes with a terminal strip. C. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. D. Metallic Junction boxes shall be grounded with NEC approved grounding fasteners and by means allowed by the enclosure manufacturer. Enclosures drilled for grounding fasteners that do not meet code shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Labels. 2. Bands and tubes. 3. Tapes and stencils. 4. Tags. 5. Signs. 6. Cable ties. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products in accordance with 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures”. B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2 F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Violet. c. Phase C: Yellow. 4. Color for Neutral: White. 5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. C. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR XX INCHES." Fill in the required workspace clearance based on NFPA 70 article 110.23(A)(1). E. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field. 2.3 LABELS A. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. HellermannTyton. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3 e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A'n D Cable Products. b. Brady Corporation. c. Brother International Corporation. d. emedco. e. Grafoplast Wire Markers. f. Ideal Industries, Inc. g. LEM Products Inc. h. Marking Services, Inc. i. Panduit Corp. j. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 3. Marker for Labels: a. Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer. C. Self-Adhesive Labels: Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A'n D Cable Products. b. Brady Corporation. c. Brother International Corporation. d. emedco. e. Grafoplast Wire Markers. f. HellermannTyton. g. Ideal Industries, Inc. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Panduit Corp. k. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment. 2.4 BANDS AND TUBES BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4 A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. HellermannTyton. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Panduit Corp. 2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. HellermannTyton. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. Marking Services, Inc. f. Panduit Corp. B. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. C. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. LEM Products Inc. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Reef Industries, Inc. f. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5 2. Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 3. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE". c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE". 4. Tape: a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches. c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. f. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi. D. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.6 CONDUIT TAGS A. Metal Tags: Aluminum, 2 inch diameter round, or 2 by 2 inch square, 0.05 inch thick minimum, with stamped legend, pre-punched for use with self-locking, 304 stainless steel cable tie fastener. Once a form factor is selected (round or square), it must be used for all conduits 3/4” and larger. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2.7 SIGNS BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6 A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 3. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 4. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches. B. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 2.8 CABLE TIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. HellermannTyton. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Marking Services, Inc. 4. Panduit Corp. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 7 A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, 304 or 316 stainless-steel screws or stainless- steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. C. Stainless steel rivets are acceptable for fastening identification to NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. H. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 8 I. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. J. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "125VDC POWER." K. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. L. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. M. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. N. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. O. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. P. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. Q. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions. R. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways. S. Metal Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using stainless steel cable ties. T. Baked-Enamel Signs: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 9 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high. U. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. V. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Indoor and Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "125VDC POWER." E. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation. G. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 10 H. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. I. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors. J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Baked- enamel warning signs. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. K. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. L. Operating Instruction Signs: Baked-enamel warning signs. M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Baked-enamel warning signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. N. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Baked-enamel signs. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self- adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Enclosed switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. f. Enclosed controllers. g. Variable-speed drives. h. Push-button stations. i. Power-transfer equipment. j. Contactors. k. Monitoring and control equipment. l. UPS equipment. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 3. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 4. Wall plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. RoHS compliant. D. Comply with NEMA WD 1. E. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. F. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. G. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. d. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. d. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 5. "Marking" Subparagraph below requires compliance with NFPA 70, Articles 406.9 and 406.12. 6. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article. 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. d. Wiring Device-Kellems; Hubbell Incorporated, Commercial and Industrial. 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 5 A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. D. Tests for Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. E. Test straight-blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. F. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 1 SECTION 26 29 13.01 - INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install industrial control panels to measure and control process mechanical equipment as specified in process equipment specifications, and control schematics within Electrical design drawings. B. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26, and Division 40. C. Provide UL 508A labels to all control panels under this contract. Control panels shall be fabricated by a UL 508A Industrial Control Panel (ICP) shop. Label does not need to include the enclosure where only a back panel is being replaced. D. Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all control panel enclosures to comply with minimum workspace clearance requirements in Article 110 of NFPA 70. E. Horsepower Rating: Horsepowers as indicated on the Plans are approximate. The Contractor shall furnish properly sized motor control equipment when actual motor horsepowers are determined. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the Plans, the Contractor shall obtain assistance from the Engineer in determining whether or not hardware and wiring changes are necessary. The Contractor shall provide all components and wire of the proper size. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General use industrial control panels. a. Note: All control panels will be provided by the SCADA contractor preapproved for integration. 2. Make and model of equipment listed as the Basis of Design (BOD) or Approved Manufacturers are current products as of the issue date on the drawings and specifications. Inclusion of these products is not intended to restrict advancement of the state of the art. Should newer product/technology become available that would be advantageous to the project, bring this to the engineer's attention prior to ordering and installing equipment. At no time will end of life, discontinued, or obsolete equipment be accepted. Determination of obsolescence will be at the sole discretion of the engineer. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations 1. SCCR: Short Circuit Current Rating BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 2 2. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive 3. RVSS: Reduced Voltage Soft Starter B. Reference Standards 1. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entity. a. Local Laws and Ordinances b. State and Federal Laws c. NEMA ICS 2 d. NFPA 70 e. NFPA 79 f. UL 508 g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) i. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and as outlined below. 1. Product Data a. Complete manufacturer cutsheets for each component used. Clearly mark and indicate all options selected for each component. Cross out options and accessories not being supplied with component. Submittals that are not clearly marked will be returned without review. 2. Qualifications a. Provide current copy of UL508A certification b. Provide current copy of one of the certifications listed in 1.06 “Quality Assurance”. 3. Shop Drawing 4. Control panel layout and wiring diagrams a. Complete Bill of Material of all components associated with control panel. Provide a separate Bill of Material for each control panel. Components listed in Bill of Material must have quantities and an Item ID. 1). Submit CAD formatted panel layout drawings for each control panel specified. All components and enclosures must be scaled with dimensions included. Include at a minimum the following drawings: a) Elevations identifying all components located on the interior backplane, door-in-door, and panel exteriors. 2). Provide Item ID next to each component or a legend if item ID text would be illegible on the drawing. a) Enclosure NEMA rating b) Enclosure SCCR BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 3 c) Nameplate Schedule with descriptions and locations of all nameplates. d) Stub-up Locations e) Ventilation Details 3). Wiring Diagrams a) FLA of panel b) Project specific control schematics c) Field instrumentation d) Power sources of all 2-wire and 4-wire field instruments e) Terminal strip layout clearly identifying all customer and field terminations for power, control and instrumentation. 5. Spare Parts List 6. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. a. Warranty Period: The greater of either: 1). Manufacturer’s standard warranty 2). 12 months after startup or 18 months after shipping, whichever occurs first. 7. O&M Manual 8. Include record drawings of final control schematic, including any changes made during startup. 1.5 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10% of quantity installed for each size and type, but not fewer than six of each size and type. 2. Indication lights: One of each type and lens color 3. Relays and tube bases: Equal to 10% of quantity installed for each size and type, but not fewer than three of each size and type. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until control panels are ready to be energized and placed into service. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Temperature: 0-42°C B. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 feet. C. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% (non-condensing) BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum SCCR of control panels shall be equal or greater than the SCCR or AIC rating of immediate upstream device. If the immediate upstream device is a series rated circuit breaker, then the upstream panelboard or switchboard AIC rating shall be met. 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. General Requirements: 1. Enclosures shall be sized to sufficiently support the mounting of all panel components to the backplane of enclosure, and to support the routing and separation of power and control voltage conductors within enclosure. 2. All components shall be mounted to stud mounted backplane on the rear of enclosure. No components shall be mounted to sides of enclosure interior unless stud mounted backplane or factory welded slotted channel is provided for panel sides. Side mounted components shall not interfere with the removal or testing of backplane mounted components. 3. Panels shall meet the NEMA classifications listed under section 3.01 Enclosure Installation Schedule. All components mounted to the exterior of enclosures shall preserve the NEMA rating of enclosure. 4. Each enclosure door shall be fitted with a factory welded steel print storage pocket. 5. Enclosures shall be fitted with factory welded grounding stud on interior of enclosure door and enclosure inner side wall for bonding the two. Separate grounding studs shall be provided for each enclosure door. 6. Enclosures shall be manufactured by: a. Hammond Manufacturing b. Hoffman by nVent c. Rittal d. Saginaw Control & Engineering. B. Freestanding Enclosures: Manufactured from 12 gauge sheet steel, with suitable interior stiffeners, continuously welded for rigid construction, continuous piano type hinge with 3- point latching mechanism operated by padlocking handles constructed of like material as enclosure. 1. Panels 48” wide or greater shall have two doors with a removable center post. 2. Free standing enclosures shall have 12 inch floor stands bolted to enclosure. C. Wall or Slotted Channel Mounted Enclosures: Manufactured from minimum 16 gauge stainless steel, with integrated mounting feet, suitable interior stiffeners, continuously welded for rigid construction, continuous piano type hinge, and quarter turn, tool free latches. Minimum of 3 latches per enclosure door. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 5 D. Door-In-Door Enclosure Requirements: Where door-in-door enclosures are specified, provide an interior hinged sub-panel within enclosure. Sub-panel must swing a minimum 90 degrees out of enclosure, to provide access to mounted internal equipment. Stud mounted sub-panels will not be permitted in lieu of hinged type. E. Enclosure Finishing: 1. NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures shall be finished smooth, free of all burrs, scales, and imperfection, brushed smoothed, and unpainted. 2. Painted steel enclosures, where permitted, shall have an ANSI-61 gray finish. 3. Interior Backplanes: Painted white. F. Enclosure Conditioning 1. Panel Conditioning: Where thermal controls are shown on the Drawings, panel manufacturer will supply forced air cooling with the following features. a. Fans will be arranged with one suction fan at the bottom of an enclosure and one exhaust fan at the opposite side top of the enclosure. For double door, floor standing enclosures, provide one suction fan at the bottom of each side of the enclosure, and two exhaust fans on the top center of the enclosure. Where one side of a double door enclosure is up against a wall, suction fans may be placed low in the doors rather than on the sides. b. Fans will be sized to provide cabinet with 1 air exchange per minute with either fan out of operation. c. Provide removable, washable or replaceable fan filters. d. Fan supply voltage will be 120 VAC or as indicated in the Drawings. e. Fans in occupied spaces must not be louder than 50 dBA at 3’. f. Temperature sensors will be placed in the upper 2/3rd area of the enclosure. g. Fans shall be manufacturer by Hoffman by nVent, Pentair, or Rittal. 2. Condensation Control: A thermostat controlled condensation strip heater shall be provided for all panels located outdoors or in a non-conditioned environment. Strip heater shall be sufficiently guarded to prevent accidental contact by panel components and conductors. G. Nameplates 1. Panels and exterior mounted panel components will be supplied with unique nameplates. Each device nameplate shall describe the field device (e.g. MODULATING VALVE CONTROL) and the function it serves (e.g. H/O/A). Nameplates shall be laser etched stainless steel. Nameplates will be affixed to panel with 3M 9472 adhesive or approved equal. Panel nameplates will utilize 1” text. Device nameplates will utilize 3/16” high text. 2. Each component identified on the Drawings will have a phenolic nameplate attached to the back panel either beside or above the device. Nameplate will have the same schematic designation assigned in the drawings (e.g. RTU-01). Nameplate must be clearly visible and not blocked by wiring, wire duct, or other components. Text will be white, 1/8” high, on a black background. Nameplates will be affixed to back panel with 3M 9472 adhesive or approved equal. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 6 3. All nameplates, device labels, and component labels will use the same sans serif font for the entire project. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION AND POWER DEVICES A. Main Overcurrent Protective Device 1. Where 120 VAC or 480 VAC circuits enter the control panel, provide an overcurrent protective device. Device shall be either a molded case circuit breaker or fuse type disconnect assembly where permitted, heavy duty, backplane mounted. Provide shaft extension for external handle mounted to front panel door to operate device without opening door. External handle shall indicate open and closed positions, must be padlockable, and maintain NEMA rating of enclosure. a. Where door-in-door is specified, disconnect assembly handle shall be mounted to inner door. 2. Device type selection criteria: Provide a molded case circuit breaker for the main overcurrent protective device unless current limiting fuses are required to meet the control panel SCCR specified. B. For control panels with a 480 VAC power feed, provide a, pluggable (replaceable) type Surge Protection Device (SPD): Metal oxide varistor, modular pluggable type, parallel connected, UL 1449 4th Edition, Type 2. SPD shall be DIN-rail mountable, with visual status indicator for protection status. 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): L-N: 320V; L-L: 640V 2. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): L-N: 1500V; L-L: 2500V 3. Nominal Discharge Current Rating (In): 20 kA 4. Minimum surge current rating per phase: 50 kA 5. Provide SPD on incoming power feed after power main overcurrent protective device for each panel provided. 6. Manufactured by Mersen STP Series, Allen Bradley Bulletin 4983-DS, Ditek DTK series, or Bussmann BSPMA3 series. C. Control Power Transformers (CPT): Control power transformers with factory installed primary and secondary fuse blocks for circuit protection. Ground one leg of control transformer on secondary side. CPT is permitted to installed in a separate enclosure to the side of control panel, however the NEMA rating of enclosure must be maintained. 1. Control Power Voltage: Control power shall be 120 VAC from a control transformer located in control panel. 2. Capacity: Sized to handle inrush of all relay coils and all other loads powered by CPT, including motor space heater(s). Coordinate all external loads, including motor space heater(s), with equipment supplier. a. If no motor space heater is supplied with a motor powered by the control panel, the CPT shall be sized with extra VA capacity for the appropriate size electric motor space heater for that motor HP. 3. Spare CPT Capacity: 50 VA. 4. Manufactured by Hammond, Acme, Square D, or Eaton. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 7 2.4 CONTROL DEVICES A. General Purpose Relays 1. Coil voltage of 24 VDC, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. General purpose relays shall be rated for a minimum of a. 1,000,000 mechanical cycles b. 100,000 electrical cycles at contact’s full rated current and voltage c. Dielectric strength between contacts: Minimum of 1000V d. Contacts rated for a minimum of 5 A / 125 V 1). Where contacts are used for motor starting or solenoid operation, contacts will be P300 or DC-23 pilot duty rated. 3. General Purpose relay common features: a. DIN rail mount b. Screw terminals or finger safe screw terminals c. Square base with blade terminals d. Status LED e. Silver alloy contacts f. Form C, double throw contacts 1). Minimum number of contacts is 2 a) All relays will have a minimum of 1 spare contact for relays where the schematics show 1-4 contacts used. b) All relays shown with more than 4 contacts used will have a minimum of 2 spare contacts. c) Combination of multiple relay units with coils wired in series is acceptable. Parallel wired coils are not acceptable. g. Electrical schematic printed on relay. h. Diode suppression across coil for DC coils and MOV suppression across coil for AC coils is required. Diodes and MOVs may be either integral or added as a plug-in module. Loose diodes or MOVs wired across the coil will not be accepted. 4. General Purpose Relays Approved Manufacturers: a. Eaton: D3 series b. Finder: 58 series c. Macromatic: GB series d. Phoenix Contact: RIF-2 series B. Multifunction General Purpose Timing Relays: 1. Coil voltage of 24 VDC, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Timing relays shall be rated for a minimum of a. 1,000,000 mechanical cycles b. 100,000 electrical cycles at contact’s full rated voltage and current c. Dielectric strength between contacts: Minimum of 1000V d. DPDT contacts rated for a minimum of 5 A / 125 V 1). Where Drawings indicate more than two contacts for a timing relay, a general purpose relay may be triggered by the timing relay to provide the required number of contacts. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 8 3. Minimum timing functions will include: a. On delay b. Off delay c. Flashing d. One shot with both leading and trailing edge trigger e. Minimum adjustable time from 0.1 second – 100 hours. Set points are listed in the Drawings 4. Diode suppression across coil for DC coils and MOV suppression across coil for AC coils is required. Diodes and MOVs may be either integral or added as a plug-in module. Loose diodes or MOVs wired across the coil will not be accepted. 5. General Purpose Timing Relays Approved Manufacturers: a. Eaton: TMRP5100 b. Finder: 83.02 c. Macromatic: TR-6812U d. Phoenix Contact: ETD-SL-1T-DTF 2.5 INDICATION AND CONTROL STATION DEVICES A. Pushbuttons, selector switches and indication lights shall be 30.5 mm type with a chromium plated metal bezel; dielectric strength of 2,200V, 200,000 mechanical cycles, shall be oil-tight, dust-tight and water-tight, and shall match the NEMA rating of the associated enclosure. All push buttons and selector switches will be able to accept additional contact decks to expand number of poles to those indicated in the Drawings. B. Pushbuttons, selector switches and indications lights shall be manufactured by Allen- Bradley 800T/H, Square D 9001K or Eaton 10250T. C. Pushbuttons: Spring return type with head flush to bezel, with finger safe guard, with silver alloy contacts rated for 10A continuous current. D. Mushroom Head Pushbuttons: Metal 52mm minimum diameter, red color head, 2- position maintained push-pull type, twist-to-release, with silver alloy contacts rated for 10A continuous current. E. Selector Switches: “Stay Put” short knob type, silver alloy contacts rated for 10A continuous current. F. Indication Lights: LED lamp type, with spring return push-to-test function where indicated on design drawings. Indicator light colors will be as shown in the Drawings. G. Alarm Beacon: Strobing, red or amber lens as indicated in the drawings, 24 VDC LED light, selectable light levels, IP65. Manufactured by Eaton, Solista Maxi or approved equal. 1. For exterior enclosures locate on side of control panel. 2. For interior enclosures locate on top of control panel. 3. Mounting system for light will maintain NEMA rating of panel. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 9 H. Alarm Sounder: 100 dBA minimum with selectable levels, 24 VDC, panel mount, IP66. Manufactured by Eaton, X10 Mini Sounder or approved equal. 1. Locate on side of control panel. 2. Mounting system of sounder will maintain NEMA rating of panel. I. Signal Towers: 60mm modular, three color, 24 VDC LED light, IP65. Manufactured by Schneider Electric, Harmony XVU series or approved equal. 1. Run and stop colors will be as indicated in the drawings and shall be steady. 2. Fault color will be as indicated in the drawings and shall be flashing. J. Elapsed Time Meters: Seven digit electromechanical, non-reset type for totaling of hours; 24 VDC power supply, panel face mounted, manufactured by Simpson Electric model 109ET, or Eaton model 8-T-65-4848PM-402. K. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT): Provide an OIT for the systems listed below. Minimum size for each OIT shown in the schematics and panel elevations is 10”. Installation of an OIT must maintain the enclosure rating. Basis of Design: Beijer Electronics X2 Pro series. 2.6 DC POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Refer to DC system schematics in the Drawings for quantity and arrangement of power supplies, redundancy modules, DC UPS, and batteries. B. All power supplies, redundancy modules, DC UPS, and batteries must be from the same manufacturer. Approved manufacturers are: 1. Altech 2. Phoenix Contact 3. Puls 4. Sola HD Where existing power supply or redundancy units are already installed in a control panel the balance of the specified system must match the existing manufacturer. C. Power Supplies: 1. General Characteristics: a. 120 VAC, 480 VAC, or 125 VDC input as shown in the Drawings b. 24 VDC output with voltage trimmer potentiometer c. Momentary overload capability for downstream fuse breaking d. Input voltage tolerance: +/- 10% e. Minimum efficiency: 90% f. Power factor corrected input to a minimum of 0.9 lagging. g. Load regulation: +/- 2% h. Output ripple: 50 mVpp i. DC OK contact. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 10 2. Sizing: Size power supply output capacity such that each supply in a redundant system is not more than 30% loaded under normal conditions and 60% loaded in the event of a single power supply failure. Do not include spare or future equipment in calculation of initial loading. D. 120 VAC Surge Protective Device (SPD) for power supply input: 1. SPD will be from the same manufacturer as the power supply when addition of the SPD will extend the warranty on the power supply. Where warranty is not extended, SPD may be sourced from any of the approved manufacturers. 2. General characteristics: a. DIN rail mount b. Line and load connectors c. 20 A input current rating d. 50 kA surge current rating e. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): 150 Vrms f. Voltage protection ratings (L-N), (L-G), (N-G): 500 Vpeak g. Form C dry contact to indicate failed unit h. Status indication LED i. UL 1449 3rd edition or later j. 10 year warranty 3. Basis of Design (BOD): Sola HD STV 25K-10S 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. All approved power supply manufacturers b. Bussmann c. Ditek d. Mersen E. DC Redundancy Modules: 1. General Characteristics: a. Transistor based (MOSFET) b. Active load balancing c. Maximum current capacity of module will be equal to or greater than the largest attached power supply. d. Fault and indication contacts: 1). General Fault 2). Loss Of Load Share F. DC UPS: 1. General Characteristics: a. Capable of switching between a 24 VDC power source and a battery. b. Continuously maintain float charge on battery when 24 VDC power source is present. c. Fault and indication contacts: 1). On Battery 2). Battery Fault G. Batteries: 1. General Characteristics: BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 11 a. Battery modules must be compatible with battery protection features of the DC UPS. b. DIN rail or back plane mounted c. Fused (internal or external) d. Operable between 0C – 40C e. Acceptable chemistries: 1). (SLA) Sealed lead acid, also known as (AGM) Absorbed Glass Mat 2). Lithium ion 3). Where required run time and current cannot be practically met with parallel units of SLA or Lithium Ion chemistries, Valve regulated lead acid batteries are acceptable provided they have integral spill protection and are located on a dedicated shelf at the bottom of the control enclosure. 2. Sizing: Size batteries for not less than 12 hours of run time. Battery load will be nominal system load at the time of startup plus 30% spare capacity. Diversity is allowed in the calculations to account for momentary and continuous devices not all operating simultaneously. Battery run time calculations must be provided with the control panel submittal. 2.7 PROCESS INDICATORS A. Process indicator shall take a 4-20 mA DC process variable signal input and display the current value of the process variable in engineering units on a 6 digit display. Display digits shall be, red 0.6" seven segment light emitting diodes (LED's). Decimal point shall be movable by internal switches unit shall be powered by 24 VDC. Displays located in outdoor or subject to direct sunlight will be equipped with a high brightness LED option. B. Process indicator shall be Precision Digital PD 6060 or pre-approved equal by addendum. C. Reference control panel Drawings for location and quantity of process indicators. 2.8 SET POINT GENERATORS A. Set point generator shall be powered by a 4-20 mA DC current loop. Display will be switchable between 0-100% or 4-20 mA. Generator will be adjustable by a single dial. B. Set point generator shall be Precision Digital PD420 or pre-approved equal by addendum. C. Reference control panel drawings for location and quantity of set point generators. 2.9 CURRENT LOOP ISOLATORS A. Current isolators shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly proportional 4-20 mA DC output signal. Accuracy shall be ±0.1% of scale. Isolators shall operate on 24 VDC. Output load capability shall be 0-1000 ohms. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 12 B. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 631T-0500, Allen Bradley 931N-A221 or pre- approved equal by addendum. 2.10 CURRENT SPLITTERS A. Current splitters shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly proportional 4-20 mA DC output signal on each output. Outputs shall be galvanically isolated from each other. Accuracy shall be ±0.1% of scale. Splitter shall operate on 24 VDC. Output load capability shall be 0-1000 ohms. B. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 633T-0500 or pre-approved equal by addendum. 2.11 CURRENT ALARM MODULES A. Each current alarm module shall have dual relays in the same package capable of being programmed as high/high, low/low, or high/low. Alarm contacts will be 5A, NO/NC. Setpoint and deadband will be individually adjustable per channel via a multi-turn potentiometer. The unit shall have one LED per channel to indicate set point has been reached, and one LED to indicate unit is powered up. B. Current alarm modules shall be an Acromag 361A-V5-DMRN-DIN or pre-approved equal by addendum. 2.12 PANEL ANCILLARIES A. Lights: Provide LED strip lights above each door for panels that are 12” or greater in depth. Each door shall be fitted with a door switch to turn on lights when door is opened. 2.13 PANEL WIRING AND WIRE MANAGEMENT A. Wire 1. Power and discrete control conductors: single conductors, stranded tinned copper with 600V type MTW insulation rated for 90C. a. Minimum 120, 208 and 480VAC conductor size shall be #12 AWG. b. Minimum 24 VDC and discrete control conductor size shall be #14 AWG. 2. Analog conductors: #18 AWG shielded, twisted pair, 600V insulation with extruded PVC jacket. 3. Low voltage conductors must comply with Section 26 05 23 “Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables”. B. Power Distribution Blocks: Aluminum body with phenolic or thermoplastic holder, rated for 600 VAC at 90C, suitable for termination of copper conductors, with finger safe terminal cover. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 13 1. Power distribution blocks shall be used for all conductors #10 AWG or larger entering or routed within control panel. 2. Mount to control panel backplane. C. Terminal Blocks: single high stacked 600 volt rated, suitable for up to #10 AWG conductor size, manufactured by Allen-Bradley 1492 H1 or Allen-Bradley 1492-CA2 or approved equal. Two high stacked terminal blocks will not be permitted. 1. Each terminal strip shall have hinged marking surfaces which snap on. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Marking surfaces shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-N41 and labels shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-N43. 2. Provide minimum 25% spare terminals on terminal strip for customer’s use. D. Wire Duct: Slotted duct, with flush cover. Snap back wire retention trap with deep slots to allow larger wire sizes. Wire duct shall be sized to be a maximum of 40% fill. Separate wire ducts shall be provided for AC power, DC power, and control/instrumentation wiring. E. Braided Expandable Wire Sleeving: Hook and loop fastener closure; made of 100% nylon. F. Fiber Optic Patch Panel: All fiber connections entering control panel must be terminated on a din rail or backplane mounted patch panel. Provide sufficient number of connectors within patch panel to terminate all fibers, including spare. G. Colored, vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. All wiring shall be identified with wiring markers with alphanumeric characters. The identification of each wire shall be the same as that shown on the electrical schematic. Each wire shall be so identified at each end. Each end of every wire shall be provided with a heat shrinkable or equivalent sleeve-type wire marker-labeled in accordance with the electrical schematic. Use of adhesive and clip-on type markers is prohibited. 2.14 PANEL LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS A. All components in the control panel shall be completely factory wired. All external control connection points shall terminate on power distribution blocks or terminal blocks. B. Control relays, timing relays, control transformers, control circuit fuse blocks, etc., shall be grouped in the corresponding starter with control wiring kept as short as possible. Ample space shall be allowed between devices so that each component is completely accessible without removing any other device. C. If any MCP or circuit breaker operating handle is more than 6'-6" above the floor surface immediately in front of the control panel, a supplementary operating device shall be attached to the operating handle. This supplementary device shall require a person to reach no more than 6'6" above the floor surface at any point of opening or closing the MCP or circuit breaker. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 14 D. Wires shall be neatly placed in plastic wireways with the covers installed. Wires not in a wireway shall be zip tied together and fastened to the enclosure or back plane via adhesive mounting base with screw. E. Wiring in the control panel shall terminate on numbered terminal strips or power distribution blocks. No other wire connecting devices, such as wirenuts or split bolts, shall be allowed in the control panel. Each starter shall be provided with an individual terminal strip for control wiring. This terminal strip shall be completely accessible from the front. F. 480V Control panels shall have a single means of disconnecting power to the whole enclosure and a separate 120V control power circuit breaker downstream of the control power transformer. G. Wire extending from the enclosure to the enclosure door shall be encased in braided expandable nylon sleeves. H. For door-in-door construction enclosures, all devices intended to be visible while outer door is closed shall have devices located on side of enclosures. I. All reset buttons, VFD keypads, and RVSS keypads must be operable without opening the enclosure or inner door of door-in-door enclosures. J. Controls shall be laid out on a removable backboard and backboard. All external fasteners on the control panel shall be stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Outdoor: NEMA 250, 4X, 304 stainless steel. B. Indoor 1. Non-conditioned space: NEMA 250, 4X, 304 stainless steel. 2. Conditioned space: NEMA 250, Type 12, painted steel. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Enclosure shall be clean and free of sharp corners. Conductors shall be grouped together and routed in a neat and orderly fashion. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Make all electrical connections to all equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither are available, install the equipment using recognized practices of the electrical industry and trade. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 15 B. The final control schematic shall be printed and placed in a clear plastic sleeve after all the field modifications have been made. C. No top entry of conduit into panels shall be permitted, unless located in dry locations. Side and bottom entry only are permitted in wet or damp locations. D. Penetrations must not be made into control panels until raceways systems entering and exiting control panel are watertight. E. Floor mounted enclosures in conditioned environments shall have 4” housekeeping pad. F. All wire terminals shall be torqued to manufacturer’s torque value. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Checkout 1. Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to assure the proper operation of all equipment. B. Tests and Inspections 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner/Engineer before starting the motor(s). 5. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 7. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Prior to energizing control panel loads, the following adjustments must be made and documented. 1. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload- relay pickup and trip ranges. 2. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Industrial Control Panels 26 29 13.01 - 16 3.6 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP A. Remove all metal shavings, dirt and dust from panel interior. Do not use compressed air to clean panel interior. B. Painted steel panels will have any scratches to the paint repaired to factory conditions with manufacturer supplied paint. Any rust developed prior to applying touch up paint will be sanded back to bare metal prior to painting. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13 - 1 SECTION 26 43 13 - LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type 2 surge protective devices (SPDs). 2. Enclosures. 3. Conductors and cables. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. In: Nominal discharge current. B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum designated RMS value of the power frequency voltage that may be continuously applied to the mode of protection of an SPD. C. Metal-Oxide Varistor (MOV): An electronic component with a significant bidirectional, nonlinear current-voltage characteristic. D. Mode(s), Modes of Protection, or Protection Modes: Electrical paths where the SPD offers defense against transient overvoltages. Examples include: line to neutral (L-N), line to ground L-G), line to line (L-L), and neutral to ground (N-G). E. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. F. Type 2 SPDs: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of the service disconnect overcurrent device, including SPDs located at the branch panel. G. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): A rating selected from UL 1449 list of preferred values assigned to each mode of protection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. a. Include electrical characteristics, specialties, and accessories for SPDs. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13 - 2 b. Certification of compliance with UL 1449 by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction including the following information: 1) Tested values for VPRs. 2) In ratings. 3) MCOV, type designations. 4) OCPD requirements. 5) Manufacturer's model number. 6) System voltage. 7) Modes of protection. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer Extended Warranty: Manufacturer warrants that SPDs perform in accordance with specified requirements and agrees to provide repair or replacement of SPDs that fail to perform as specified within extended warranty period. 1. Initial Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion, for labor, materials, and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TYPE 2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ditek. 2. Eaton. 3. Liebert; Vertiv Holdings Co. 4. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 5. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. B. Source Limitations: Obtain devices from single source from single manufacturer. C. General Characteristics: 1. Reference Standards: UL 1449, Type 2. 2. MCOV: Not less than 125 percent of nominal system voltage for 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V power systems, and not less than 115 percent of nominal system voltage for 480Y/277 V power systems. 3. Peak Surge Current Rating: Minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase must not be less than 200 kA. Peak surge current rating must be arithmetic sum of the ratings of individual MOVs in a given mode. 4. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120 V, single-phase, three-wire circuits must not exceed the following: a. Line to Neutral: 900 V. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13 - 3 b. Line to Ground: 800 V. c. Neutral to Ground: 700 V. d. Line to Line: 1500 V. 5. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA. 6. In Rating: 20 kA. D. Options: 1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Include internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components. 3. Include surge counter. 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 4X. 2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide OCPD for installation of SPD in accordance with UL 1449 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Install leads between disconnects and SPDs short, straight, twisted, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with wiring methods in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. 2. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. 3. Do not bond neutral and ground. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and the Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation requirements. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13 - 4 B. Nonconforming Work: 1. SPDs that do not pass tests and inspections will be considered defective. 2. Remove and replace defective units and retest. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests; reconnect them immediately after the testing is over. C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested. END OF SECTION DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Topsoil 31 05 13 - 1 SECTION 31 05 13 - TOPSOIL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Description: This item shall consist of preparing the ground surface for topsoil application, removing topsoil from designated stockpiles or areas to be stripped on the site or from approved sources off the site, and placing and spreading the topsoil on prepared areas in accordance with this specification at the locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. B. Section Includes: 1. Topsoil materials. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing: Excavating topsoil. 2. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. 3. Section 31 23 23 – Fill: General construction area backfilling. 4. Section 32 91 19 – Landscape Grading: Finish grading with topsoil to contours. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory. C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish topsoil material from single source throughout the Work, unless directed otherwise by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. This material shall consist of approved topsoil material and shall be clean, friable, loamy soil capable of supporting plant life. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Topsoil 31 05 13 - 2 2. This material can be excavated and reused material from on-site sources or imported from an approved off-site source. 3. Reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, subsoil, debris, weeds, and foreign matter. 4. Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. 5. Containing minimum of 4 percent and maximum of 25 percent organic matter. 6. Conforming to ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes Unified Soil Classification System). Group Symbol OH or PT. 7. Limit decaying matter to 10 percent of total content by volume. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. B. When tests and/or observations indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Furnish materials of each type from same source throughout the Work, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Off-site borrow sources shall be approved by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Perform as specified in Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing. 3.2 STOCKPILING A. Stockpile materials on each site at locations designated or approved by Engineer. B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements. C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing. D. Stockpile topsoil to only a height which yields safe slope stability. E. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination. F. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials. 3.3 STOCKPILE CLEANUP A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water. B. When borrow area is indicated, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Topsoil 31 05 13 - 3 3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, and stones in excess of 2 inches in size. C. Scarify surface to depth of 4 inches, or as indicated on the Drawings, where topsoil is scheduled. D. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and/or sodding is required to nominal depth of four inches (plus or minus ½ inch), or as indicated on the Drawings. For areas that will receive sod, leave topsoil low. Place topsoil during dry weather. E. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. F. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. G. Manually spread topsoil close to plant material, structures, water and wastewater appurtenances, concrete paving, and curbs to prevent damage. H. Lightly roll placed topsoil. I. Remove surplus topsoil from site. J. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive seeding or sodding. K. Prohibit construction traffic over topsoil. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Site Clearing 31 10 00 - 1 SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Removing and disposing of surface debris, rubbish, and other objectionable materials. 2. Removing and disposing of concrete. 3. Removing and disposing of designated fencing and signage. 4. Removing and disposing of designated trees, shrubs, and other plant life. 5. Herbicide treatment 6. Excavating topsoil. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 05 13 – Topsoil: Soils for fill. 2. Section 31 23 10 – Structural Excavation and Backfill: Structure excavation. 3. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities. 4. Section 31 23 23 – Fill: General construction area backfilling. 5. Section 32 91 19 – Landscape Grading: Finish grading with topsoil to contours. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data for herbicide. Indicate compliance with applicable codes for environmental protection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable code for environmental requirements, disposal of debris, burning debris on site, and use of herbicides. B. Herbicide: 1. License Requirements: Possess either a commercial pesticide applicator license from the Texas Department of Agriculture, or a Texas Structural Pest Control Service License. Provide documentation of license before beginning work. Conduct on-site supervision of all mixing, transporting, handling, spraying, and disposal of materials with licensed personnel. 2. Records: Document work in accordance with all Federal, State, and Local regulations. Submit a copy of the herbicide records on the next business day following application. Submit a final copy of all the herbicide application records upon completion of the work. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Site Clearing 31 10 00 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Furnish herbicide materials in accordance with Section 15 of the 2017 TxDOT Herbicide Operations Manual. B. Pathfinder II, Transline, & Capstone are acceptable products that can be used in conjunction with each other. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified. C. Identify spoils site for placing removed materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Call Texas 811 service at 800-344-8377 not less than three working days before performing Work. 1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas. B. Prior to commencing this work, all erosion control and environmental measures shall be in place. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Locate, identify, and protect structures and utilities indicated to remain, from damage. B. Areas within the construction limits or as indicated shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, etc. as defined above; except trees or shrubs indicated for preservation which shall be carefully trimmed as directed, and shall be protected from scarring, barking or other injuries during construction operations. Exposed ends of pruned limbs or scarred bark shall be pruned, trimmed and treated with an approved asphaltic material within 24 hours of the pruning or injury. C. Locate, protect, and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points, and project engineering reference points. Re-establishment of disturbed or destroyed items shall be by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor (licensed in the state of Texas), at no additional cost to Owner. D. Construction equipment shall not be operated within the drip line of trees, unless indicated. Construction materials shall not be stockpiled under the canopies of trees. No excavation or embankment shall be placed within the drip line of trees until tree wells are constructed. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Site Clearing 31 10 00 - 3 3.4 CLEARING A. Strip and remove from construction area all topsoil, organics, and vegetation to a minimum depth of 6 inches below the existing natural ground surface. B. Remove trees and shrubs within the construction limits unless noted otherwise in the Drawings. Remove stumps, main root ball, and root system. Holes remaining after the removal of all obstructions, objectionable materials, trees, stumps, etc. shall be backfilled with Select Fill and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Fill. C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil. D. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth. 3.5 REMOVAL A. Remove surface debris, rock, and extracted trees, shrubs and other plant life from site, or as indicated on Drawings. B. Remove designated concrete as indicated on Drawings. Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface. C. Remove designated fencing and signage. D. Remove abandoned water and wastewater utilities and septic tanks. Indicated removal termination point for underground utilities on Record Documents. E. Continuously clean-up and remove waste materials from site. Do not allow materials to accumulate on site. F. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition. 3.6 HERBICIDE TREATMENT A. Season: Spray herbicide during active growing periods unless otherwise approved. B. Equipment: Furnish all equipment. 1. Broadcast application: furnish self-propelled equipment tractor mounted or pulled spray rigs with a low center of gravity that allows safe traverse on a maximum 3:1 slope. Provide equipment capable of making uniform broadcast application calibrated at a rate between 20 and 40 gallons per acre (GPA). 2. Basel Bark and Cut Tree applications: Furnish sprayers with low volume spray tips spray system 5500 adjustable spray tip X-1 or X-2, or approved equivalent). 3. Personal Protection Equipment: Follow the manufacturer’s label requirements for personal protection of employees. C. Work Methods: Apply approved herbicide in accordance with the manufacturer’s label recommendations, as shown on the drawings or as approved. Add surfactant and blue dye marker at the manufacturer’s recommended rate unless otherwise approved. Prepare herbicide solution to the rates shown on the drawing using procedures on the herbicide container label. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Site Clearing 31 10 00 - 4 Dispose of empty containers and unused chemical mixtures in accordance with the label directions and local, state, and federal regulations. Cease spraying operation immediately when wind or other environmental conditions cause off-target spray drift, leaves are wet, or rainfall is imminent. An inspection of the treated areas will be made not less than 14 days and no later than 30 days after the application. Re-treat areas in which the undesirable vegetation has not be controlled for no additional compensation. Repair and replace any damaged desirable vegetation or erosion as a result of negligent applications. 1. Broadcast application: spray undesirable vegetation by broadcasting with spray nozzles at the desired rate. Ensure nozzles spray consistent across the area being covered. 2. Basal Bark treatment: apply herbicide solution with a low-volume, low pressure sprayer which thoroughly wets the lower 12-15 in. of stems on all sides, including the root collar area, but not to the point of run-off. Perform application at any time throughout the year, except when the stumps are wet from rainfall or dew prevents spraying to the base of the plant. 3. Cut-stump treatment: cut plants parallel to the ground, not to exceed 2 in. above the ground line. Apply the herbicide solution with a low-volume, low-pressure sprayer which thoroughly wets the area adjacent to the cambium and bard around the entire circumference of the stump. Thoroughly wet the sides of the stump, but not to the point of run-off. Make the herbicide application within 1 hr. from the time each plant is cut. Dispose of removed materials and debris at appropriate off-site locations in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements. 3.7 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, regraded, or within the construction limits of a structure without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading. B. Do not excavate wet topsoil. C. Stockpile in area designated on site to a height which yields safe slope stability and protect from erosion. D. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse from project. E. Remove excavated materials not meeting specified requirements for topsoil from project. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 1 SECTION 31 23 17 – TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Description: This work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and machinery necessary for clearing and removing from the site of the work wherever located, all obstructions, trees, stumps, brush, vegetation, woods and debris; and all earth, rock and other materials to be excavated; the removal of existing structures except where specifically paid for as separate contract pay items; the replacement of topsoil after backfilling is completed; the installation and operation of all pumping, bailing and draining necessary to keep the excavation free from seepage water, water from sewer, drains, ditches, creeks and other sources, and to provide for the uninterrupted flow of sewers and surface waters during progress of the construction; the satisfactory disposal of excess and unsuitable materials not required or which cannot be used for backfilling; compacting and refilling, after settlement of all excavated areas; the restoration of all streets, alleys, rights-of-way and other lands, private or public, damaged or occupied by the Contractor in the performance of the contract to the same (or improved) condition as they were prior to the beginning of the work. B. Section Includes: 1. Excavating trenches for utilities. 2. Embedment material. 3. Compacted fill from top of embedment to subgrade elevations. 4. Backfilling and compaction. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 31 23 23 – Fill. 3. Section 31 23 24 – Flowable Fill. 4. Section 32 05 16 – Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements. 5. Section 32 91 19 – Landscape Grading. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Trenching: Measurement and payment shall be considered subsidiary to the pipe construction for which it pertains. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 2. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 3. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 2 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Trench Safety Plan: A Trench Safety Plan, which describes sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property shall be submitted in accordance with Section 31 23 15 – Trench Safety Systems. C. Product Data: 1. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. D. Submit respective pipe or conduit manufacturer’s data regarding bedding methods of installation and general recommendations. E. Submit sieve analysis reports on all granular materials. F. Submit data for geotextile fabric (when specified) indicating fabric properties and manufacturing data; and construction methods. G. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Trench Safety Plan per Section 31 23 15 – Trench Safety Systems. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to construction. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Embedment Material: The type of bedding/embedment to be used for water mains shall be approved by the Engineer from the following and installed as shown on the Drawings and modified herein: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 3 1. Coarse Aggregate Type A4 (Gravel for Trench Backfill) per Section 32 05 16 - Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements. 2. Flowable Fill per Section 31 23 24 – Flowable Fill. B. Concrete Encasement: Concrete encasement shall consist of lean concrete with a compressive strength of 1,500 psi per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Trench Backfill: 1. Backfill above embedment material (outside traffic areas): Excavated backfill material outside of traffic areas shall consist of an excavated material of gravel, fine rock cuttings, sandy loam, or clay having dimensions no greater than 2 inches, and compacted per applicable sections of this Specification. 2. Backfill above embedment material (beneath pavements): a. Coarse Aggregate Type A1 (Flexible Base) per Section 32 11 23 – Flexible Base and compacted as specified herein. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven or non-woven, from the following manufacturers: 1. U.S. Fabrics, Inc. 2. Alkzo Nobel Geosynthetic Co. 3. Huesker, Inc. 4. TC Mirafi. 5. Tenax Corp. 6. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LINES AND GRADES A. Construct the trenches to lines and grades indicated on Drawings. 1. Engineer reserves right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of utilities when changes are required for Project conditions. B. Use laser-beam instrument with a qualified operator to establish lines and grades. C. Submit electronic layout plans from the pipe manufacturer for review and approval at least 30 days in advance of any actual construction of the project. The Engineer will forward all comments of the review to the Contractor for revision. Revisions shall be made and forwarded to the Engineer for his acceptance. Prior to commencement of the Project, reviewed layout plans will be sent to the Contractor marked for construction. D. Should the Contractor’s procedures not produce a finished pipe placed to grade and alignment, the pipe shall be removed and re-laid, and the Contractor’s procedures modified to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No additional compensation shall be paid for the removal and relaying of pipe required above. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Call Texas 811 service at 800-344-8377 not less than three working days before performing Work. 1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas. B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping. D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain. F. Establish temporary traffic control and detours when trenching is performed in public right-of- way. Relocate controls and reroute traffic as required during progress of Work. 3.3 TRENCHING A. Site Preparation: The construction site shall be prepared for construction operations by the removal and disposal of all obstructions and objectionable materials from the designated construction area. Such obstructions and objectionable materials shall include the removal of designated trees, bushes, grass, miscellaneous stone, brick, concrete, scrap iron and all rubbish and debris whether above or below ground level. It is the intent of this specification to provide for the removal and disposal of all objectionable materials not specifically provided for elsewhere by the Drawings and specifications. The removal of such items shall be accomplished prior to grading and excavation operations. The removal and disposal of such items shall not be measured or paid for as a separate contract pay item. Such items shall be considered as incidental work and the cost thereof shall be included in such contract pay item as provided in the proposal and contract. B. Soil Borings: Whenever the Owner has caused certain test borings to be made on the site, or when any information pertaining of the character or depth of materials is found from observations, records or otherwise, such information revealed thereby may be provided to the Contractor. The action of the Owner in revealing such information shall not, in any manner, be construed as a warranty on the part of the Owner of the exact nature of the subsurface conditions that shall be encountered during construction of the work. Although the information is shown as accurately as possible, the Owner does not guarantee that any materials to be encountered at any point or points are even approximately the same, either in character or elevations, as those shown on the Drawings. The information thus furnished by the Owner is intended only as a guide to the Contractor in making his own investigations preliminary to submitting a bid for the work. C. Existing Structures: 1. All existing structures, improvements and utilities shall be adequately protected, at the expense of the Contractor, from damage that might otherwise occur due to construction operations. Where construction comes in close proximity to existing structures or BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 5 utilities, or if it becomes necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipe lines or other obstructions, the Contractor shall notify and cooperate with the utility or structure Owner. The utility lines and other existing structures shown on the Drawings are for information only and are not guaranteed by the Owner to be complete or accurate as to the location and/or depth. The Contractor shall be liable for damage to any utilities resulting from his operation. During construction, all fire hydrants, valve boxes and other existing utility controls shall be left intact, unobstructed and accessible as noted on the plan. a. Relocation or Replacing Utilities: Unless noted on the Drawings that utilities are to be moved by others, any cost of temporarily or permanently relocating utilities shall be borne by the Contractor. The cost of these replacements shall be included in the Contractor’s bid price for the various items of work; and no separate payment shall be made. In case damage to an existing structure or utility occurs, whether such damage results directly or indirectly from the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall be responsible to restore the structure or utility to its original condition and position without extra compensation. Temporary shut down of water and/or sewer services shall not extend overnight, holidays or weekends. The Owner shall approve all shut downs and may assist in the shut down operations. b. Sewer Services: All sewer services damaged during construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Sewer service reconnections, including necessary adjustments to a sanitary sewer replacement, shall not require the services of a master plumber, if being replaced by a utility Contractor; however, in all cases, repair shall be inspected by the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain such services throughout the construction process. c. Water Services: Service lines shall not be removed during excavation; and the Contractor shall provide adequate support for the services across the open ditch. d. Interrupted Service: Cuts or breaks in sewer mains and laterals, or service connections, shall be restored at the earliest practicable moment in order to give the least possible interruption in service. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying customers of temporary interruption of service. e. Other Utilities: All water mains, water services, sanitary sewers, sanitary sewer house laterals, storm sewers, power conduits, gas mains, gas service laterals and other appurtenances damaged during construction shall be repaired or replaced. Where the exact depth of any utility or obstruction is not shown on a plan, excavation shall be made prior to reaching the obstruction in order to determine adjustments in grade if needed to prevent interference. Redesign to eliminate conflicts may be necessary. Extra compensation shall not be paid for such delays. When it is necessary to remove or adjust another utility, a representative of that utility shall be notified to decide method and work to be done. The Contractor shall make satisfactory arrangements with other utilities for the required cutting or adjustments at the Contractor’s own expense. Other than for items that may be provided in the contract for such work. No extra compensation shall be paid due to delays caused by removal of public utility structures. f. Street Sign Posts and Signs: The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to street sign posts and signs within the limits of his operations that remain in place or are removed and replaced. In the event that street sign posts and signs are damaged or destroyed by the Contractor’s operations, they shall be replaced at the Contractors’ expense. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 6 g. Methods of Removal and Disposal: Materials or parts of structures which are to be broken up, dismantled or removed, and which are to be salvaged, shall be removed, loaded, cleaned and unloaded at sites designated by the Owner and approved by the Engineer. Materials which are not designated to be salvaged shall become property of the Contractor; and he shall dispose of the material at his own cost and expense. D. Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe, unless preapproved by Engineer. E. Trench Width: 1. Reference Drawing details. 2. If trench width within the pipe zone exceeds maximum, the entire pipe zone shall be refilled with approved backfill material, thoroughly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density and then re-excavated to the proper grade and dimensions. Excavation along curves and bends shall be so oriented that the trench and pipe are approximately centered on the centerline of the curve, using short links for pipe and/or bend fillings if necessary. 3. For all utilities to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than 1 foot above the top of the utility after which excavation for the utility shall be made as indicated. F. Alternative Trench Width for Use with Free-Flowing Granular Embedment Material: 1. Based upon preapproval by Engineer, Contractor may use alternative trench widths in conjunction with free-flowing granular embedment material. The minimum and maximum alternative trench widths are specified below; however, in most instances the minimum trench width shall be that width which is sufficient to insure working space between the outside surface of the pipe and the trench wall to safely place trench safety equipment and to properly place and compact the embedment materials. a. Trenches for pipes less than 18 inches in diameter shall have a minimum width of 8 inches and a maximum width of 24 inches on each side beyond the outside surfaces of the pipe bell or coupling. b. Trenches for pipes 18 inches in diameter or greater shall have a minimum width of 6 inches and a maximum width not to exceed one pipe diameter on each side beyond the outside surfaces of the pipe. G. Trench Depth and Depth of Cover: 1. All pipe and in-line appurtenances shall be laid to the grades indicated. The depth of cover shall be measured from the established finish grade, natural ground surface, subgrade for staged construction, street or other permanent surface to the top or uppermost projection of the pipe. a. Where not otherwise indicated, all water piping shall be laid to the following minimum depths: 1) Water piping installed in undisturbed ground in easements of undeveloped areas which are not within existing or planned streets, roads or other traffic areas shall be laid with at least 36 inches of cover. 2) Water piping installed in existing streets, roads or other traffic areas shall be laid with at least 42 inches of cover below finish grade. 2. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for bedding material and pipe. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 7 H. Classification of Excavation: Excavation will not be considered or paid for as a separate item of work, so excavated material will not be classified as to type or measured as to quantity. Full payment for all excavation required for the construction shall be included in the various unit or lump sum contract prices for the various items of work installed, complete in place. No extra compensation, special treatment or other consideration will be allowed due to rock, pavement, caving, sheeting and bracing, falling or rising water, working under and in the proximity of trees or any other handicaps to excavation. I. Dewatering Excavation: Underground piped utilities shall not be constructed or the pipe laid in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the excavation prior to the pipe placing operation to ensure a dry firm granular bed on which to place the underground piped utilities and shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until all concrete and mortar is set. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping or by a well-point installation as conditions warrant. In the event that the excavation cannot be dewatered to the point where the pipe bedding is free of mud, a seal shall be used in the bottom of the excavation. Such seal shall consist of lean concrete with a minimum depth of 3 inches. J. Trench Conditions: 1. Before attempting to lay pipe, all water, slush, debris, loose material, etc., encountered in the trench must be pumped or bailed out and the trench must be kept clean and dry while the pipe is laid and backfilled. Where needed, sump pits shall be dug adjoining the trench and pumped as necessary to keep the excavation dewatered. 2. Backfilling shall closely follow pipe laying so that no pipe is left exposed and unattended after initial assembly. All open ends, outlets or other openings in the pipe shall be protected from damage and shall be properly plugged and blocked watertight to prevent the entrance of trench water, dirt, etc. The interior of the pipeline shall at all times be kept clean, dry and unobstructed. 3. Where the soil encountered at established footing grade is a quicksand, saturated or unstable material, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are indicated: a. All unstable soils shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet below bottom of piped utility. Such excavation shall be carried out to the trench widths above. b. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with concrete seal foundation rock for the entire trench width or coarse aggregate materials placed in uniform layers not to exceed 6 inches, loose measure and compacted by mechanical tamping or other means which will provide a stable foundation for the utility. c. All forms, concrete seals, sheathing and bracing, pumping, additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. K. Trench sidewalls shall be sloped, or sheeting and/or shoring shall be used in accordance with the Trench Safety Plan in order to provide safety and protection in, and to, the excavation. L. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter. M.Correct over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for authorized excavation or replace with lean concrete, or Flexible Base as directed by Engineer. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 8 N. Removing Old Structures: When out of service masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1 foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new sewers, such manholes and inlets within the construction limits shall be removed completely to a depth of 1 foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom of the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided above. Where the trench cuts through storm or wastewater sewers which are known to be abandoned, these sewers shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. When old structures are encountered, which are not visible from the existing surface and are still in service, they shall be protected and adjusted as required to the finished grade. O. Excess material or material which cannot be made suitable for use in embankments will be declared surplus by the Engineer and shall become the property of the Contractor to dispose of offsite at a permitted fill site, without injury to the Owner or any individual. Such surplus material shall be removed from the work site promptly following the completion of the portion of the utility involved. P. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to only a height which yields safe slope stability and protect from erosion. 3.4 SHEETING AND SHORING A. All excavations for trenches, structures, etc. 5 feet in depth or greater are required to have a Trench Safety Plan prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas in accordance with OSHA requirements and Section 31 23 15 – Trench Safety Systems of the specifications. B. Submit Trench Safety Plan prior to any excavation. C. When specified in the Drawings, sheeting and shoring to be left in place as part of the completed Work, cut off minimum 18 inches below finished grade. Otherwise, sheeting and shoring shall be removed at completion of excavation work. D. Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled excavations or adjacent soil. E. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing. 3.5 PIPE BEDDING AND EMBEDMENT A. Where not otherwise provided, all piping shall be installed in a continuous envelope of embedment material meeting the requirement of materials specified herein. B. Embedment material shall extend below and above the outer parts of the pipe, fittings, and accessories for pipe as illustrated on Drawing details. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 9 C. All bracing, struts, etc., installed by the pipe manufacturer (or temporary replacements by the Contractor) shall be kept in place in the pipe, undisturbed, until the trench has been backfilled at least to the top of the pipe. When installing mortar lined and mortar coated steel pipe, all bracings, struts, etc., installed by the pipe manufacturer shall be kept in the pipe, undisturbed until the pipe has been backfilled. 3.6 BACKFILLING A. Backfill Procedure: Backfill procedure is that procedure required to return trenched or excavated areas to a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. Such backfilling occurs in two general areas. They are 1) areas not subjected to vehicular traffic; and 2) areas subjected to, or influenced by, vehicular traffic. The methods of backfilling to be used shall vary with the width of trench, the character of the materials excavated, the method of excavation, the type of conduit and the degree of compaction required. The placing of backfill shall not begin until the pipe structure has been properly bedded and jointed. 1. Trench backfill material is the material required to fill the trench from the top of the embedment to ground elevation or subgrade of a pavement or structure. B. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials. C. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Place geotextile fabric when specified in the Drawings. E. Place fill material in continuous layers and compact to the density specified herein. F. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trench. G. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. H. Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day, unless preapproved by Engineer. I. Protect open trench to prevent danger to the Owner, the public, and users of the Project site. 3.7 COMPACTION A. Compaction of all bedding, embedment, and backfill materials shall be performed in a manner that shall not crack, crush and/or cause the installed pipe to be moved from the established grade and/or alignment, as shown on the Drawings. Satisfactory density shall be obtained at various depths on all backfill material as indicated from random selected test points prior to the required exfiltration or pressure tests that are to be performed on lines being constructed. The required moisture content shall be at not less than 2 percent below nor more than 4 percent above the optimum moisture of the material or as specified by the Engineer. B. Densities for Bedding and Embedment: 1. Coarse Aggregate Type A1 (Flexible Base) embedment shall be mechanically compacted in 6 inch lifts to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor Density BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 10 ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)), unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Crushed Stone) embedment shall be mechanically compacted in 6 inch lifts to a minimum of 95 percent of Maximum Dry Density in accordance with TEX-113-E – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture- Density Relationship of Base Materials, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. Coarse Aggregate Type A4 (Gravel Trench Backfill) embedment shall be mechanically compacted in 6 inch lifts to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)), unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Backfill Densities – Areas Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic: The trench backfill shall be mechanically compacted to the top of the subgrade in 6 inch loose lifts to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 -Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3), at, or above, optimum moisture content. D. Backfill Densities – Areas Not Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic: The trench backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches loose depth and shall be compacted by mechanical means. Compaction methods to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3), at, or above, optimum moisture content. 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (0.08 feet) from required elevations. C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch (0.08 feet) from required elevations. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) or as otherwise specified. C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following: 1. Density Tests: ASTM D2922 – Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Plane by Nuclear Methods. 2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017 – Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 17 - 11 D. Frequency of Tests: The in-place density/moisture content shall be tested and verified at an average frequency of once per 100 linear feet per lift along the trench line or at least once per utility excavation per lift in areas where less than 100 linear feet of pipe is installed. E. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 1 SECTION 31 23 23 - FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Description: This item shall consist of the placing and compacting of suitable materials obtained from approved sources for utilization in the construction of civil site improvements. B. Reference Section 31 23 10 – Structural Excavation and Backfill for requirements related to project structures. C. Section Includes: 1. Fill under minor structural foundations, such as vaults. 2. Fill for over-excavation. 3. Backfilling of minor structural foundations, manholes, and utility structures to subgrade elevations. 4. Backfilling site structures to subgrade elevations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction. C. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 50 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory. D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Subsoil Fill: All subsoil fill shall conform to the following material types: 1. Subsoil Type S1 (Select Fill, or Select Borrow): This material shall consist of sand or other suitable granular material, free from vegetation or deleterious or objectionable matter reasonably free from lumps of earth and when tested by standard TxDOT laboratory methods, shall meet the following requirements: a. The Liquid Limits shall not exceed 35. b. The Plasticity Index shall not be less than 4 nor more than 15. c. Minimum and maximum passing No. 200 sieve: 10% and 70%, respectively. d. No rocks greater than 2 inches in diameter. 2. Subsoil Type S2 (Borrow): a. This material shall consist of suitable non-swelling (soils with plasticity index less than 20) earth material such as loam, clay or other such materials that will form a stable embankment or backfill. b. This material shall be free of lumps larger than 3 inches in diameter, and rocks larger than 4 inches in diameter. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 2 3. Subsoil Type S3 (On-Site Material): a. This material shall be excavated from on-site and re-used for fills embankment or backfill). b. This material shall be free of lumps larger than 3 inches in diameter, and rocks larger than 4 inches in diameter, except as follows: i. For landscape berm construction, the material shall be free of rocks larger than 6 inches in the top 2 feet of embankment and free of rocks larger than 12 inches below the top 2 feet of embankment. B. Structural Fill: Refer to Section 31 23 10 - Structural Excavation and Backfill and Drawings for material requirements. C. Coarse Aggregate Fill: Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Crushed Stone);Coarse Aggregate Type A3 (Gravel Base Course);or Coarse Aggregate Type A4 (Gravel for Trench Backfill) as specified in Section 32 05 16 – Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements. D. Concrete: Lean concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 1,500 psi per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. E. Flowable Fill: As specified in Section 31 23 24 – Flowable Fill. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Products and execution shall be specified in the drawings. Non- biodegradable, woven or non-woven, from the following manufacturers: 1. Alkzo Nobel Geosynthetic Co. 2. Huesker, Inc. 3. TC Mirafi. 4. Tenax Corp. 5. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR STRUCTURES AND PAVEMENTS A. See 31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill 3.2 EMBANKMENT/FILLING A. Prior to placing any embankment (fill), all tree protection, tree wells and erosion control devices shall be in place and all “Clearing” operations shall have been completed on the areas over which the embankment (fill) is to be placed. Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled with suitable material and thoroughly tamped by approved methods before commencing embankment construction. The surface of the ground, including plowed loosened ground or surface roughened by small washes, shall be restored to approximately its original slope and the ground surface thus prepared shall be compacted by sprinkling and rolling. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 3 B. Construction equipment shall not be operated within the drip line of the trees, unless indicated. Construction materials shall not be stockpiled under the canopies of trees. No excavation or embankment shall be placed within the drip line of trees unless indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated, the surface of the ground of all unpaved areas, other than rock which are to receive embankment (fill), shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 4 inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. D. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment (fill). E. Except as otherwise indicated, embankments (fills) shall be constructed in successive 6 inch layers, loose measure, for the full width of the individual cross section and in such length as are best suited to the sprinkling and compaction methods utilized. F. Minor quantities of rocks not larger than 4 inches, encountered in constructing earth embankment may be incorporated in the earth embankment layers, provided such placement of rock is not within 10 feet of any structure. G. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. Where layers of unlike materials abut each other, each layer shall be feathered on a slope of 1:20 or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in soil. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrows shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, discing or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. H. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for optimum compaction shall be evenly applied and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary. I. All cuts, whether full width or partial width cuts in the side of a hill, which are not required to be excavated below subgrade elevation shall be scarified to a uniform depth of at least 6 inches below grade and the material shall be mixed and reshaped by blading and then sprinkled and rolled in accordance with the requirements outlined above for earth embankments and to the same density as that required for the adjacent embankment. J. Compaction of embankments (fills) shall be to a minimum of 95% and less than 100% of its maximum dry density when determined in accordance with ASTM D698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft- lbf/ft3), Method D, Standard Proctor, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. The subsoil shall be no less than its optimum moisture to not greater than 3 percentage points above its optimum moisture content at the time of testing. After each layer of earth embankment (fill) is complete, density tests as necessary will be made. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 4 K. Embankment (fill) shall slope away from building minimum 5 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. L. Grade changes in embankment (fill) shall be made with gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. M.Remove surplus fill materials from site. 3.3 BACKFILLING A. As soon as practicable, all portions of excavation not occupied by the permanent structure shall be backfilled. Backfill material shall comply with “Subsoil Fill” as specified herein. B. That portion of backfill which will not support any portion of completed structure, roadbed, or embankment shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement) and shall be compacted in accordance with Paragraph 3.4, “Compaction” for “Subsoil Fill.” C. That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the structure, roadbed, or embankment shall be placed in uniform layers not more than 8 inches in depth (loose measurement) and shall be compacted in accordance with Paragraph 3.5, “Compaction” for Subsoil Fill” and shall be compacted to that density by means of mechanical tampers or rammers, except that the use of rolling equipment of the type generally used in compaction embankments will be permitted on portions which are accessible to such equipment. All portions of embankment too close to any portion of a structure to permit compaction by the use of the blading and rolling equipment used on adjoining sections of embankment, shall be placed and compacted in the same manner as specified above for backfill material. Unless otherwise indicated, hand tamping will not be accepted as an alternate for mechanical compaction. As a general rule, material used in filling or backfilling the portions described in this paragraph shall be “Subsoil Fill,” free of any appreciable amount of gravel or stone particles larger than 4 inches in greater dimension and of a gradation that permits thorough compaction. When required by the Drawings or by written order of the Engineer, structural fill or coarse aggregate material shall be used for backfilling. D. The surface of hillsides to receive embankment (fill) shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 4 inches and benches cut before embankment materials are placed. The embankment shall then be placed in layers, as hereinafter specified, beginning at the low side in partial width layers and increasing the widths as the embankment is raised. The material which has been loosened shall be recompacted simultaneously with the embankment material placed at the same elevation. E. Where embankments are to be placed adjacent to or over existing roadbeds, the roadbed slopes shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of not less than 6 inches and the embankment built up in successive layers, as hereinafter specified, to the level of the old roadbed before its height is increased. Then, if indicated, the top of the old roadbed shall be scarified and recompacted with the next layer of the new embankment. The total depth of the scarified and added material shall not exceed the permissible layer depth. F. No backfill shall be placed against any structural wall until such structure has been in place at least 7 days. Where the top of walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls, do not begin backfilling operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and the concrete BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 5 has cured for a minimum of 7 days. Backfill placed simultaneously around all sides of abutments, foundations, walls, piers, etc. shall be deposited on both sides to approximately the same elevation at the same time. G. Care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action of backfill against the structure and the slopes bounding the excavation shall be stepped or serrated to prevent such action. 3.4 COMPACTION A. Subsoil Fill: 1. Subsoil Type S1 (Select Fill, or Select Borrow): Compaction shall be to a dry density of at least 95 percent Standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)) and shall be within the range of the material’s optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the material’s optimum moisture content. Placement shall be in lifts not exceeding 8 inches before compaction. 2. Subsoil Type S2 (Borrow) and Subsoil Type S3 (On-Site Material): Compaction shall be to a dry density of at least 95 percent Standard Proctor maximum dry density ASTM D698 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)) and shall be within the range of the materials optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the materials optimum moisture content. Placement shall be in lifts not exceeding 8 inches before compaction. B. Structural Fill: Reference Section 31 23 10 – Structural Excavation and Backfill. C. Coarse Aggregate Fill: 1. Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Crushed Stone): Compaction shall be a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with TxDOT Test Method TEX-113-E – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Coarse Aggregate Type A3 (Gravel Base Course): Gravel Base Course used as structural fill beneath foundations and for backfilling structures shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches before compaction, and shall be compacted mechanically to a minimum 95 percent of Standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)) and within 2 percentage points of the materials optimum moisture content, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. Coarse Aggregate Type A4 (Gravel Trench Backfill): Gravel Trench Backfill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches before compaction, and shall be compacted mechanically to a minimum 95 percent of Standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)) and within 2 percentage points of the materials optimum moisture content. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Grading of Fill: Plus or minus 0.10 feet from required elevations. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 6 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following: 1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method, ASTM D2167 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method, ASTM D2922 – Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods, or TEX-115-E – Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials as appropriate for the material being tested. 2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017 – Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods. 3. Unless noted otherwise, in place compaction tests shall be conducted at a rate of one test per 1,000 square feet for every lift or at least one test per structure for every lift for structures less than 1,000 square feet. D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest. E. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under structural foundations, pavers, paving, and sidewalks. Soft spots shall be removed, replaced, and retested. F. At a minimum, quality assurance shall be as outlined below. Type of Work Item Sample Frequency Sample Size Minimum Testing Select Fill Select Type S1 Select Fill or Select Borrow) Compaction 1 per soil Type 1 per 1000 sq.ft. per lift (min. of 3 per lift) 50 lbs.- Gradation P.I. Moisture-Density Relationship Field Density Tests Subsoil for Fill and Backfill Subsoil Type S2 Borrow); Subsoil Type S3 (On-Site) Compaction 1 per soil Type 1 per 1000 sq.ft. per lift (min. of 3 per lift) 50 lbs.- Gradation P.I. Moisture-Density Relationship Field Density Tests Structural Fill Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Crushed Stone) Compaction 1 per type per 1000 cu. Yds. 1 per 2500 sq.ft. per lift (min. of 3 per lift) 50 lbs - Gradation/sieve Field Density Tests BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Fill 31 23 23 - 7 Type of Work Item Sample Frequency Sample Size Minimum Testing Structural Fill Coarse Aggregate Type A3; Coarse Aggregate Type A4 Compaction 1 per type per 1000 cu. Yds. 1 per 2500 sq.ft. per lift (min. of 3 per lift) 50 lbs - Sieve P.I. Moisture-Density Field Density Tests Provide at least 1 compaction test per lift if structural fill area is less than tabulated value. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to erosion. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 1 SECTION 31 23 24 - FLOWABLE FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flowable fill for: a. Site civil structure backfill. b. Utility bedding. c. Utility backfill. d. Filling abandoned utilities. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 23 10 – Structural Excavation and Backfill. 2. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 3. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 5. ASTM C403/C403M - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance. 6. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 7. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 8. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 9. ASTM C1040 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Unhardened and Hardened Concrete In Place By Nuclear Methods. 10. ASTM D4832 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, manhole, tank or cable. B. Excavatable Flowable Fill: Lean cement concrete fill used where future excavation may be required such as fill/embedment for utility and pipe trenches, bridge abutments, and culverts. C. Non-Excavatable Flowable Fill: Lean cement concrete fill used where future excavation is not anticipated such as fill below structure foundations and filling abandoned utilities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 2 B. Materials Source: Submit name of flowable fill materials suppliers. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify Product meets or exceeds specified requirements. D. Mix Design: 1. Submit flowable fill mix design for each specified strength. Submit separate mix designs as required for the following: a. Flowable fill work during hot and cold weather. b. Air entrained flowable fill work. 2. Identify design mix ingredients, proportions, properties, admixtures, and tests. 3. Submit test results to certify flowable fill mix design properties meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Delivery Tickets: 1. Submit duplicate delivery tickets indicating actual materials delivered to Project site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install flowable fill during inclement weather or when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements before installing flowable fill to establish quantities required to complete the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOWABLE FILL A. Flowable Fill - Excavatable Type: Lean cement concrete fill used where future excavation may be required such as fill for utility trenches, bridge abutments, and culverts. B. Flowable Fill - Non-excavatable Type: Lean cement concrete fill used where future excavation is not anticipated such as fill below structure foundations and filling abandoned utilities. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 (Standard Specification for Portland Cement) Type I - Normal; Type IA - Air Entraining; Type II - Moderate. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 3 B. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C620. B. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M. 1. Type A - Water Reducing. 2. Type B - Retarding. 3. Type C - Accelerating. 4. Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding. 5. Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating. 6. Type F - Water Reducing, High Range. 7. Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Class C or F obtained from residue of electric generating plant using ground or powdered coal. D. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017/C1017M Type I, plasticizing. Type II, plasticizing and retarding. 2.4 MIXES A. Mix and deliver flowable fill in accordance with ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete, Option C. FLOWABLE FILL DESIGN MIX ITEM EXCAVATABLE NON-EXCAVATABLE Cement Content 75-100 lbs/cy 100-150 lbs/cy Fly Ash Content None 150-600 lbs/cy Water Content Per mix design Per mix design Air Entrainment 5-35 percent 5-15 percent 28 Day Compressive Strength Maximum 150 psi. Minimum 250 psi Unit Mass (Wet)80-110 pcf 100-125 pcf Temperature, Minimum at point of delivery 50 degrees F 50 degrees F B. Provide water content in design mix to produce self-leveling, flowable fill material at time of placement. C. Design mix air entrainment and unit mass are for laboratory design mix and source quality control only. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 4 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Reference Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements. B. Test and analyze properties of flowable fill design mix and certify results for the following: 1. Design mix proportions by weight of each material. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates - for material properties and gradation. 3. Properties of plastic flowable fill design mix including: a. Temperature. b. Slump. c. Wet unit mass. d. Yield. e. Cement factor. 4. Properties of hardened flowable fill design mix including: a. Compressive strength at 1 day, 7 days, and 28 days. Report compressive strength of each specimen and average specimen compressive strength. b. Unit mass for each specimen and average specimen unit mass at time of compressive strength testing. C. Prepare delivery tickets containing the following information: 1. Project Designation. 2. Date. 3. Time. 4. Class and Quantity of flowable fill. 5. Actual batch proportions. 6. Free moisture content of aggregate. 7. Quantity of water withheld. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify excavation and trenching is complete. C. Verify utility installation is complete and tested before placing flowable fill. D. Verify excavation is dry and dewatering system is operating. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Support and restrain utilities to prevent movement and flotation during installation of flowable fill. B. Protect structures and utilities from damage caused by hydraulic pressure of flowable fill before fill hardens. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 5 C. Protect utilities and foundation drains to prevent intrusion of flowable fill. 3.3 INSTALLATION - FILL, BEDDING, AND BACKFILL A. Place flowable fill by chute, pumping or other methods approved by Engineer. 1. When required, place flowable fill under water using tremie procedure. 2. Do not place flowable fill through flowing water. B. Place flowable fill in lifts to prevent lateral pressures from exceeding structural capacity of structures and utilities. C. Place flowable fill evenly on both sides of utilities to maintain alignment. D. Place flowable fill to elevations indicated on Drawings without vibration or other means of compaction. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FILLING ABANDONED UTILITIES – NOT USED 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements. B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 1. Take samples for tests for every 150 cu yd of flowable fill, or fraction thereof, installed each day. 2. Sample, prepare and test four compressive strength test cylinders in accordance with ASTM D4832. Test one specimen at 3 days, one at 7 days, and two at 28 days. 3. Measure temperature at point of delivery when samples are prepared. C. Perform in place penetration (density) tests using hand held penetrometer to measure penetration resistance of hardened flowable fill, in accordance with ASTM C403. 1. Perform tests at locations as directed by Engineer. D. Perform in-place density tests using nuclear test device, in accordance with ASTM C1040. 1. Perform tests at locations as directed by Engineer. E. Defective Flowable Fill: Fill failing to meet the following test requirements or fill delivered without the following documentation. 1. Test Requirements: a. Minimum temperature at point of delivery. b. Compressive strength requirements for each type of fill. 2. Documentation: Duplicate delivery tickets. F. Submit delivery tickets indicating actual materials delivered to Project site. Delivery tickets shall contain project description, date, time, class and quantity of mix, actual batch proportions, free moisture content of aggregate and quantity of water withheld. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Flowable Fill 31 23 24 - 6 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excess flowable fill from Project site. B. Restore facilities and site areas damaged or contaminated by flowable fill installation to existing condition before installation. END OF SECTION DIVISION 32 CIVIL SITE IMPROVEMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 05 16 - 1 SECTION 32 05 16 - AGGREGATES FOR CIVIL SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Coarse aggregate materials. 2. Fine aggregate materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities 2. Section 31 23 23 – Fill. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Aggregate: 1. Basis of Measurement and Payment: Fine aggregate and coarse aggregate will not be paid for as a separate bid item, but shall be considered incidental to the item for which they pertain. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials: 1. AASHTO M147 - Standard Specification for Materials for Aggregate and Soil- Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 2. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 2. ASTM D448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction 3. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 4. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). 5. ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 6. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. C. Texas Department of Transportation’s Standard Laboratory Test Procedures: 1. Tex-113-E - Moisture Density Determination (for coarse grained material). 2. Tex-114-E - Moisture Density Determination (for fine grained material). BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 05 16 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb samples of each type of fill to testing laboratory. C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers. D. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Certify that aggregates meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish each aggregate material from single source throughout the Work. B. Perform Work in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation’s Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges (latest Edition). C. Maintain one copy of Texas Department of Transportation’s Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges (latest Edition) document on site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate Type A1 (Flexible Base): Conforming to TxDOT’s Standard Specifications Item 247, Grade 1 or 2, Type A. B. Coarse Aggregate Type A2 (Crushed Stone): washed; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C136; within the following limits, based on ASTM D448: Coarse Aggregate Type A2 Grading Grade No. 2 Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inches 100% 1-1/2 inches 95-100% 3/4 inch 40-70% 3/8 inches 10-30% No. 4 0-5% OR BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 05 16 - 3 Coarse Aggregate Type A2 Grading Grade No. 3 Sieve Size Percent Passing 1-1/2 inches 95-100% 3/4 inch 60-90% 1/2 inch 25-60% No. 4 0-5% C. Coarse Aggregate Type A3 (Gravel Base Course): Durable particles of gravel mixed with approved binding material; and shall be free from thin or elongated pieces, clay lumps, soil loam or vegetable matter. The material may be bank-run; or the binder may be added and incorporated by methods approved by Engineer. Should the material be secured from pits, the overburden or stripping from the site of the pits shall be removed to such a distance that none shall fall or wash into the pit; and it shall be placed so as to divert surface drainage away from the pit site. The pit shall be well drained at all times. The pits shall be opened in such a manner as to expose the vertical faces of all strata of acceptable materials; and, unless otherwise directed by Owner, the materials shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through all the exposed strata, in order that a uniformity mixed material shall be secured. 1. Tests: The soil binder shall meet the following requirements: a. The liquid limit shall not exceed 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D423. b. The plastic limit shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM D424. c. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 nor be less than 4 when calculated in accordance with ASTM D424. d. The preparation of samples for testing according to ASTM D423 and D424 shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2217. e. The linear shrinkage shall not exceed 6 percent. 2. Gradation: The material when tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following percentages by weight: a. Material passing the No. 40 sieve 425 µm) shall be known as “soil binder.” b. Materials containing conglomerate or gravel larger than 2” (50 mm) in any dimension shall be broken up and uniformly mixed with the remainder of the materials. Upgrading by the addition of washed gravel in order to meet the requirements of this section shall be permitted. c. If additional binder and/or soil binder are considered necessary by the Owner after gravel materials are spread and shaped, same shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed by the Owner; such additional binder and/or soil binder shall be carefully and evenly Passing 1 ¾ in. sieve (45.0 mm)100% Passing ¾ in. sieve (9.5 mm)40 to 80% Passing No. 4 sieve (4.75 mm)25 to 60% Passing No. 40 sieve (425 µm)15 to 35% BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 05 16 - 4 incorporated with the pit materials in place by scarifying, harrowing or other methods approved by the Owner. 3. Rejection: Gravel which fails to meet the requirements of these specifications may be rejected by the Engineer. Such rejection shall incur no cost to the Owner. D. Coarse Aggregate Type A4 (Gravel for Trench Backfill): Sandy gravel material, free of clay, shale, organic matter; meeting the following requirements: 1. Tests: a. The liquid limit shall not exceed 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation D423. b. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 nor be less than 4 when calculated in accordance with ASTM Designation D424. c. The linear shrinkage shall not exceed six percent. 2. Gradation: The material when tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following percentages by weight: 2.2 FINE AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Fine Aggregate Type A5 (Sand): Conforming to TxDOT’s Standard Specifications Item 421.2(5), “Fine Aggregate.” 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. B. Coarse Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D698. C. Fine Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D698. D. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STOCKPILING A. Stockpile materials on site at locations designated by Engineer. B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements. Passing 2 in. sieve 100% Passing 1/2 inch sieve 15 to 60% Passing No. 4 sieve 0 to 10% Passing No. 100 sieve 0 to 5% BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Aggregates for Civil Site Improvements 32 05 16 - 5 C. Separate different aggregate materials with dividers or stockpile individually to prevent mixing. D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials. 3.2 STOCKPILE CLEANUP A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Landscape Grading 32 91 19 - 1 SECTION 32 91 19 - LANDSCAPE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 05 13 – Topsoil. 2. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities 3. Section 31 23 23 – Fill. 4. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish each topsoil material from single source throughout the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Topsoil: As specified in Section 31 05 13 – Topsoil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify structural and trench backfilling have been inspected. C. Verify substrate base has been contoured and compacted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final Work. B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving, and curbs. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Landscape Grading 32 91 19 - 2 3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 2 inches in size. Remove contaminated subsoil. C. Scarify surface to depth of 4 inches where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil. 3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and/or sodding is required to nominal depth of four inches, or as indicated on the Drawings. Place topsoil during dry weather. B. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. C. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. D. Manually spread topsoil close to plant material, structures, water and wastewater appurtenances, concrete paving, and curbs to prevent damage. E. Lightly roll placed topsoil. F. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site. G. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting installed construction. B. Prohibit construction traffic over topsoil. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 1 SECTION 32 92 19 - SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Description: This item shall consist of preparing a seed bed to the lines and grades indicated, sowing of seed, fertilizing, mulching with straw, asphalt, cellulose fiber and other management practices along and across such areas as are indicated or as directed by the Engineer. B. Section Includes: 1. Fertilizing. 2. Seeding. 3. Hydroseeding. 4. Mulching. 5. Maintenance. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 05 13 – Topsoil. 2. Section 32 91 19 – Landscape Grading. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C602 - Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, Brome Grass, or vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit data for seed mix, fertilizer, mulch, stabilizer and other accessories. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; and types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, germination percentage, inert matter percentage, weed percentage, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Seed Supplier: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service. B. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits vigorous growing condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. All seed must meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law including the labeling requirements for showing pure live seed (PLS), name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season’s crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within nine months of the time of delivery to the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags or containers. A sample of each variety of seed shall be furnished for analysis and testing when directed by the Engineer. The amount of seed planted per acre shall be of the type specified below. B. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. Straw mulch shall be spread BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 3 uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the Engineer at the rate of 2 to 2 1/2 tons of straw per acre. The actual rate of application will be designated by the Engineer. Straw may be hand or machine placed and adequately secured. B. Cellulose Fiber Mulch: Cellulose fiber mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the Engineer at the rate of 45 to 80 lbs per 1000 square feet. C. Fertilizer: All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or containers clearly labeled showing the analysis. The fertilizer is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas Fertilizer Law. A pelleted or granulated fertilizer shall be used with an analysis indicated below. The figures in the analysis represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fifty percent or greater of the Nitrogen required shall be in the form of Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3). The remaining Nitrogen required may be in the form of Urea Nitrogen CO(NH2)2). In the event it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer of a different analysis, it shall be a pelleted or granulated fertilizer with a lower concentration. The total amount of nutrients furnished and applied per acre shall equal or exceed that specified for each nutrient. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade; recommended for grass; of proportion necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: Nitrogen 15 percent, phosphoric acid 15 percent, soluble potash 15 percent. D. Lime: ASTM C602, Class T agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent. E. Water: Clean, fresh and free of industrial wastes and other substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of grass. F. Soil Retention Blanket: Jute mesh or matting (open weave), or other material used as a soil retention blanket for erosion control purposes. G. Herbicide: As specified. H. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed. I. String: Inorganic fiber. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic matter content, and pH value. C. Provide recommendation for fertilizer and lime application rates for specified seed mix as result of testing. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 4 D. Testing is not required when recent tests and certificates are available for imported topsoil. Submit these test results to testing laboratory. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to determine suitability. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive the Work of this section. 3.2 PREPARING SEED BED A. After the designated areas have been rough graded to the lines, grades and typical sections indicated or as provided for in other items of this contract and any other soil area disturbed by the construction, a suitable seed bed shall be prepared. The seed bed shall consist of either 4 inches of approved topsoil or 4 inches of approved salvaged topsoil cultivated and rolled sufficiently to a state of good tilth which could prevent the seed from being covered too deep for optimum germination. The optimum depth for seeding shall be 1/4 inch. Water shall be applied as required to prepare the seed bed. Seeding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements hereinafter described. 3.3 FERTILIZING A. Apply lime at application rate recommended by soil analysis. Work lime into top 6 inches of soil. B. Apply fertilizer at application rate as indicated below: Application Rate Use Type Pound Per Acre Broadcast Seeding Any 400 Hydraulic Seeding Water Soluble 653 Sodding Any 300 C. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. D. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine used to apply seed. E. Mix fertilizer thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. F. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer. Irrigate top level of soil uniformly. 3.4 BROADCAST SEEDING A. The seed or seed mixture in the quantity specified shall be uniformly distributed over the prepared seed bed areas indicated or where directed. If the sowing of seed is by hand, rather BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 5 than by mechanical methods, the seed shall be sown in two directions at right angles to each other. If mechanical equipment is used, all varieties of seed, as well as fertilizer, may be distributed at the same time, provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. After planting, the planted area shall be rolled with a corrugated roller of the Culitpacker” type. All rolling of the slope areas shall be on the contour. B. Seed Mixture and Rate of Application for Broadcast Seeding: 1. From September 15 to March 1, seeding shall be with a combination of unhulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet and winter rye at a rate of 7 pounds per 1000 square feet that has a PLS = 0.83. 2. From March 1 to September 15, seeding shall be with hulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet with a PLS = 0.83. Fertilizer shall be applied as specified herein. C. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or when winds are over 12 mph. E. Lightly roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 112 lbs/linear foot. F. Immediately following seeding and rolling, apply mulch to thickness of 1/8 inch. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. G. The broadcast seeded areas shall immediately be watered with a minimum of 5 gallons of water per square yard or as needed and in the manner and quantity as directed by the Engineer. Water shall be applied at a minimum rate of 10 gallons per square yard weekly except when rainfall of 1/2 inch or greater occurs on the site, the water can be postponed for one week or as directed, until the grass is uniformly 1 1/2 inches in height. 3.5 HYDRAULIC SEEDING A. The seed bed shall be prepared as specified above and hydraulic seeding equipment, which is capable of placing all materials in a single operation, shall be used. March 1 to September 15: Hydraulic seeding mixture and minimum rate of application per 1000 square feet: Hulled Bermuda Seed (PLS = 0.83) Water Soluble Fertilizer Cellulose Fiber Mulch Soil Tackifier 1 lb.15 lbs.45.9 lbs.1.4 lbs. September 15 to March 1: Add 7 pounds per 1000 square feet of winter rye with a PLS = 0.83 to above mixture. Fertilizer shall be applied as specified herein. B. Watering: Hydraulically planted seeded area shall be watered weekly, except when rainfall of 1/2 inch or greater occurs on the site, the watering can be postponed for one week, BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Seeding 32 92 19 - 6 commencing after the tackifier has dried or until the grass is uniformly 1 1/2 inches in height. The native grass seeded area shall be watered at a minimum rate of 5 gallons per square yard weekly commencing after the tackifier has dried or until the grass is uniformly 1 1/2 inches in height. The watering can be postponed for one week or as directed, when rainfall of 1 1/2 inches or greater occurs on the site. 3.6 SEED PROTECTION A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 3:1 (Horizontal:Vertical) or greater with soil retention blanket. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Overlap edges and ends of adjacent rolls minimum 12 inches. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at each mowing. Perform first mowing when seedlings are 40 percent higher than desired height. B. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary. C. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming. Do not let clippings lay in clumps. D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. E. Lightly roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. G. Immediately reseed areas showing bare spots. H. Repair washouts or gullies. I. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. END OF SECTION DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 1 SECTION 40 05 06 - COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe penetrations. 2. Threaded insulating connections. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Expansion joints. 5. Flexible expansion joints. 6. Service saddles. 7. Tapping sleeves. 8. Sleeve-type couplings. 9. Grooved couplings. 10. Miscellaneous specialties. B. This Section includes requirements for process piping systems. Refer to Related Sections and specific Drawing details for other discipline requirements. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 73 20 – Opening and Penetrations. 2. Section 40 05 00 – Common Requirements for Process Piping. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association: 1. C153/A21.53, Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 2. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3. C116, Protective Fusion-Bonded Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaced of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 4. C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 5. C213 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings. 6. AWWA C219 – Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. B. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M – Structural Welding Code – Steel. C. ASME International: 1. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch) 2. ASME A13.1 – Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 3. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 4. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ½ through NPS 24. 5. ASME B31.3 – Process Piping. 6. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping. 7. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section IX – Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 2 D. ASTM International: 1. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 3. ASTM D2000 – Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 4. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 6. ASTM E814 – Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems. 7. ASTM E1966 – Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems E. Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.: 1. EJMA Standards. F. NSF International: 1. NSF 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 2. NSF 600 – Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water. 3. NSF 372 – Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer catalog information for each specified product. 2. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to- face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 3. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature, pressure rating, and expansion compensation. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Identification: a. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for pipe identification. b. Comply with ASME A13.1. 2. Indicate restrained joint details and materials. 3. Submit layout drawings showing piece numbers and location, indicating restrained joint locations. 4. Indicate layout and dimensions of piping systems, including flexible connectors, expansion joints and compensators, loops, offsets, and swing joints. 5. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, including special procedures and setting dimensions. D. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection. E. Cleaning procedure and schedule. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 3 F. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions for: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Expansion joints. 3. Sleeve-type and grooved couplings. 4. Pipe Restraints: a. Determine restrained lengths and submit joint restraint details. b. Use joint restraint devices specifically designed for applications as described in manufacturer data. H. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop or factory tests and inspections. I. Field Quality-Control Submittals: 1. Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections. 2. For grooved couplings, submit written certification from coupling manufacturer stating that Contractor: a. Has been properly trained to install manufacturer’s specified products. b. Has adequate project experience installing manufacturer’s specified products. 3. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation (COPI) for components with Delegated Design Submittals specified herein. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping appurtenances. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to pipe routing or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF Standards 61, 600, and 372. B. Perform Work according to ASME B31.3 for installation of piping systems. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer’s original packaging and inspect for damage. C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. D. Protection: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 4 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings and maintain in place until installation. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Reference Section 01 73 20 – Opening and Penetrations and Drawing details. B. Flashing: 1. Metal Flashing: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Thickness: 26 gage. 2. Metal Counterflashing: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Thickness: 22 gage. 3. Lead Flashing: a. Material: Sheet lead. b. Weight: 1) Waterproofing: 5 psf. 2) Soundproofing: 1 psf. 4. Flexible Flashing Materials: a. Material: Butyl sheet and compatible with service conditions. b. Thickness: 47 mils. 5. Caps: a. Material: Steel. b. Minimum Thickness: 22 gage, and 16 gage at fire-resistive elements. 2.2 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, and couplings shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are indicated. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 5 B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties suitable for the service and loading conditions indicated. 2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS – NOT USED. 2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS – NOT USED. 2.5 DYNAMIC FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS – NOT USED. 2.6 SERVICE SADDLES A. Double-Strap Iron: 1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding internal working pressure of associated pipe and not less than 150 psi without leakage or over stressing. 2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed. 3. Taps: Iron pipe threads. 4. Materials: a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Straps: Galvanized steel. c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel. d. Seal: Rubber. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Romac; Style 202U. b. Smith-Blair; Series 313 or 366. c. Dresser; Style 91. B. Nylon-Coated Iron: 1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding internal working pressure of associated pipe and not less than 150 psi without leakage or over stressing. 2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed. 3. Taps: Iron pipe threads. 4. Materials: a. Body: Nylon-coated iron. b. Seal: Buna-N. c. Clamps and Nuts: Stainless steel. 5. Manufacturer: a. Romac; Style 202NS. b. Smith-Blair; Style 315 or 317 2.7 TAPPING SLEEVES – NOT USED. 2.8 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS – NOT USED. 2.9 GROOVED COUPLINGS – NOT USED. 2.10 COMPRESSION COUPLINGS – NOT USED. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 6 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES A. Pressure Gauges: 1. General and Design: a. All components suitable for service at 250 degrees F. b. Provide viewer protection from element rupture. c. Unless otherwise shown or required by codes, provide stem mounted or flush mounted, as required, with dial diameter as follows: PIPE SIZE DIAL SIZE GAGE CONNECTION 1-1/2 IN or less 2-1/2 IN 1/4 IN Larger than 1-1/2 IN 4-1/2 IN 1/2 IN a. Equip with white faces, black numerals, and black pointers. b. Gage accuracy: 1 percent of full range. c. Select range so that the normal operating value is in the middle third of the dial and the maximum operating pressure does not exceed 75 percent of the full-scale range. 2. Materials: a. Bourdon tube, socket, connecting tube: 316 stainless steel. b. Case: Phenolic. c. Pressure snubber: 1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel. 3. Manufacturers: a. Ashcroft. b. Ametek. 4. Accessories: a. Diaphragm Seals: 1) Provide where indicated to isolate elements from process fluid. Where a pressure switch and a pressure gauge are used at the same location, it is permissible to utilize one (1) diaphragm seal to isolate both elements from the process fluid. 2) Diaphragm seal housing shall include a flushing port. 3) Manufacturers: Ashcroft or Primary Fluid Systems. b. Provide isolation ball valve at point of connection to pipe/equipment and at panel if panel mounted. c. Utilize pressure snubbers with porous metal discs to provide pulsation dampening on gage applications as shown on schedule. 2.12 PIPE THREADS A. Pipe threads shall comply with ANSI/ASME B1.20. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 7 2.13 PIPE INSULATION – NOT USED. 2.14 FINISHES – NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flanges mate properly. D. Verify that openings are ready to receive sleeves. E. Verify that pipe plain ends to receive sleeve-type couplings are smooth and round for 12 inches from pipe ends. F. Verify that pipe outside diameter conforms to sleeve manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation. B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean end connections before installation. C. Close pipe and equipment openings with caps or plugs during installation. D. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to remove foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions. B. According to ASME B31.3. C. Pipe Penetrations: Reference Section 01 73 20 - Opening and Penetrations and Drawing details. D. Piping Flexibility Provisions: 1. General: a. Install flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, in accordance with approved shop drawings. 2. Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures: a. Install 24 inches or less from face of structures, or as illustrated on Drawings; joint may be flush with face. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 8 E. Piping Transitions: 1. Applications: a. Provide complete closure assembly where pipes meet other pipes or structures. b. Pressure Pipeline Closures: Plain end pieces with double flexible couplings, unless otherwise shown. c. Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable. 2. Installation: a. Flexible Transition Couplings: Install in accordance with coupling manufacturer’s instructions to connect dissimilar pipe and pipes with a small difference in outside diameter. b. Concrete Closures: 1) Locate away from structures so there are at least two flexible joints between closure and pipe entering structure. 2) Clean pipe surface before placing closure collars. 3) Wet nonmetallic pipe thoroughly prior to pouring collars. 4) Prevent concrete from entering pipe. 5) Extend collar a minimum of 12 inches on each side of joint with minimum thickness of 6 inches around outside diameter of pipe. 6) Make entire collar in one placement. 7) After concrete has reached initial set, cure by covering with well- moistened earth. F. Piping Expansion: 1. Piping Installation: Allow for thermal expansion due to differences between installation and operating temperatures. 2. Expansion Joints: a. Screwed and Soldered Piping Systems: Copper or galvanized and black steel pipe expansion compensator, as applicable. G. Service Saddles 1. Ferrous Metal Piping (except stainless steel): Double-strap iron. 2. Plastic Piping: Nylon-coated iron. H. Couplings 1. General: a. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. b. Before coupling, clean pipe holdback area of oil, scale, rust, and dirt. c. Do not remove pipe coating. If damaged, repair before joint is made. d. Application: 1) Metallic Piping Systems: Flexible couplings, transition couplings, and flanged coupling adapters. 2) Concrete Encased Couplings: Flexible coupling. I. Dismantling Joints: NOT USED. J. Pressure Gauges: 1. Calibrate gauges at jobsite for pressure and temperature in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 06 - 9 2. Gauge tapping position to be clear of equipment functions and movements, and protected from maintenance and operation of equipment. Gauge to be legible from an accessible standing position. K. Disinfection: Disinfect potable water piping as specified in Section 40 05 40 – Process Piping Leakage Testing and Disinfection. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing. B. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. C. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Keep equipment interior clean as installation progresses. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 1 SECTION 40 05 23 - STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless-steel tube and fittings. 2. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 40 05 06 – Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel. B. ASME International: 1. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch. 2. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125, 250 and 800. 3. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 4. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 5. ASME B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 6. ASME B16.20 - Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges: Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and Jacketed. 7. ASME B16.21 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 8. ASME B31.3 - Process Piping. 9. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A182/A182M - Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service. 2. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 3. ASTM A194/A194M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 4. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 5. ASTM A312/A312M - Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 6. ASTM A351/A351M - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure- Containing Parts. 7. ASTM A403/A403M - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. 8. ASTM A479/A479M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 2 9. ASTM A632 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing (Small Diameter) for General Service. 10. ASTM A789/A789M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 11. ASTM A813/A813M - Standard Specification for Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. 12. ASTM A814/A814M - Standard Specification for Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. 13. ASTM D3308 - Standard Specification for PTFE Resin Skived Tape. D. NSF International: 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information on pipe materials, tube materials, and fittings. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, sizes, and materials lists. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, fittings, and appurtenances. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Section 40 05 00 – Common Products for Process Piping: Requirements of subsection for Quality Assurance. B. Permanently mark each length of pipe with manufacturer's name or trademark and indicate conformance to standards. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified according to NSF 61 and NSF 372. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 3 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years’ experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Protect piping and appurtenances by storing off ground. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STAINLESS-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General Service Piping: 1. 2-1/2" & smaller: Schedule 10S: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 304L or 316L as scheduled, seamless, pickled and passivated. B. Joints: 1. 1-1/2" & smaller: Compression type couplings with threaded unions at equipment and valves as required or shown. C. Fittings: 1. 1-1/2" and smaller: Compression type, Grade 304L or 316L as scheduled. a. Reference Section 40 05 06 – Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Piping. D. Branch Connections: 1. 1-1/2" and smaller: Tee or reducing tee in conformance with fittings above. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 4 E. Unions: 1. 2" and smaller: Compression type threaded adapter: Grade 304L or 316L as scheduled, meet or exceed working pressure of adjoining pipe, bore to match pipe. F. Thread Lubricant: 1. 2" and smaller: a. General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon tape. 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Tube: 1. ASTM A269, Type 316 stainless steel, seamless, fully annealed hydraulic tubing, 0.065- inch wall thickness minimum. B. Tubing Joints: 1. Flareless compression fitting C. Tubing Fittings: 1. Flareless Compression Type Forged: ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F316. 2. Manufacturer and Products: a. Parker-Hannifin, Ferulok. b. Flodar, BA Series. D. Tubing Branch Connections: 1. Compression type tees or reducing tees in accordance with Tubing Fittings above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings. B. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer instructions. B. Join pipe, tubing, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified. Make piping layout and installation in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to headroom, valve access, and equipment clearance, and clearance for BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 5 other work. Give particular attention to piping in the vicinity of equipment. Preserve maximum access to various equipment parts for maintenance. C. Install piping/tubing neatly, free from unnecessary traps and pockets. Work into place without springing or forcing. Use fittings to make all changes in direction. Field bending and mitering are prohibited. Make all connections to equipment using flanged joints or unions. Make reducing connections with reducing fittings, only. D. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements. B. Leakage Testing and Disinfection: No Leakage. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean pipe systems thoroughly. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the system into service. Provide whatever temporary connections are required for cleaning, purging, and circulating. B. Install temporary strainers in front of pumps, tanks, solenoid valves, control valves, and other equipment where permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep these strainers in service until the equipment has been tested, then remove either entire strainer or straining elements only. Fit strainers with a line size blow-off valve. C. Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines, except as stated below, with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed. D. Blow clean of loose debris in plant process air, chemical feed, and instrument air lines with compressed air; do not flush with water. E. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush line at lower velocity. F. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from piping. 3.6 PIPE SCHEDULES A. Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tube. 1. Abbreviation and Service: a. FW – Finished Water. 2. Testing Requirements: a. Test medium: Water. b. Test pressure: 1) PTW: 150 psi. c. Test duration: 2 hours. d. Allowable leakage: Zero. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing 40 05 23 - 6 3. Gaskets and O-rings: Rubber compatible with fluid conveyed. 4. Components: a. Exposed service: 1-IN diameter and less pipe for FW. 1) Material: Stainless steel Type 304L, Schedule 10S. 2) Reference: ASTM A312. 3) Lining: None. 4) Coating: None. 5) Fittings: Compression type. 6) Joints: Compression type couplings with unions at equipment and valves. END OF SECTION BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 05 40 - 1 SECTION 40 05 40 – PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Leakage for process piping systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Pressure Testing Plan: a. Submit at least three weeks prior to testing and include at least the information that follows. 1) Proposed testing dates. 2) Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. 3) Test type. 4) Plans for test fluid conveyance, control before, during, and after testing. 5) Method of isolation. 6) Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be pressure tested. 2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Water for Testing: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, water for testing pipelines will be furnished by the Owner. However, water for any retesting resulting from failing initial tests shall be paid for by the Contractor at the Owner’s established raw water or potable water rates. 2. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for conveying water to test points. B. All pressure pipelines shall be pressure tested. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Notify Owner’s Representative and Engineer in writing 7 days in advance of testing. Notify Resident Project Representative at least 48 hours in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of Resident Project Representative or Engineer. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 05 40 - 2 B. All test equipment, temporary valves, temporary blow-offs, bulkheads, or other water control equipment and materials shall be determined and furnished by the Contractor. No materials shall be used that could be damage pipelines or their future function. C. Pressure Piping: 1. Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to protect adjacent piping or equipment and make taps in piping prior to testing. 2. Wait 28 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking is installed to perform pressure tests. If high-early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, wait may be reduced to 7 days. 3. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing. 4. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: a. Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, blind flanges, or as acceptable to Engineer. b. Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods that do not place entire existing system under test load, as accepted by Engineer. 5. Items that do not require testing include equipment seal drains, tank overflows to atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents. 6. Test Pressure: As indicated on Piping Schedule in Section 40 05 00 - Common Requirements for Process Pipe. D. Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure prior to testing. 3.3 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING A. Prior to hydrostatic testing, all pipelines shall be flushed as appropriate. B. Fluid: Clean water of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping system. C. Exposed Piping: 1. Perform testing on installed piping prior to application of insulation. 2. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area of pipe. 3. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge air pockets. 4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for duration specified in Pipe Schedule in Section 40 05 00 – Common Requirements for Process Piping, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage. 5. Examine joints and connections for leakage. 6. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 7. Empty pipe of water prior to final cleaning or disinfection. D. Buried Piping: Not Used. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 05 40 - 3 3.4 PNEUMATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING – NOT USED. 3.5 DISINFECTING PIPELINES – NOT USED. 3.6 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING OF DISINFECTED PIPELINES – NOT USED. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Report Documentation: 1. Test date. 2. Description and identification of piping tested. 3. Test fluid. 4. Test pressure. 5. Remarks, including: a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage. 6. Signed by Contractor and Resident Project Representative to represent that test has been satisfactorily completed. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Actuators for Process Valves 40 05 57 - 1 SECTION 40 05 57 - ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual actuators. 2. Electric motor actuators. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 61 03 – Common Requirements for Equipment. 2. Section 40 05 51 - Common Requirements for Process Valves: Common product requirements and Schedule for valves for placement by this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. B. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C504 – Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 2. AWWA C507 – Ball Valves, 6-In. Through 60-In. 3. AWWA C508 – Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In Through 48-In. 4. AWWA C509 – Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 5. AWWA C515 – Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 6. AWWA C517 – Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves 7. AWWA C541 - Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane-Type Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. 8. AWWA C542 - Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. C. NFPA: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information for actuator with model number and size indicated. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate parts list, materials, sizes, position indicators, limit switches, control system, actuator mounting, wiring diagrams, control system schematics, and local control panel on assembly drawings. 2. Submit actuator Shop Drawings with valve submittal. 3. Submit manufacturer installation instructions and special requirements. 4. Each motor actuator for existing valves shall be submitted within the associated valve submittal and shall include: BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Actuators for Process Valves 40 05 57 - 2 a. Product data, including size, dimensions, capacity, settings, and operating characteristics of selected models. b. Operator sizing calculations. c. Actuator and mounting stand assembly drawings and attachment to existing valves. Contractor is responsible for field verifying and coordinating actuator requirements for existing valves and submitting modifications as part of the shop drawings. d. Actuator specific wiring diagram with all options clearly identified. e. Cable datasheet and cable lengths for each actuator where provided. f. Table showing the required valve opening/closing torque compared to the actuator torque. D. Source Quality-Control Submittals: 1. Indicate results of all off-site tests and inspections. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: 1. Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation (COPI). a. For electric actuators, include verification that all limit switches and position potentiometers have been properly adjusted and that actuator correctly responds to valve position commands. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals and operation and maintenance manuals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and types of actuators. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valve Actuators in NEC Class I, Group D, Division 1 or 2 Hazardous Locations: Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section shall be approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Actuators for Process Valves 40 05 57 - 3 C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings and maintain in place until installation. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL ACTUATORS A. General: 1. Provide actuators as indicated on Drawings and specified. 2. Counterclockwise opening as viewed from above, unless specifically shown otherwise. 3. For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements. 4. For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements. 5. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. 6. Position indicator on quarter-turn valves. 7. Worm and gear operators of one-piece design, worm-gears of gear bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operator’s threaded steel reach rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut. B. Exposed Operator: 1. Galvanized and painted handwheel. 2. Lever operators for ball and plug valves 3 inch diameter and less. 3. Cranks on gear type operator. 4. Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand, and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation level. 5. Valve handles to take a padlock and wheels a chain and padlock. C. Buried Operator: 1. Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall have a 2-inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation by forked key. Enclose moving parts of valve and operator in housing to prevent contact with the soil. 2. Buried service operators to be grease packed and gasketed to withstand submersion in water to 20 feet minimum. 3. Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve boxes. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Actuators for Process Valves 40 05 57 - 4 2.2 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS – NOT USED. 2.3 REPLACEMENT ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS – NOT USED. 2.4 ACCESSORIES – NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-DEMOLITION A. The Owner will operate the existing electric motor operators on the existing valves in the presence of the Contractor and Engineer to verify operation. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACTUATORS ON EXISTING VALVES A. After installing the electric motor actuator on the existing valve, the actuators must be stroked to set the open and close limits. B. Actuators must be stroked at least three additional times in the Owner’s presence to verify and confirm the operation. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Extension Stem for Operator: Where depth of valve operating nut is 3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish operating extension stem with 2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish grade. C. Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand, furnish extension stem torque tube of a type properly sized for maximum torque capacity of valve. D. Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in floor box. E. Chain Wheel and Guide: Install chain wheel and guide assemblies or chain lever assemblies on manually operated valves over 6 feet above finish floor. Install chain to within 3 feet of finish floor. Where chains hang in normally traveled areas, use appropriate “L” type tie-back anchors. Install chains to within operator horizontal reach of 2 feet 6 inches maximum, measured from normal operator standing location or station. F. Install electric actuators above or horizontally adjacent to valve and gear box to optimize access to controls and external handwheel. BCRUA Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Actuators for Process Valves 40 05 57 - 5 3.5 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by Engineer. 3.6 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Electric valve operators as listed in Schedules and shown on Drawings require manufacturer’s field services. B. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. Two (2) person-days on-site for inspection, functional and performance testing, and completion of Manufacturer’s Certificates of Proper Installation. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 1 SECTION 40 90 01 - INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment for complete instrumentation and controls. Contractor's work will include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between equipment furnished under this contract. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such will be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who will provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C. Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection will be provided by the Contractor. Installation work will conform to applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes. D. Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system will be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals will be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittals” and will include: 1. Shop Drawings a. Shop drawings will be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication or shipment to the job. Equipment will not be fabricated or shipped to the job before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for approval will include component manufacturing data sheet indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and nomenclature: b. The submittal will be organized with a cover sheet listing each instrument being provided. Each instrument will be listed with the associated tag name, model number, and specified options. c. Separated by tabbed sections, each section will include the product cut sheets from the manufacturer. PDF will be bookmarked with each section BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 2 and sub section. d. Component drawing showing: dimensions, mounting, external connection details e. Complete schematic diagram f. Each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including electrical valves and tolerances for each component g. Power supply capacity and battery run time calculations. h. The manufacturer will be responsible for preparation of the required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 0 and Division 1 specifications. i. Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this section of the specifications, will be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for approval. 2. Equipment installation Report. a. Contractor will provide an Equipment Installation Report for each instrument (flow meter, level transmitter, etc.) to the Engineer for approval. The equipment installation report will include documentation stating that the instrument was installed and properly calibrated per the manufacturer’s recommendations by an Authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. All parameters required for programming of the instrument will be provided in a hard copy format as part of the equipment installation report. Documentation stating that the person performing the calibration and start-up is an authorized representative will be provided as well. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. Operating instructions will incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. b. Wiring diagrams will clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. c. Instrument panel wiring will be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. d. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system will be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. e. SPARE PARTS 1). Furnish standard recommended spare parts as indicated in the Manufacturer's instruction manuals, for each component in the system. 2). One (1) box of each different type and size of fuses. f. SPECIAL TOOLS: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this section of the specification will be furnished. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 3 1.4 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards will apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ASTM A-126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings 2. ASTM B-61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REMOTE EQUIPMENT A. Controls for remote electrically operated or motor driven equipment will be complete, including the necessary auxiliary relays so as to require only wiring and connections to the equipment control circuit. Contacts for control of remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment will be rated not less than 5 amperes at 24 volts unless otherwise specified herein. B. Remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment will be operated through interposing relays from the common 24 VDC system supplying power to the SCADA and control systems. 2.2 ENCLOSURES/PANELS A. Refer to section 26 29 13.01 “Industrial Control Panels” for enclosure requirements. 2.3 POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Refer to section 26 29 13.01 “Industrial Control Panels” for power system component requirements. 2.4 TUBING A. Instrument tubing will be 316 stainless steel for use with or flared fittings. Hydraulic connections to instruments will be made with separable flared fittings so that fittings may be separated and reassembled without reflaring tubing ends and without incurring any leaks. B. Tubing will be 1/4" trade size (wall thickness =.030"), will be rated for 810 psi working pressure at 150°F and will be manufactured by Halstead or approved equal. Flared fittings will be brass flared fittings. 2.5 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW TRANSMITTERS A. Leander Raw Water Delivery Point BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 4 1. This flow meter is an ultrasonic, strap on style meter with a Pulsar TTFM 6.1 flow transmitter. The transmitter is located at the electrical rack and is powered from a 120VAC circuit. Remove the original 120VAC power supply board in the transmitter and replace it with a Pulsar 24VDC power supply board. The new power supply board will be connected to the 24VDC DC UPS system within the control panel. Replace the cables between the ultrasonic flow elements and the flow transmitter. Provide field calibration of the flow meter system after the power supply board and flow element cables have been replaced. If the manufacturer requires the flow elements to be factory calibrated with the transmitter when the cables are replaced then send the flow elements and transmitter to the manufacturer. B. Temporary Flow Meter 1. Provide a temporary flow meter at the Leander Raw Water delivery point if the existing flow meter is returned to the factory for calibration. The temporary flow meter will have a 4-20mA output and a resettable totalizer such that daily logs may be made via operator inspection. 2.6 TEMPERATURE SWITCHES A. High Temperature a. Passive, bimetallic sensor, DIN rail mountable. b. Adjustable range must meet the minimum range described in the loop drawings. c. Single, normally open contact. d. Basis of design: Finder 7T.81.0.000.2301 B. Low Temperature a. Passive, bimetallic sensor, DIN rail mountable. b. Adjustable range must meet the minimum range described in the loop drawings. c. Single, normally closed contact. d. Basis of design: Finder 7T.81.0.000.2401 2.7 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A. Gauge Pressure transmitter will be of the capacitance type with a process isolated diaphragm with silicone oil fill, microprocessor based "smart" electronics, and a field adjustable rangeablility of 20:1 input range. Span and zero will be continuously adjustable externally over the entire range. Span and zero adjustments will be capable of being disabled internally. Transmitters will be NEMA 4X weatherproof and corrosion resistant construction with low copper aluminum body and 316 stainless steel process wetted parts. Accuracy, including nonlinearity, hysteresis and repeatability errors will be plus or minus 0.100 percent of calibrated span, zero based. The maximum zero elevation and maximum zero suppression will be adjustable to anywhere within sensor limits. Output will be linear isolated 4 20 mA, 24 VDC. Power supply will be 24 VDC, two-wire design. Each transmitter will be furnished with a 4 digit LCD indicator capable of displaying engineering units and/or milliamps and mounting hardware as required. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 5 B. Transmitter will be a Rosemount Model 2088 or accepted equal. Transmitter will be supplied with a 316 Stainless Steel Block and Bleed Valve, Rosemount, or accepted equal. 2.8 LEVEL SWITCH – FLOAT TYPE – BILGE STYLE A. Manufactured by GEMS, LS-1700 Series Buna N or pre-approved equal. B. Direct acting mercury-free float activated by buoyancy of weighted displacers. Activation of 1 inch differential. Switch rating of 150VAC/VDC and 1Amp, 20VA. NO contact. Stainless steel float stem and mount. Cable will be neoprene with waterproof connection. C. Provide all cables, connectors, SS mounting hardware and tubing required for a fully operational instrument system. Provide a weatherproof junction box a minimum of 24” above the mounting point of the float. 2.9 SURFACE MOUNT INTRUSION SWITCHES A. General: Surface mounted, balanced magnetic reed switch for door and access hatch intrusion detection. B. Electrical: a. Type: Form C contacts. b. Voltage: 30V ac/dc c. Current: .25A minimum d. Power: 3W maximum C. Physical a. Hermetically sealed electronics and magnet sealed within a die cast aluminum housing suitable for indoor and outdoor wet locations. b. For surface mounting to door and door frame or access hatch cover and frame. c. Mounting hardware will be provided. d. Performance: i. Gap Distance: ¾" – 2” D. Basis of Design: a. Sentrol: 2500 series PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued for Bid Instrumentation 40 90 01 - 6 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified will be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer will be provided for calibration and start up of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer will provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. B. Provide a certificate of factory calibration for each instrument. All calibration certificates will be kept on site during commissioning and startup. Field verify that the calibration of each instrument matches factory calibration, and field calibrate/verify span, range, and activation point of each instrument. Record field calibration results and include them in the operations and maintenance manual. C. Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. D. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor will provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 1 SECTION 40 90 02 - SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 A. Make and model of equipment listed as the Basis of Design (BOD) are current products as of the issue date on the drawings and specifications. Inclusion of these products is not intended to restrict advancement of the state of the art. Should newer product/technology become available that would be advantageous to the project, bring this to the engineer's attention prior to ordering and installing equipment. At no time will end of life, discontinued, or obsolete equipment be accepted. Determination of obsolescence will be at the sole discretion of the engineer. B. Definitions 1. CPU: Central Processing Unit 2. FAT: Functional Acceptance Test 3. HMI: Human Machine Interface 4. OIT: Operator Interface Touchpanel 5. ORT: Operational Readiness Test 6. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller 7. SAT: Software Acceptance Test 1.2 SCOPE A. This specification covers furnishing, installing, testing, and startup operations of a complete control system as indicated in the drawings and related specifications. The system will be totally integrated with the owners’ existing SCADA systems. B. System Components: The systems will consist of the following major components and subsystems: 1. PLCs inside control cabinets 2. Remote, network I/O 3. Network and communications equipment 4. Control system accessories 5. Spare Parts 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Control functions will include digital logic control, PID control, analog scaling, set point control, and multi-site communications B. Include all hardware, firmware, software, and application programming as necessary to make the system completely functional and operational in accordance with the contract documents. All necessary components and equipment which are not specifically described in the contract documents, but which are necessary to configure an operational BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 2 distributed control system as described herein will be identified, furnished, and installed by the contractor. C. Owners’ Existing Systems: 1. BCRUA HMI: Inductive Automation Ignition 2. BCRUA PLC System: Allen Bradley, Opto 22 3. BCRUA Network Protocol: Ethernet I/P, MQTT 4. City of Leander HMI: Inductive Automation Ignition 5. City of Leander PLC System: Allen Bradley, Opto 22 6. City of Leander Network Protocol: Ethernet I/P, MQTT 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) B. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 2. ICS 1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control. 3. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V 4. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 5. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 6. ICS 19, Diagrams, Device Designations, and Symbols for Industrial Control and Systems. 7. Publication No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). a. National Electric Code. b. ISA Standards c. IEC 2 KV Isolation test d. IEEE472/ANSI C37-90A Surge withstand capability test. e. IEEE 802.3 f. Factory Mutual (FM) g. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) h. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals will be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures”. B. Submittal #1: 1. Complete software package including Ignition modules, PLC module licensing, and remote/IO licensing. 2. Complete bill of materials (BOM) broken out by facility and system. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 3 3. Schematic ladder diagrams will include all terminal blocks, hardware devices, device IDs, terminal numbers, and device I/O designations. 4. Schedule of all I/O including the following information: a. Location b. Loop number c. Device name, ID d. Rack/slot/point of connection e. PLC tag name f. Range g. Deadband h. Set points (finalized during O&M submission) i. BCRUA/Member city column indicating publish and subscribe permissions. 5. Clearly marked data sheets on all products being submitted. 6. Network schematics including: a. Physical layer connections b. Patch panel layouts c. Rack elevations d. VPN routes, configuration, security e. Proposed IP address scheme f. MQTT broker failover scheme g. Permissions and cybersecurity plans 7. Information submitted may not be duplicated between the 26 29 13.01 Industrial Control Panels submittal and this submittal. Where equipment could be submitted under either specification section place the equipment in the submittal with the greatest number of similar items. C. Submittal # 2: 1. FAT results 2. ORT/SAT results D. Submittal # 3: 1. Within 60 days of substantial completion, submit the following: a. Operations and maintenance manuals: 1). Include all approved materials from submittal # 1 and results from submittal # 2. 2). Project specific instructions for operation and maintenance of control systems. 3). Any special manufacturer’s instructions. 4). Warranty statements including start date, end date, and emergency service contact information. b. Complete code for all PLC, SCADA HMI, remote I/O, OIT, or other programmable device. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 4 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. As a minimum, provide the following compatible spare parts: 1. One (1) spare Opto 22 Groov Epic PR2 CPU with all applicable licenses necessary to function at any site in the project. 2. One (1) spare 5 port network switch. 3. One (1) spare cellular router. 4. Two (2) pushbuttons and two (2) pilot lights of each type furnished for each facility. 5. In addition to the above, provide the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for each piece of equipment furnished. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre Approved Vendors: 1. Alterman Electric 2. Control Panels USA 3. Prime Controls 4. No Approved Equal B. All control panels, PLC cabinets, communications equipment, and power supply equipment will be in accordance with section 26 29 13.01 “Industrial Control Panels” and provided by one of the pre approved vendors. C. The completed systems will be tested prior to final assembly on the job site. Owner’s representative and the Engineer or Engineer’s representative may witness the system tests prior to system components being installed on the job site. D. Post installation tests will be held prior to startup. These tests may be witnessed by the Owner’s representative and the Engineer or Engineer’s representative. E. Assembly, Storage, & Handling: The complete system, including all individual electronic component units, will be assembled and stored in air-conditioned and heated facilities with low humidity. Once assembled and tested, the system will be stored in air- conditioned and heated rooms. Ship the unit to job site only after the equipment location has been built and its HVAC system is in operation or a temporary HVAC system is operational. 1.8 WARRANTY A. The equipment supplier and the Contractor will warrant to the Owner that the equipment delivered with reference to this specification complies with this specification. B. The equipment supplier and the Contractor will warrant the equipment as to defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Vendor will include a copy of his special equipment warranty with the shop BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 5 drawings. The warranty specified by this specification will be exclusive, and in lieu of all other warranties whether written, implied, orally presented, or statutory. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOFTWARE A. Provide one Ignition Edge and Engine license on each Opto 22 Groov Epic and Groov RIO. Ensure the version of Ignition Edge provided is compatible with the BCRUA Ignition HMI and MQTT brokers. B. Provide one Codesys runtime engine license for each Opto 22 Groov Epic and Groov RIO. C. Provide one iX Developer 2 - 603000105 license for Beijer Electronics OITs unless a license has already been provided to BCRUA during Phase 1 of this project. 2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. Required PLC and RIO manufacturers and series: 1. Leander: Opto 22 Groov Rio MM2 B. Communication Features: 1. Each PLC system will have two 10/100/1000 base T Ethernet communications modules. Communication modules may be a combination of dual onboard, dual outboard modules on the I/O bus, or a mix of onboard and outboard modules. 2.3 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) MODULES A. General Characteristics 1. Reference contract drawings for I/O at each site. 2. Anticipated I/O assignments for Opto 22 Groov Rio and Groov Epic have been shown in the contract drawings but may be arranged as needed and reflected in the shop drawings. 3. All output modules will be relay type. Sourcing or sinking output modules will not be accepted. 4. Reference contract drawings for replacement of Allen Bradley 120VAC discrete input with 24VDC discrete input. 2.4 NETWORK EQUIPMENT A. For all network equipment, accepted manufacturers are Cisco Industrial, Moxa, and Phoenix Contact. No accepted equals. B. All DIN rail mount switches and routers will be from the same manufacturer. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 6 C. Cellular modems will match the make and model used by BCRUA. Cellular modems will be configured to operate on the Verizon network. Coordinate with BCRUA to obtain SIM cards for the modems. Contractor will provide all modem setup and configuration services. 1. BCRUA: Peplink model BR1 Mini Core without WiFi or GPS. Include a DIN rail mount kit for the cellular router. D. Cellular Modem Antennas 1. Outdoor, IP 66 rated. 2. Omnidirectional with maximum gain of 6dBi within all frequencies used by the cellular modem. 3. Threaded mount with all mounting hardware and brackets included. 4. SMA or N type cable connector to be coordinated with control panel bulkhead connectors and lightning protection. 5. Basis of design: Panorama Antennas B4BE-6-60 E. DIN Rail Mount Switch 1. Switch will have the number of ports shown in the Drawings with a minimum of 10% spare ports, but not less than 2 spare ports. 2. All switch ports will be Gigabit Ethernet speed. 3. SFP slots will not count towards copper port count 4. 5 Port Switch basis of design: Moxa EDS-G2005-EL F. DIN Rail Mount Router 1. Eight 10/100/1000 base T Ethernet ports 2. Two small form pluggable (SFP) ports 3. NAT, QoS, port level MAC authentication, port number filtering. 4. Basis of design: Moxa EDR-G9010 2.15 PLC PROGRAMMING A. The loop descriptions and diagrams shown in the contract documents are functional only and do not attempt to specify detail program coding that may be required. The contractor will utilize this functional information to develop complete application programming for the PLC equipment provided under this contract. Programs will be designed to provide fail safe operation of equipment in case of PLC logic or power supply failure. Fail safe will be defined as Stopped for all drives and Closed for valves unless otherwise specified. B. The control system for the city of Leander delivery points is designed with a Master PLC located at the BCRUA water treatment plant elevated storage tank (EST) and remote I/O units located at the take points. The Master PLC was provided during Phase 1 of this project. Programming for the sites will reside in the Master PLC which includes totalizing the daily flow of all Leander delivery points. The Bagdad delivery point has an existing Allen Bradley PLC which will require programming updates. Communication between the Master PLC at the BCRUA EST and the Bagdad PLC will be necessary for supervisory valve control and take place via MQTT publish and subscribe through the BCRUA MQTT brokers. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 7 2.16 HMI DEVELOPMENT A. Contractor will develop new graphics pages or modify existing graphics pages for BCRUA and the City of Leander. Contractor will set two meetings with each entity. The first meeting will be to present preliminary screens for comment. The second meeting will be to present final versions of the pages to each entity for approval. Approval at this meeting does not exempt the contractor from the necessity of changes and updates that occur during startup and the 30 day acceptance test. 2.17 OIT DEVELOPMENT A. Contractor will develop graphics pages for each OIT. Minimum content is listed in the loop diagrams of the contract drawings. B. City of Leander Delivery Points OIT (Raw Water, Solenoid Site, Travisso): 1. 10” diagonal, 1024 x 600 minimum resolution, NEMA 4X 2. Basis of Design: Beijer Electronics X2 Pro PART 3 EXECUTION A. All elements of the SCADA system, both hardware and software, will be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the contract documents. B. The contractor will fabricate, program, test, and install the control systems, field instruments, PLCs, remote I/O, and associated equipment in a schedule designed to meet the construction sequencing. D. The contractor will coordinate access with BCRUA to set permissions on their primary and secondary MQTT broker such that the member cities may publish and subscribe to necessary tags for operation and visibility into their take points. E. NETWORK ARCHITECTURE PROGRAMMING 1. Different member city networks will be joined at their edges to BCRUA through back-to-back routers with only designated traffic allowed via port number filtering. 2. The BCRUA – Leander router connection exists at the BCRUA WTP elevated storage tank. 3. BCRUA has redundant MQTT brokers. These are intended for automatic failover and both will require configuration updates for this project. The contractor will be required to develop a tag list for all sites and coordinate credentials, login, and permissions on the BCRUA brokers so the member cities can publish and subscribe tags from their own SCADA system. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 8 5. Security a. Software Firewall: 1). Each router will be equipped with a firewall function capable of packet layer filtering, circuit level filtering, and stateful inspection. 2). Configure firewall rules at all sites to allow MQTT traffic only. 3). Disallow all other traffic. 6. All MQTT traffic will utilize TLS for transport layer encryption. Update new and existing firewall rules to allow traffic on port 8883. 7. Enable port based MAC filtering on each port such that only the designated device may be connected to a port. Shut off access on unused ports. 8. All routers and managed switches will be protected with administrative login and password on their console ports whether they be RJ45 Ethernet ports, DB9 serial ports, or other style of console port. F. IP Address Scheme 1. The IP address scheme will be an extension of each member city’s existing network. 2. Coordinate with the city of Leander for device IP addresses. Coordinate with BCRUA for device IP addresses. G. System Testing 1. Each test will be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test will initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. 2. All tests will be conducted in accordance with Engineer-approved procedures and documented. Each specific test to be performed will be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. 3. Copies of signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. 4. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. 5. The Owner and/or Engineer may actively participate in many of the tests. The Owner and/or Engineer reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The Owner and/or Engineer reserves the right to observe and/or inspect the work during any phase. 6. The Engineer's decision will be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. H. Functional Acceptance Testing (FAT) 1. SCADA contractor will test all I/O, PLC functions, power supplies, hardware/software failover schemes, OIT, HMI, and other control system components per their internal test procedures. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 9 2. All Unwitnessed FAT test results will be documented. I. Check off/ sign off for the FAT (Example) 1. Panel interface terminations 2. I/O interface terminations 3. I/O signal operation 4. Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted 5. Total loop operational a. Space for comments b. Space for signoff by Contractor 1). Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: a) Project name b) Loop number c) Component tag number or I/O module number d) Component code number analog system e) Manufacturer (for analog system element) f) Model number/serial number (for analog system) g) Summary of functional requirements, for example: 1) For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges 2) For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges 3) For computing elements: Function 4) For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) 5) For switching elements: Unit range, differential fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual) 6) For I/O modules: Input or output J. FAT Calibrations (Example) 1. For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 2. For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points 3. For controllers: Mode settings (PID) 4. For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling a. Space for comments b. Space for signoff by the Contractor 1). Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 2). Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 10 K. Operational Readiness Test (ORT) 1. General: Prior to start-up, the installed system will be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is ready for operation. Download all database on job computers from this test onwards. The Owner and Engineer will be notified when ORT starts. Copies of ORT forms that have been signed off by the Contractor will be copied and sent to the Owner and Engineer on a daily basis for record purposes only. No signature by the Owner or Engineer is required for ORT forms. 2. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system will be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by- component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. Actual real-time signals generated from the field devices will be used. Simulation of field signals will not be permitted unless doing so would present a safety hazard. Any simulation must be approved by the Engineer along with a test procedure for the specific device being simulated. a. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests will be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and checklists. 1). Project name 2). Loop number 3). Tag number for each component 4). Checkoffs/signoffs for each component a). Tag/identification b) Installation c) Termination - wiring d) Termination - tubing e) Calibration/adjustment b. Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop 1). Panel interface terminations 2). I/O interface terminations 3). I/O signal operation 4). Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted 5). Total loop operational a) Space for comments b) Space for signoff by Contractor 3. Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module will have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets will include the following: a. Project name b. Loop number c. Component tag number or I/O module number d. Component code number analog system e. Manufacturer (for analog system element) 1). Model number/serial number (for analog system) 2). Summary of functional requirements, for example: 3). For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges 4). For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges 5). For computing elements: Function 6). For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 11 7). For switching elements: Unit range, differential fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual) 8). For I/O modules: Input or output f. Calibrations; for example: 1). For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 2). For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points 3). For controllers: Mode settings (PID) 4). For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling a) Space for comments b) Space for signoff by the Contractor 4. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 5. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets and spot- check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found will be corrected. L. Software Acceptance Test (SAT) 1. SAT will be conducted by the Contractor and held concurrently with the ORT. 2. The various tests performed during Software Acceptance Test will be designed to demonstrate that the hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The test conditions will resemble, as closely as possible, actual conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation will be supplied at no cost to the Owner. 3. The Software Acceptance tests will be performed on all the equipment installed including the HMI system, PLC panels and subsystems. The SAT will be a two- part test procedure; Part I will include the PLC sub-systems to verify all I/O addresses and proper step sequence for all features. Part II will add the HMI to verify all screen displays, addressing and report generation. 4. Some of tests to be performed will include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Conduct online modifications to the database. b. Verify operability of the interfaces (hardware and software). c. Verify operability of the data communication network. d. Verify all system software functions specified. e. Verify the displays and interactive capabilities of an operator's console. f. Operate every discrete I/O point by changing states on relays, switches, or other discrete devices and verifying that the HMI and OIT graphics track the change. inject appropriate signals into every analog input point, and measure the output signal from each analog output point. Verify that the HMI and OIT graphics are scaled properly and track with the analog values. g. Validate all register mapping between Ethernet connected devices and PLC/HMI/OIT. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 12 h. Validate all MQTT tags are published and subscribed to properly and that broker failover works correctly. 5. All deficiencies identified during these tests will be corrected and retested prior to completing the SAT. M. 30 Day Acceptance Test 1. All database errors must be corrected prior to the start of the 30-Day Acceptance Test. The 30-Day Acceptance Test will not be considered successful until all database is correct. 2. Any malfunction during the test will be analyzed and corrections made by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of the test. The cost of a retest will be borne by the Contractor. 3. After completion of the Functional Demonstration Test and project Start-up, the Owner will be responsible for operation of the entire System for a period of 30 consecutive days without a single, non-field repairable malfunction. 4. During this test, Contractor personnel will be available as required to correct malfunctions and deficiencies. The Contractor will provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. 5. While this test is proceeding, the Owner will have full use of the system. 6. Any failure of SCADA or control systems that inhibit the ability to deliver raw water to any of the water treatment plants will constitute grounds for failure of the acceptance test. 7. Any malfunction during this 30 consecutive day test period which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by the Contractor's personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field- repairable malfunction. 8. Upon completion of repairs, by the Supplier, the test will be repeated as specified herein. 9. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the Supplier will perform repairs within 5 days or replacement within 30 days. 10. The warranty period will commence upon successful completion of the 30-Day Acceptance Test, and approval of all as-built drawing, O&M Manuals, completion of all related Owner training, and delivery of all spare, expendable, and test equipment. As-built drawings, O&M manuals, training, and delivery of parts must be completed within 60 days of the end of the 30-day Acceptance test. 3.2 SYSTEMS TRAINING A. Provide an integrated training program for the Owner’s personnel, both at the member city SCADA head end and the jobsite. The Contractor will submit a detailed training schedule and syllabus for approval. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs of the Owner’s personnel. Include training sessions, both classroom and field, for managers, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. B. The training will be carried out by technically competent and experienced instructors. BCRUA – Delivery Points Improvements Phase 2 Issued For Bid Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 40 90 02 - 13 C. Provide a minimum of ten (8) days of training to accommodate multiple city’s staff, multiple work shifts, and the necessity of on-site training at the following locations. 1. City of Leander Bagdad Delivery Point 2. City of Leander Travisso Delivery Point 3. City of Leander Raw Water Delivery Point 4. City of Leander Solenoid Site 3.3 ON SITE SUPERVISION A. The Supplier will provide, on-site, an experienced resident engineering manager to supervise and coordinate all of the on-site activities. This resident engineering manager will be on-site as required during the total period to effect all the activities relating to the SCADA system. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK